Fiberline Design Manual PDF

Preface
The Fiberline Design Manual is a tool for architects, engineers and technicians to facilitate the design and
construction of well-functioning structures using composite profiles.
As composite materials can be combined and formed in an infinite number of ways, the manual cannot
replace dialogue with Fiberline Composites specialists when it comes to solutions for special projects.
Composite materials and production methods remain in a state of rapid development. There will thus also be
an ongoing need for us to update data and add new Sections to this edition. Your online access to the manual
means that you will automatically receive information on amendments and updates.
New Sections in the 2nd edition

The second edition of the Design Manual includes a number of new Sections:
• The range of profiles is more extensive in the second edition. New square tubes in 120 mm, 160 mm,
200 mm, and 240 mm are now available. These profiles have been developed for use as columns.
• New IL- and UL- profiles have also been introduced to provide slim, lightweight I- and U- profiles.
These profiles have been developed for use as beams. The stiffness of the new profiles is
typically 30-50% higher than previous profiles of the same weight. Engineers will find that these new
profiles will result in structures with increased performance when measured in terms of load capacity
per kg of profile.
• New Sections have been added to cover gratings, planks, railings and stairs, as well as assembly
brackets, glued joints, and handling and transportation.
• The Section on resistance to chemicals has been simplified. For ease of access the resistance
capacities are now stated in relation to representative groups of chemicals.
• Currently, our engineers are writing two new Sections to cover load capacities of profiles in fire and
design guidance for glued connections.
Standards and calculations

Calculations in the 2nd edition are based on information in the EUROCOMP Design Code and Handbook,
which was written by The European Structural Polymeric Composites Group. In the first edition calculations
were based on the Danish standards DS 456, “Dansk Ingeniørforening’s Code of Practice for Use of Glass
Fibre Reinforced Unsaturated Polyester”.
Partial coefficients for loading and loading combinations are based on the Eurocode system, whereas partial
coefficients for material values have been selected in accordance with EUROCOMP. This has not significantly
affected the safety levels of structures dimensioned in accordance with the first edition of the Fiberline
Design Manual.
The European standard for pultruded profiles, EN 13706, is also new. Fiberline profiles meet or exceed the
highest quality level – E23 – in the standard.
Comments or improvements
We all hope you will find this manual to be a very valuable source of information. We would appreciate
receiving any comments and suggestions that can help make it even better.
We thank the many individuals and users who, either directly or indirectly, have been involved in the
preparation of this second edition of the Fiberline Design Manual
Kolding, Denmark
Henrik Thorning
1 May 2003 © Fiberline Composites A/S. All rights reserved.
Index
Chapter.Section.Page
CHAPTER 0
Preface .............................................................................................................................................................. 0.0.01
Composites ....................................................................................................................................................... 0.0.03
Pultrusion ........................................................................................................................................................... 0.0.04
Fiberline Quality Codex ...................................................................................................................................... 0.0.10
Reservations ..................................................................................................................................................... 0.0.12
Recommendation .............................................................................................................................................. 0.0.13
CHAPTER 1 CONSTRUCTION CALCULATIONS
Section 1 Introduction
Guidelines ......................................................................................................................................................... 1.1.03
Symbols and indices ......................................................................................................................................... 1.1.04
Section 2: Coefficients
Values and definitions ....................................................................................................................................... 1.2.03
Static calculations ............................................................................................................................................. 1.2.04
Deformation limits ............................................................................................................................................. 1.2.05
Material properties ........................................................................................................................................... 1.2.09
Simplified beam calculation ............................................................................................................................... 1.2.10
Loads ............................................................................................................................................................... 1.2.11
Profiles ............................................................................................................................................................. 1.2.13
Section 3 Profiles used as beams and columns

Profiles subjected to tensile strength or compression (columns and tension rods) ............................................. 1.3.03
Example 3.1: Column ......................................................................................................................................... 1.3.05
Example 3.2: Profile in lattice column ................................................................................................................. 1.3.06
Profiles subjected to compressive force and flexural moment ........................................................................... 1.3.08
Example 3.3: Column subjected to moment of stress ........................................................................................ 1.3.09
Beam loaded in transverse direction ................................................................................................................. 1.3.11
Example 3.4: Supporting beam ......................................................................................................................... 1.3.13
Section 4 Bolted joints

Calculation of bolted joints ................................................................................................................................. 1.4.03
Load-bearing capacity of bolts
- shear in longitudinal direction (0°) ..................................................................................................................... 1.4.06
- shear in transverse direction (90°) ................................................................................................................... 1.4.09
- tensile strength ................................................................................................................................................ 1.4.12
Example 4.1: Bolts subjected to shear .............................................................................................................. 1.4.13
Table 4.1 - Load-bearing capacity of bolts - shear in longitudinal direction (0°) ................................................... 1.4.14
Table 4.2 - Load-bearing capacity of bolts - shear in transverse direction (90°) ................................................. 1.4.14
Table 4.3 - Load-bearing capacity of bolts - tensile strength .............................................................................. 1.4.15
Example 4.2: Foot detail of column - I 200 x 100 x 10 ......................................................................................... 1.4.16
Example 4.3: Foot detail of column - U 200 x 60 x 10 ......................................................................................... 1.4.17
Example 4.4: Foot detail of column - square tube 100 x 100 x 8 ........................................................................ 1.4.20
Example 4.5: Beam U 200 x 60 x 10 and column I 200 x 100 x 10 ..................................................................... 1.4.22
Example 4.6: Beam and column I 200 x 100 x 10 .............................................................................................. 1.4.24
Example 4.7: Beam U 200x60x10 and column - square tube 100x100x8 .......................................................... 1.4.26
Example 4.8: Two horizontal beams I 200 x 100 x 10 ......................................................................................... 1.4.28
Example 4.9: Two horizontal beams U 200 x 60 x 10 .......................................................................................... 1.4.31
Section 5 Glued joints

Glued joints ............................................................................................................................................. 1.5.03
Example of glued joint in combination with bolts ................................................................................................. 1.5.04
Section 6 Profile tables

Introduction ..................................................................................................................................................... 1.6.003
I- profile ........................................................................................................................................................... 1.6.005
IL- profile ......................................................................................................................................................... 1.6.017
U- profile .......................................................................................................................................................... 1.6.029
UL- profile ........................................................................................................................................................ 1.6.047
Square tube .................................................................................................................................................... 1.6.059
Pipe profile ...................................................................................................................................................... 1.6.081
T - profile ......................................................................................................................................................... 1.6.085
L - profile ......................................................................................................................................................... 1.6.089
Handrail ........................................................................................................................................................... 1.6.117
Fiberline Design Manual - Revised 2002

CHAPTER 2: CONSTRUCTION
Section 1 Planks, pultruded gratings and moulded gratings

Product programme and load-bearing capacities ............................................................................................. 2.1.03
Load-bearing capacity in kN/m2 - planks ......................................................................................................... 2.1.05
Load-bearing capacity in kN/m2 - pultruded gratings ........................................................................................ 2.1.06
Load-bearing capacity in kN/m2 - moulded gratings ......................................................................................... 2.1.09
Moulded gratings with point load ....................................................................................................................... 2.1.13
Example 5.1: Uniformly distributed load on planks ............................................................................................ 2.1.15
Example 5.2: Point load on moulded gratings .................................................................................................... 2.1.17
Machining gratings ............................................................................................................................................. 2.1.20
Section 2 Railings
Product programme and load-bearing capacity ............................................................................................... 2.2.02
Design of railings ............................................................................................................................................... 2.2.03
Railing stanchions - load-bearing capacity in kN/m ........................................................................................... 2.2.04
Detail 3.1 ............................................................................................................................................................ 2.2.07
Detail 3.2 ............................................................................................................................................................ 2.2.08
Example of railing construction .......................................................................................................................... 2.2.09
Section 3 Stairs
Concept ............................................................................................................................................................ 2.3.03
Bases for construction ....................................................................................................................................... 2.3.04
Load-bearing capacity of strings in kN/m .......................................................................................................... 2.3.06
Detail 4.1 ............................................................................................................................................................ 2.3.08
Detail 4.2 ............................................................................................................................................................ 2.3.10
Detail 4.3 ............................................................................................................................................................ 2.3.11
Detail 4.4 ............................................................................................................................................................ 2.3.12
Detail 4.5 ............................................................................................................................................................ 2.3.13
Example of stair construction ............................................................................................................................. 2.3.14
CHAPTER 3: BRACKETS FOR ASSEMBLY
The products and how to use them ................................................................................................................... 3.1.03

Example 8.1 ...................................................................................................................................................... 3.1.04
Example 8.2 ...................................................................................................................................................... 3.1.07
Example 8.3 ...................................................................................................................................................... 3.1.09
Example 8.4 ...................................................................................................................................................... 3.1.12
CHAPTER 4: FIRE TECHNICAL PROPERTIES
Fire Technical Properties .................................................................................................................................... 6.1.03
CHAPTER 5: CHEMICAL RESISTANCE
Introduction ....................................................................................................................................................... 5.1.03

Fiberline qualities compared to metals and wood .............................................................................................. 5.1.04
Chemical resistance .......................................................................................................................................... 5.1.05
CHAPTER 6 HANDLING AND TRANSPORTING PROFILES
Section 1 Machining pultruded profiles ......................................................................................................................... 6.1.03
Section 2 Handling and transporting structures ........................................................................................................... 6.2.03
CHAPTER 7: ENVIRONMENT AND DISPOSAL / RECYCLING
Environment during manufacturing and machining ............................................................................................. 7.1.03

Environmental stress at the user's site .............................................................................................................. 7.1.03
Waste handling / recycling ................................................................................................................................. 7.1.04
CHAPTER 8: FIBERLINE STANDARD TOLERANCES
Standard tolerances for P2600, P3510 and 4506 ............................................................................................... 8.1.03

CHAPTER 9: MISCELLANEOUS
Section 1 Reference to standards and bibliography
Section 2 Glossary

CHAPTER 0: COMPOSITES
Section 1 Composites
Composites ........................................................................................................................................... 0.0.03
Pultrusion .............................................................................................................................................. 0.0.04
Fiberline Quality Codex ......................................................................................................................... 0.0.10
Reservations .......................................................................................................................................... 0.0.12
Recommendation .................................................................................................................................. 0.0.13
Fiberline Composites A/S - Design Manual - Revised 2002 0.0.1

0.0.2 Fiberline Composites A/S - Design Manual - Revised 2002
Composites
Composites are defined as materials which consist of not less than two different component materials, neither
of which are well suited for construction purposes on their own, but which in combination result in a very strong
and rigid material. Composites have been known and used in buildings for thousands of years. Straw mixed
with clay for building clay huts in the Stone Age is one example. Steel-reinforced concrete is an example from
modern times. In combinations of this type, tensile force is absorbed by the steel reinforcement, while the
concrete absorbs the compressive load.
Plastics reinforced with various forms of fibre make up a significant portion of the composites that are used by
modern society. Fibre-reinforced plastics can be divided roughly into two groups: synthetic materials reinforced
with short fibres, and synthetic materials reinforced with long (continual) fibres. Composites that are reinforced
with short fibres are used primarily for injection moulding or extruded plastic products. Composites reinforced
with long or continuous fibres are often used in large structures such as ships, pressure tanks, and wind turbine
wings. In fibre-reinforced plastic materials, the properties of the fibres are used to resist tensile and compressive
loads, while the plastic – the matrix material – transfers shear.
When using composite materials instead of traditional materials such as steel, for example, there are normally
significant reductions in weight due, in part, to the specific properties of the individual components and low
dead weight, and partly because it is possible to produce composites for specific purposes. Because it is a
combination of materials, a composite product can be combined and designed with a view to specific load-
bearing capacities, while providing a number of advantages in relation to traditional materials, such as resistance
to chemicals, as well as electrical and thermal insulating properties.
During recent decades, composite materials have steadily gained ground in nearly all sectors. The rise in use of
composites can be explained by better and more comprehensive knowledge of the fundamental properties of
composites and their long service life. This has enabled more specific uses and has reduced security factors to
realistic levels.

Pultrusion
With the exception of high-technology industries such as space and aeronautics, producing composite
materials has developed from production of low-technology products manufactured by hand, for example, to
automated manufacturing of more advanced products.
Pultrusion is a process for continual production of composite profiles with constant cross sections and
material properties which are manufactured for specific purposes. The method ensures consistent quality that
can be reproduced. In principle, the process is simple and has been used since the 50s in its basic form.
At Fiberline Composites A/S, pultrusion is done by continual reinforced material being pulled through a guide
where the fibres are placed precisely in relation to the profile cross section. The fibres are then led through
processing equipment where the fibres are impregnated with the matrix material. The combined mixture of
fibres and matrix is pulled on through the heated equipment where the profile is cured in its final geometry.
The fully cured profile is then pulled forward to a floating suspended saw which cuts the profiles into defined
lengths. (See Figure 1.)
Resin injection Ventilation
Heating and curing Pulling devices Saw

Reinforcement
Fig. 1
The actual combination of reinforcement in a profile, in other words, the type and number of continuous fibres,
as well as the type and dimensions of complex weaves and mats are arranged in a way that facilitates visual
checking when the fibres and mats are positioned in a profile. Precise positioning of fibres and mats in
relation to the cross section of a profile is very important to the properties and qualities of the finished
product.
When the reinforcement is pulled into the processing equipment, the matrix is added by injection. Pultrusion
by injection is advantageous in controlling and checking the reinforcement, it speeds changing from one
profile to another, and eases matrix changes during a process. The degree of impregnation of the fibres is
another decisive factor for the properties of the finished product, and the injection method used by Fiberline
Composites A/S always ensures the best possible impregnation. The injection method is a fully enclosed
process which keeps evaporation of solvents at a minimum. This ensures a good work environment in
comparison with traditional pultrusion, in which reinforcement is led through an open vat containing the matrix.

After the fibres are impregnated with the injected matrix, the entire product moves forward to the next zone in
the process where heating takes place and where curing of the profile is accelerated. The final curing takes
place in the last section of the processing equipment. A profile is thus fully cured and stable in form when it
leaves the processing equipment. The pulling power that overcomes friction in the processing equipment
– and thus the driving force in the process – is provided by pullers placed outside the processing equipment.
Pulling can be done by either belts or reciprocal pullers. During the last phase of the process, the profiles are
shortened by a saw mounted to move at the same speed as the profile being pulled out of the equipment.
This ensures a continual process.
Fig. 2: Fiberline pultrusion equipment
Fig. 3: Precise control of fibreglass reinforcement

A profile produced by pultrusion contains three primary components: reinforcement, matrix and additives.
Reinforcement
The role of reinforcement in composite materials is primarily to add mechanical properties to the material such
as strength and stiffness. However, electrical properties also depend on the reinforcement, and the type of
reinforcement is therefore of decisive importance for the properties of a profile. The most common types of
reinforcement are fibreglass, carbon fibres and aramid fibres. Fibreglass adds good all-round properties to the
material, while carbon fibres provide high stiffness. Aramid fibres enable profiles to withstand impact. Fibreglass-
reinforced profiles provide electrical insulation and electromagnetic transparency, whereas carbon fibres result
in electro-conductive profiles.
Finally, the orientation direction of reinforcement is of great importance for the properties of finished products in
relation to load-bearing capacities.
The profiles manufactured by Fiberline Composites A/S are a combination of various types of roving and different
types of complex weaves and mats.
Structural profiles are often subjected to loads that are transverse to the length of the profile (i.e. transversal to
the direction of pultrusion), and these profiles must often be capable of resisting pulling and similar stress
caused by bolt removal, etc. Therefore, not only is smooth unidirectional roving used, but also roving with some
of the fibres oriented transversely. In addition, mats and weaves with different fibre orientations are used. Mats
and weaves with fibre orientations of between 45° and 90° contribute primarily to improving resistance to stress
caused by removal of bolts and mechanical properties in the transverse direction. The combination of roving and
mats can be designed according to the requirements made to the individual profile. The content of the reinforcement
in Fiberline structural profiles is normally 60% according to weight. All structural profiles contain combinations of
mats and weaves. Therefore, Fiberline structural profiles always comply with the mechanical properties which
are stated in this Design Manual.
Types of roving
Unidirectional Spun Mock
Types of mat
Continuous mat Weave Complex mat Bidirectional complex

Random fibre orientation 0º/90º 0º/90º membrane + random mat
fibre orientation 0º/±45º/90º weave + random
fibre orientation

If a profile will be used in a corrosive environment, a so-called overlay veil is used which can be thin fibreglass
matting, thin thermal plastic polyester matting, or acrylic matting which is placed on the entire profile surface to
protect against corrosion of the glass fibres and ensuing deterioration in the mechanical properties of the profile.
The pultrusion process necessitates that a certain number of the fibres are oriented in the direction of pultrusion,
but apart from this, reinforcement can be structured in innumerable ways, depending upon the load. It is therefore
important to note that profiles which are not produced as structural profiles can have mechanical properties that
are significantly different from the values which are stated in this book.

Matrix
The role of the matrix in a composite profile is partly to bind the reinforcement together, and partly to hold the
reinforcement in place at the right points in relation to the cross section for optimal utilization of the mechanical
properties. The type of matrix also determines properties such as corrosion resistance, electrical insulation
properties, and fire and temperature resistance. The following three types of matrix are fundamentally well
suited to the pultrusion process: polyester, epoxy and phenol.
Polyester
Polyester is the most frequently used matrix, as it gives a composite good all-round properties.
Unsaturated polyester can be divided into three main groups: orthopolyester, isopolyester and vinylester.
In relation to orthopolyester, isopolyester increases impact resistance, provides greater flexibility, and
increases resistance to temperatures. It also increases corrosion resistance.
Vinyl ester has even better corrosion-resistant and thermal properties. Since vinyl ester has greater elongation
properties than ortho- and isopolyester, it also provides a composite with better impact resistance and
improved fatigue properties.
Epoxy
Epoxy is used primarily for carbon-reinforced profiles, giving composites better fatigue and mechanical
properties. Epoxy is more resistant to thermal influences and has better electrical properties.
Phenol
Phenol is used when there are requirements for high fire resistance, temperature resistance, low smoke
generation, and flame retardation when subjected to fire.
British petroleum platform: there are

Fiberline railing systems on all three
decks, and ladders and gratings in
phenol quality to enhance fire safety.

Additives
Additives are a common name for agents which are added to the matrix. Depending upon their purpose, additives
can be divided into three fundamental groups: price-reducing additives, process-related additives and function-
related additives. While the purpose can vary, additives will always influence the corrosion resistance of profiles,
as well as their mechanical and fire properties.
Price-reducing additives*
The only function of price-reducing additives is to fill out the form of a profile, and adding such additives
enables reduction of more expensive reinforcement and matrix materials. It is thus possible to reduce the
price of the finished profiles accordingly. Profiles have significantly poorer mechanical properties when
the amount of reinforcement is reduced. Moreover, most types of price-reducing additives also result in
lower corrosion resistance and lower resistance to most chemicals.
None of the Fiberline structural profiles described in this book contain price-reducing additives.
*Are often referred to as fillers.
Process-related additives
Process-related additives are substances with advantageous effects on the pultrusion process, and on
the properties and appearance of a cured profile. An example of this is a so-called low-profile additive
which is used to avoid excessive shrinkage during curing of profiles. The additive prevents formation of
hair-line cracks in surfaces, while improving profile resistance to corrosion, as well as improving fatigue
properties. It also gives profiles more exact geometric tolerances and lower internal stress.
Function-related additives
Function-related additives have an advantageous effect in relation to the use of a finished profile. An
example of this is the adding of pigments. Fire retardants are another example. The latter are added to
obtain self-extinguishing properties and to retard flame spread.
Of course, function-related additives can also be added in amounts so large that they degrade the
mechanical properties of a profile.
All the profiles which are presented in the Design Manual have been tested with the relevant content of
process- and function-related additives.
See also the Fiberline Quality Codex on pages 0.10-0.11

Fiberline Quality Codex
Fiberline structural profiles are manufactured according to the guidelines stated below, which ensure good
quality for most purposes.
1. Matrix
A low-profile quality of either isophthalic polyester or vinyl ester with overlay veil.
„Low-profile“ quality provides:

- profiles with smooth, even surfaces
- exact measurements and dimensional stability
- stress-free material with no cracks or shrinkage
- increased strength against fatigue and impact.
Isophthalic polyester provides

- improved mechanical properties
- increased heat resistance
- improved resistance to corrosion and chemicals in comparison with cheaper orthopolyesters.
Vinyl ester
is used in extremely corrosive environments, and also in environments with extreme mechanical
influences.
Overlay veil
is used for optimal weather and corrosion resistance.
Price-reducing additives
are not used, because additives which replace reinforced fibreglass reduce the strength of profiles.
Price-reducing additives also increase water absorption and reduce resistance to corrosion and
weather.
The Fiberline matrix qualities listed below form the bases for the Design Manual.
P2600 Isophthalic polyester (standard low profile)

P3510 Vinyl ester (high temperature resistance, low profile)
P4506 Isophthalic polyester (fire retardant, low-profile)
It is also possible to produce profiles in other matrix materials with special properties. However, this subject
is outside the range of this manual.

2. Reinforcement
Fiberline profiles are reinforced with E-glass roving with woven and complex mattings.
In comparison with profiles which are only reinforced with longitudinal roving and continual matting, the
complex reinforcement of Fiberline profiles provides
- increased transverse strength
- increased shear strength
- increased bolt removal strength / pin-bearing strength
- improved resistance to long-term creep.
3. Mechanical properties
Fiberline structural profiles fulfil the requirements made to profiles which are classified as E23 in
accordance with EN 13 706.
4. Glass content
Glass content: approximately 60% (weight)
5. Fibre distribution
The fibres are evenly distributed across the cross section of a profile to ensure uniform strength.
For more detailed material properties, see Chapter 1: Construction calculation.

Reservations
The Fiberline Design Manual is the result of close cooperation with leading research institutes and engineering
companies, and of laboratory tests which, in some cases, have been full-scale tests.
The values and references listed are stated to the best knowledge available to Fiberline. Fiberline cannot be held
responsible for possible errors and/or omissions in this manual.
Please note that the data and references contained in this manual may be changed at any time without previous
notice.
As profiles in composite materials can be manufactured in infinitely many variations and qualities, two profiles
with identical geometries do not necessarily have the same properties. The Fiberline Design Manual can therefore
only be used for the Fiberline qualities stated.

Recommendation 1
Point loading of profiles, for example, I-, U-, and L- profiles, as well as square tubes.
The types of loads shown in Figure 1 are not appropriate for composite materials and should be
avoided, unless they have been proven by analysis.
Therefore, Fiberline recommends the use of a washer diameter of 2.5 · d
This is valid for completed structures as well as for handling and mounting.
Figure 1 illustrates point load with bolts, but is also valid for other types of point load.
Fig. 1

Recommendation 2
Permanently loaded structures
In cases of permanent load, Fiberline profiles should not be used to more than a maximum of 1/3 of the ultimate
limit state load, to minimize the risk of stress corrosion.

CHAPTER 1 CONSTRUCTION CALCULATIONS
Section 1 Introduction
Guidelines ............................................................................................................................................ 1.1.03
Symbols and indices ............................................................................................................................. 1.1.04
Values and definitions .......................................................................................................................... 1.2.03
Static calculations ................................................................................................................................ 1.2.04
Deformation limits ................................................................................................................................ 1.2.05
Material properties ................................................................................................................................ 1.2.09
Simplified beam calculation ................................................................................................................. 1.2.10
Loads .................................................................................................................................................... 1.2.11
Profiles ................................................................................................................................................. 1.2.13
Section 3 Profiles as beams and columns

Profiles subjected to tensile strength or compression (columns and tension rods) ............................. 1.3.03
Example 3.1: Column ............................................................................................................................ 1.3.05
Example 3.2: Profile in lattice column ................................................................................................... 1.3.06
Profiles subjected to compressive force and flexural moment .............................................................. 1.3.08
Example 3.3: Column subjected to moment of stress ........................................................................... 1.3.09
Beam loaded in transverse direction ..................................................................................................... 1.3.11
Example 3.4: Supporting beam ............................................................................................................. 1.3.13
Section 4 Bolted joints

Calculation of bolted joints ................................................................................................................... 1.4.03
- shear in longitudinal direction (0°) ...................................................................................................... 1.4.06
- shear in transverse direction (90°) ....................................................................................................... 1.4.09
- tensile strength ................................................................................................................................... 1.4.12
Example 4.1: Bolts subjected to shear .................................................................................................. 1.4.13
Table 4.1 - Load-bearing capacity of bolts - shear in longitudinal direction (0°) ................................... 1.4.14
Table 4.2 - Load-bearing capacity of bolts - shear in transverse direction (90°) ................................... 1.4.14
Table 4.3 - Load-bearing capacity of bolts - tensile strength ................................................................ 1.4.15
Example 4.2: Foot detail of column - I 200 x 100 x 10 .......................................................................... 1.4.16
Example 4.3: Foot detail of column - U 200 x 60 x 10 .......................................................................... 1.4.17
Example 4.4: Foot detail of column - square tube 100 x 100 x 8 .......................................................... 1.4.20
Example 4.5: Beam U 200 x 60 x 10 and column I 200 x 100 x 10 ....................................................... 1.4.22
Example 4.6: Beam and column I 200 x 100 x 10 .................................................................................. 1.4.24
Example 4.7: Beam U 200x60x10 and column - square tube 100x100x8 ............................................ 1.4.26
Example 4.8: Two horizontal beams I 200 x 100 x 10 ........................................................................... 1.4.28
Example 4.9: Two horizontal beams U 200 x 60 x 10 ............................................................................ 1.4.31
Section 5 Glued joints

Glued joints ........................................................................................................................................... 1.5.03
Example of glued joint in combination with bolts ................................................................................. 1.5.04
Section 6 Profile tables

Introduction ......................................................................................................................................... 1.6.003
I- profile ............................................................................................................................................... 1.6.005
IL- profile ............................................................................................................................................. 1.6.017
U- profile ............................................................................................................................................. 1.6.029
UL- profile ........................................................................................................................................... 1.6.047
Square pipe ......................................................................................................................................... 1.6.059
Tube profile .......................................................................................................................................... 1.6.081
T - profile ............................................................................................................................................. 1.6.085
L - profile ............................................................................................................................................. 1.6.089
Handrail ............................................................................................................................................... 1.6.117
Fiberline konstruktionshåndbog - Kapitel 1 - Rev. 2002

CHAPTER 1
Section 1: Introduction
Guidelines .................................................................................................................................. 1.1.03
Symbols and indices ................................................................................................................... 1.1.04
Fiberline Composites A/S - Design Manual - Chapter 1 - Revised 2002 1.1.1

Guidelines
Contents
This section deals with fibreglass-reinforced polyester and vinylester structural profiles in qualities P2600, P3510
and P4506. Fiberline Composites A/S can also supply other qualities.
The section on calculation contains information on profiles and materials, and describes the theoretical basis for
static calculations. A method is described for designing columns, transversely loaded columns, transversely
loaded beams across one, two or three sections, and bolted joints.
The section on dimensioning is supplemented by examples in which a column, a beam, and a number of joints
are illustrated and designed. There is a data page for each profile. The front of the page describes the geometry
and load-bearing capacity of the profile as a tension/compression rod, while the back of the page describes the
profile as a transversely loaded beam across one, two and three spans. Parts of beams which are subjected to
compression must be secured, so there is no risk of lateral buckling. All calculations of columns and beams are
designed in accordance with the methods indicated in the Design Manual. The Design Manual is in accordance
with the guidelines laid down by the EUROCOMP Design Code.
Load-bearing capacities for the conditions stated below are listed on the data page for each profile.
Ultimate limit state
Security against failure due to overload or lacking stability is assessed by partial coefficients being assigned to
loads and strengths, respectively.
Serviceability limit state
The behaviour of a structure during operation is assessed.
Deformation point
A beam structure is typically dimensioned so maximum deflection is 1/400 to 1/200 of the span of the beam. The
most probable active load will normally be a combination of a permanent load and the part of the variable load
which will probably exist at all times.
Aggressive environments
In cases of aggressive environments, it must also be determined whether the materials used in a construction
have the properties which prevent unacceptably rapid corrosion. Please refer to the summary on page 5.1.04. In
case of doubt, Fiberline technicians can assist in an assessment.
Accident limits
For use in cases in which the behaviour of a structure in inadvertent circumstances such as fire and explosions
can be approximated on the basis of breaking point and application limit indicators.
The limits are described in Section 2, in which relevant material properties are also listed.

Symbols and indeces
Symbols
A area
a distance from bolt to laminate edge in direction of force
b width
c distance from bolt to laminate edge perpendicular to direction of force
d diameter
E modulus of elasticity
e eccentricity, centre of gravity distance
F force
f strength
G modulus in shear, permanent load
g dead weight per unit length or unit area
H height
I moment of inertia
k coefficient
L length, width of span
M moment
N normal force
P force (in bolt)
p load per unit length
q variable load per unit length
Q variable load
r radius
T thickness
t thickness
v angle
V shear force
W section modulus
γ partial coefficient
δ deformation, deflection
λ relative slenderness ratio
ν Poisson’s ratio
σ normal stress
τ shear stress
Indexes
0° direction corresponding to the pulling direction during the pultrusion process (longitudinal direction)
90° direction perpendicular to the pulling direction during the pultrusion process (transverse direction)
b bending
c compression
cr critical
d design value
el theoretical elasticity
k characteristic buckling length
r relative
t tension
v shear, angle
τ shear
1.1.4 Fiberline Composites A/S - Design Manual - Chapter 1 - Revised 2002

CHAPTER 1
Values and definitions ........................................................................................................ 1.2.03
Static calculations .............................................................................................................. 1.2.04
Deformation limits ......................................................................................................... 1.2.05
Material properties ............................................................................................................. 1.2.09
Simplified beam calculation .......................................................................................... 1.2.10
Loads ................................................................................................................................. 1.2.11
Profiles ............................................................................................................................... 1.2.13

I
Values and definitions
Direction for strength and stiffness
Figure 2.1 Indication of direction for strength and stiffness
Definition of direction
Figure 2.1 shows the main directions for the material constants stated. 0° indicates the longitudinal direction of
the profile. This is also the pulling direction during the pultrusion process, as well as the direction normally used
for deflecting beams or columns. The direction which is transverse to the longitudinal direction of the profile is
indicated as 90°. The material constants for this direction are used primarily for joints.
The only material constants stated as independent of direction are shear strength and modulus in shear. These
are theoretically dependent on direction, but the differences are marginal in practice, and the lowest value
measured is therefore used.
All values indicated are based on measurements carried out in the laboratories of Fiberline Composites A/S, or
by independent test institutions. All measurements have been carried out in accordance with the standards
indicated.
For direction indicators, please see Figure 2.1.
Tables 2.5 to 2.11 present all significant geometric data, E-modulus, E0° · Ixx, as well as the theoretical mass-
per-metre profiles of the various cross-section diagrams of profiles contained in the profile tables.

Static calculations
Static calculations for supporting structures in composites or pultruded profiles are normally based on nationally
or internationally recognized regulations and standards.
The static calculations contained in this version of the Fiberline Design Manual are in accordance with the
EUROCOMP Design Code, the calculation methods and safety philosophy of which are in accordance with
Eurocode 1, section 1, Bases for projecting and stress on supporting structures. The comprehensive stress
indicators contained in this code have now been released within the Eurocode system, and can be used in
connection with the Fiberline Design Manual.
As yet, actual structural standards for composites have not been adopted by the Eurocode system. Until a
Eurocode and possible National Application Documents become available, the EUROCOMP Design Code is
the basis for the Fiberline Design Manual.

Deformation limits
Static calculations of a composite structure are an assessment of the behaviour of the structure within a number
of deformation limits. These deformation limits are determined by official regulations etc., or by builders'
requirements based on the use of a structure, for example, minimum requirements for rigidity to support a
machine.
On page 1.2.11, there is a list of the loads which are normally taken into consideration in designing a supporting
structure.
Ultimate limit stress

This assesses certainty against failure due to overload or lack of stability by assigning partial coefficients to loads
and strengths.
The effect of external influences, usually expressed as calculated stress Sd, must be less than the resistance
capability Rd.
For each statistically independent load, the Sdeffect is determined at relevant test points in the structure on the
basis of permanent and variable factors.
For systems with one variable factor, the effect is determined by
Sd,k = Σ j=1, …, m γG,j · Gk,j + 1.50 · Qk
as
G k,j : permanently active factor (from permanently active load no. j at test point no. k)
Qk : variable active factor (at test point no. k)
γ G,j : partial coefficient of permanent load (no. j)
The value of γG,j is 1.35. However, the value of γG,j is 1.0 in cases in which the permanent load
benefits stability.
For systems with several variable factors, the effect of each of these factors is determined solely by
Sd,k,i = Σ j=1, …, m γ G,j · Gk,j + 1.50 · Qk,i
as
G k,j : permanently active factor (from permanently active load no. j at test point no. k)
Q k,i : variably active factor (no. i at test point no. k)
γ G,j : partial coefficient of permanent load (no. j)
The value of γG,j is 1.35. However, the value of γG,j is 1.0 in cases in which the permanent load
benefits stability.
In other cases, the combined load is assessed as
Sd,k = Σ j=1, …, m γ G,j · Gk,j + 1.35 · Σ i=1,…,n Qk,i

The highest value of the Sd factor for load combinations considered here is indicated as the calculated effect.
This must be less than the calculated resistance which is determined by testing or calculating the established
average supporting capacity R as expressed in
R
________
Rd = k
γm
R
______k
R k
_____________________________________
=
γm γ m,1 · γ m,2 · γ m,3 · γ m,4
in which the partial coefficients γ m,1, γ m,2, γ m,3 and γ m,4 each describe the following effect,
γ m,1 : the production method
γ m,2 : the degree of postcuring
γ m,3 : the certainty of dimensional stability, the difference between operating temperature and HDT
(Heat Distortion Temperature)
γ m,4 : operating temperature
The partial coefficients γ m,1, γ m,2

and γ m,3 have been determined in accordance with the EUROCOMP Design Code.
γ m,1 = 1.15 Fiberline profiles are pultruded (EUROCOMP, Table 2.4)
γ m,2 = 1.1 Fiberline profiles are fully postcured at works (EUROCOMP, Table 2.5)
γ m,3 = 1.0 Fiberline profiles have an HDT ultimate temperature for dimensional stability of 100°C
(EUROCOMP, Table 2.6)
The partial coefficient γ m,4 describes the strength and stiffness of the pultruded profile dependent on the opera-
ting temperature. Fiberline recommends that γ m,4 be established as indicated in Table 2.0
O p eratin g γ m ,4
tem p eratu re
( oC ) S h ort-term lo ad L o n g -term load
d ry con d itio n
-20 1.0 2.5
0 1.0 2.5
20 1.0 2.5
40 1.0 2.5
60 1.0 2.5
80 1.25 3.13
Table 2.0
For values not listed in the table, γ m,4 can be established by interpolation.
The load time for a long-term load is measured in years.

The total partial coefficient γm of material resistance is shown in the table below.
For values not listed in the table, γ m can be established by interpolation.
The dimensions of a composite structure will often be determined by assessment of operating conditions. If an
ensuing failure of the structure can be regarded as being very significant or as being very insignificant, the
designer can assess whether the indicators listed below should be made more stringent or if they should be
relaxed.
Operating temperature γ m =γ m,1 γ m,.2 γ m,.3 γ m,4

( oC )
dry condition Short-tem load Long-term load
-20 1.3 3.2
60 (80) 1.3 3.2
80 (100) 1.6 4.0
Table 2.0b The values in parentheses are for profiles in vinylester.
Deformation limits in use
This is an assessment of the behaviour of a structure in operation, in particular its deformations. Typically, a
beam structure is dimensioned so the maximum deflection is between 1/400 and 1/200 of the span of the
beam.
At relevant test points, the effect - which in these analyses is usually a deformation - is compared with an
acceptable deformation limit.
In determining these factors, consideration can be taken to the fact that all variable loads do not necessarily
occur simultaneously.
Section 2.3.4 of the EUROCOMP Design Code suggests use of the formulas listed below in testing deforma-
tion limits of structures in operation.
When all permanent loads and not more than one variable load are active
Rk,i > Sk,i
Sk,i = Σ j=1, …, m Gk,j + Qk,i
For the simultaneity factor stated in EUROCOMP as 0.9, Section 1 of Eurocode states values which open
possibilities for more realistic establishment of the simultaneous influence of various types of loads. An engineer's
assessment will often also justify the reduction of the simultaneity factor to a value lower than 0.9.
Rk,i > Sk,i
Sk = Σ j=1, …, m Gk,j + 0,90 · Σ i=1,…,n Qk,i

Fire load
In a calculated assessment of the resistance capability of a supporting structure subjected to fire, it is assumed
that the structure will be affected by the most likely type of load.
Temperature sequences can be established in accordance with Eurocode 1, Section 2-2 (DS/ENV 1991-2-2).
Deformation limits in accidents
The behaviour of a structure in inadvertent circumstances such as a fire, impact or explosion, can be assessed
on the basis of the indicators for deformation limits and deformation limits in use.
Typical values are normally used for these deformation limits, i.e., values which are as realistic as possible.
In principle, calculations follow investigations of deformation limits, since all partial coefficients have been
assigned the value 1.0. Variable loads have been assigned sizes corresponding to the most likely load.

Material properties
The material values stated in this section are valid in the temperature range of -20° C to 60° C.
For temperatures above 60° C, strength and stiffness must be reduced as stated on page 1.2.6 by division by the
value γm,4.
Typical strength values (dry condition)
[MPa]
Flexural strength, 0° fb,0° 240
Flexural strength, 90° fb,90° 100
Tensile strength, 0° f t, 0° 240
Tensile strength, 90° f t,90° 50
Compressive strength, 0° f c, 0° 240
Comprehensive strength, 90° fc,90° 70
Shear strength fτ 25
Pin-bearing strength, longitudinal f cB, 0° 150
direction
Pin-bearing strength, transverse direction f cB, 90° 70
Table 2.1
This table is based on test results. The values listed can form the basis for calculation of the details of joints and
local factors on profiles. Moreover, general beam and/or column calculations can be based on these values for
calculating stability and possible long-term effects, among other things.
In many cases, assessment of beam structures can be based on simplified calculations which use an assumed
strength formula in the longitudinal direction (0°). In this type of calculation, tests of the local stability of flanges
and creep phenomena in Fiberline profiles can be omitted. Simplified beam calculations are described on page
1.2.10.
Typical stiffness figures and transverse contraction (dry condition)
[MPa] [--]
Modulus of elasticity E 0° 23 000 / 28 000
Modulus of elasticity E 90° 8 500
Modulus in shear G 3 000
Poisson’s ratio ν 0°,90° 0.23
Poisson’s ratio ν 90°,0° 0.09
Table 2.2
The E-modulus of the profiles varies from 23 to 28 GPa, depending on the geometry and reinforcement. See the
relevant values in the section on the load-bearing capacities of the individual profiles.

Strength values for use in calculations
Short-term value [MPa] Long-term value [MPa]
Flexural strength, 0° fb, 0°,d 185 75
Flexural strength, 90° fb, 90°,d 75 30
Tensile strength, 0° ft, 0°,d 185 75
Tensile strength, 90° ft, 90°,d 40 30
Compressive strength, 0° fc, 0°,d 185 75
Compressive strength, 90° fc, 90°.d 75 30
Shear strength fτ,d 20 8
Table 2.3
The values listed above correspond to the figures in Table 2.1 divided by γm = 1,3. See the section below
regarding simplified beam calculations. The load time for a long-term load is measured in years.
Simplified calculation of beam structures
If deflection stress is kept under the deformation limits listed below, calculation of beam structures with Fiber-
line profiles can be simplified when tests of long-term effects and assessment of local stability can be omitted.
Calculated deformation limit for tension

when tests of long-term effects and assessment of local stability of flanges can be omitted
[MPa]
Flexural strength, 0° fb,0°,d 75

Table 2.4
If beams are dimensioned according to current deformation limits, calculations of ultimate limit states will only
rarely be the governing design criteria.

Loads
Contribution from permanent load at test point p
G 1,p (with stabilizing effect at point p)
G 2,p (with destabilizing effect at point p)
Contribution from statistically independent variable loads at test point p
Q 1,p (usual value for load intensity in load combination in deformation limit is ψL,1 · Q 1,p)
Normal load combinations
Generally S B1d,p < Rd,p where Rd,p = Rk,p / γm
thus:
B1,1 S B1,1d,p = 1.0 · G 1,p + 1.35 · G 2,p + 1.50 · Q 1,p
B1,2 S B1,2d,p = 1.0 · G 1,p + 1.35 · G 2,p + 1.50 · Q 2,p
B1,3 S B1,3d,p = 1.0 · G 1,p + 1.35 · G 2,p + 1.50 · Q 3,p
B2 S B2d,p = 1.0 · G 1,p + 1.35 · G 2,p + 1.35 · Q 1,p+1.35 · Q 2,p+1.35 · Q 3,p
in which Rd,p is the calculated resistance capability, typically the deformation limit for tension or breaking force
at the test point p. Rd,p is determined as a strength value in the characteristic condition Rk,p divided by the partial
coefficient γm.
Calculations are in accordance with the material strengths listed in Table 2.1. For beam constructions, it is
possible to perform simplified calculations based on a formula calculation strength which is listed in Table 2.4.

Serviceability limits
Deformation limits
General deformation levels
S A1d,p < RA1,p
A1 S A1d,p = G 1,p + G 2,p + ψL,1 · Q 1,p + ψL,2 · Q 2,p + ψL,3 · Q 3,p
in which RA1,p is the acceptable resistance capability in operation – typically deformation / deflection at test
point p. It is not necessary to add a partial coefficient to RA1,p. Load S A1d,p corresponds to the most likely load
introduced above. When a more accurate value of the factor ψ is not available, use of the value 0.9 is suggested.
Maximum deformation level
S A2,1K,p < RA2,p
S A2,2K,p < RA2,p
S A2,3K,p < RA2,p
A2,1 S A2,1K,p = G p,1 + G p,2 + 1.00 · Q p,1 + ψL,2 · Q p,2 + ψL,3 · Q p,3
A2,2 S A2,2K,p = G p,1 + G p,2 + ψL,1 · Q p,1 + 1,00 · Q p,2+ψL,3 · Q p,3
A2,3 S A2,3K,p = G p,1 + G p,2 + ψL,1 · Q kp,1 + ψL,2 · Q p,2+1,00 · Q p,3
in which RA2,p is the acceptable resistance capability in operation – typically a deformation / deflection in the
short-term condition at test point p. When a more accurate value of factor ψ is not available, use of the value 0.9
is suggested.
RA2,p is for a beam with a deflection limit often selected as a certain fraction of the span – typically between 1/
200 and 1/400 – or based on a requirement that there must be a minimum clearance between construction
elements during
operation. It is not necessary to add a partial coefficient to RA2,p or material parameters (E and G).
Deformation limits in fire
Analysis of fire situations normally includes evaluation of the behaviour of the structure when subjected to a
standardized fire load, for example as stated in Eurocode 1 (DS/ENV 1991-2-2 ).
The load on the structure is determined as the load most likely to occur. It is not necessary to add a partial
coefficient to the strength values of the material.
Deformation limits in accidents
Estimation of deformation limits in accidents obviously depends upon the specific structure. The load is
determined as the load most likely to occur. Normally, it is not necessary to add a partial coefficient to the
strength values of the material.

Profiles
Table 2.5: I-profiles
I-profile H B T1 T2 R A Ak, y Ak, x g Ixx Wxx Iyy Wyy E0º E0º·Ixx
HxBxT1) mm mm mm mm mm mm 2 mm 2 mm 2 kg/m mm 4 mm 3 mm 4 mm 3 MPa Nmm 2
factor 1 1 1 1 1 103 103 103 1 106 103 106 103 103 109
I 120x60x6 120 60 6 6 7.5 1.42 0.68 0.58 2.55 3.10 51.7 0.22 7.30 23 71.30
I 160x80x8 160 80 8 8 8 2.49 1.22 1.02 4.48 9.66 121 0.69 17.3 28 270.5
I 200x100x10 200 100 10 10 10 3.89 1.90 1.60 6.99 23.6 236 1.69 33.7 28 660.8
I 240x120x12 240 120 12 12 12 5.60 2.74 2.30 10.1 48.9 408 3.50 58.3 28 1369
I 300x150x15 300 150 15 15 15 8.74 4.28 3.60 15.7 119 796 8.54 114 28 3332
I 360x180x18 360 180 18 18 18 12.6 6.16 5.18 22.7 248 1376 17.7 197 28 6944
Table values must be multiplied by the factors listed at the top of the table. ( 1) T = T1 = T2 )

Table 2.6: IL-profiles
IL-profile H B T1 T2 R A Ak, y Ak, x g Ixx Wxx Iyy Wyy E0º E0º·Ixx
HxBxT1 / T2 mm mm mm mm mm mm2 mm2 mm2 kg/m mm4 mm3 mm4 mm3 MPa Nmm 2
factor 1 1 1 1 1 103 103 103 1 106 103 106 103 103 109
IL 120x60x5/5 120 60 5 5 5,0 1.17 0.570 0.480 2.11 2.60 43.36 0.181 6.05 23 59.80
IL 160x80x8/5 160 80 8 5 8,0 2,05 0.760 1.024 3.70 8.76 109.5 0.685 17.1 28 245.3
IL 200x100x8/5 200 100 8 5 8,0 2,57 0.950 1.280 4.63 17.4 174.4 1.336 26.7 28 487.2
IL 240x120x10/7 240 120 10 7 10,0 4,03 1.596 1.920 7.25 38.1 317.8 2.888 48.1 28 1067
IL 300x150x12/8 300 150 12 8 12,0 5,93 2.280 2.880 10.7 90.2 606.5 6.768 90.2 28 2526
IL 360x180x15/10 360 180 15 10 15,0 8,89 3.420 4.320 16.0 195.8 1088 14.62 162 28 5482
Table values must be multiplied by the factors listed at the top of the table.

Table 2.7: U-profiles
U-profile H B T1 T2 R A Ak, y Ak, x g Ixx Wxx Iyy Wyy e E0º E0º·Ixx
HxBxT1) mm mm mm mm mm mm2 mm2 mm2 kg/m mm4 mm3 mm4 mm3 mm MPa Nmm 2
factor 1 1 1 1 1 103 103 103 1 106 103 106 103 1 103 109
U 120x50x6 120 50 6 6 7.5 1.27 0.648 0.510 2.29 2.65 44.1 0.279 7.63 13.5 23 60.95
U 140x40x5 140 40 5 5 5 1.06 0.630 0.340 1.91 2.78 39.8 0.131 4.23 9.1 23 63.94
U 160x48x8 160 48 8 8 8 1.95 1.15 0.653 3.51 6.57 82.1 0.338 9.38 12.0 28 184.0
U 200x60x10 200 60 10 10 10 3.04 1.80 1.02 5.48 16.0 160 0.825 18.3 15.0 28 448.0
U 240x72x8 240 72 8 8 8 2.97 1.73 0.98 5.35 23.3 194 1.23 22.1 16.5 28 652.4
U 240x72x12 240 72 12 12 12 4.38 2.59 1.47 7.89 33.2 277 1.71 31.7 18.0 28 929.6
U 300x90x15 300 90 15 15 15 6.85 4.05 2.30 12.3 81.2 541 4.18 61.9 22.4 28 2274
U 360x108x18 360 108 18 18 18 9.86 5.83 3.31 17.8 168 935 8.67 107 26.9 28 4704

Table 2.8: UL-profiles
UL -profile H B T1 T2 R A Ak, y Ak, x g Ixx Wxx Iyy Wyy e E0º E0º·Ixx
HxBxT1 / T2 mm mm mm mm mm mm2 mm2 mm2 kg/m mm4 mm3 mm4 mm3 mm MPa Nmm 2
factor 1 1 1 1 1 103 103 103 1 106 103 106 103 1 103 109
UL 120x50x5/5 120 50 5 5 5.0 1.06 0.540 0.425 1.91 2.239 37.33 0.238 6.469 13.1 23 51.52
UL 160x48x8/5 160 48 8 5 8.0 1.40 0.720 0.653 2.52 5.664 70.80 0.299 8.934 14.6 28 158.6
UL 200x60x8/5 200 60 8 5 8.0 1.75 0.900 0.816 3.16 11.32 113.2 0.603 14.29 17.8 28 317.0
UL 240x72x10/7 240 72 10 7 10.0 2.77 1.512 1.224 5.40 24.93 207.7 1.316 25.69 20.8 28 698.0
UL 300x90x12/8 300 90 12 8 12 4.43 2.160 1.836 7.97 59.96 399.8 3.317 50.32 24.1 28 1679
UL 360x108x15/10 360 108 15 10 15.0 6.64 3.240 2.754 11.9 128.9 716.3 7.127 90.27 29.0 28 3610

Table 2.9: Square tubes
Profile H B T1 T2 R A Ak, y Ak, x g Ixx Wxx Iyy Wyy E0º E0º·Ixx
HxBxT1) mm mm mm mm mm mm2 mm2 mm2 kg/m mm4 mm3 mm4 mm3 MPa Nmm 2
factor 1 1 1 1 1 103 103 103 1 106 103 106 103 103 109
50x50x5 50 50 5 5 2 0.90 0.45 0.45 1.63 0.31 12.4 0.31 12.4 23 7.130
60x60x5 60 60 5 5 4 1.11 0.54 0.54 2.00 0.57 18.9 0.57 18.9 23 13.11
80x60x5 80 60 5 5 4 1.31 0.72 0.54 2.36 1.15 28.7 0.72 24.0 23 26.45
100x60x8 80 60 8 8 4 2.32 1.44 0.86 4.18 2.85 57.0 1.21 40.3 23 65.55
100x100x6 100 100 6 6 4 2.27 1.08 1.08 4.09 3.36 67.2 3.36 67.2 23 77.28
100x100x8 100 100 8 8 4 2.96 1.44 1.44 5.32 4.21 84.2 4.21 84.2 23 96.83
120x120x6 120 120 6 6 4 2.75 1.30 1.30 4.95 5.98 99.7 5.98 99.7 23 137.5
120x120x8 120 120 8 8 4 3.60 1.73 1.73 6.48 7.57 126 7.57 126 23 174.1
160x160x8 160 160 8 8 8 4.92 2.30 2.30 8.85 19.1 238 19.1 238 23 437.0
200x200x10 200 200 10 10 10 7.69 3.60 3.60 13.84 46.5 465 46.5 465 23 1070
240x240x12 240 240 12 12 12 11.1 5.18 5.18 20.0 96.5 804 96.5 804 23 2217

Table 2.10: Tubes
Profile D1 D2 T1 A Ak g I W E0º E0º·I
Du / Di mm mm mm mm2 mm2 kg/m mm4 mm3 MPa Nmm 2
factor 1 1 1 103 103 1 106 103 103 109
Ø 75 / 65 65 75 5 1.10 0.550 1.98 0.68 18.1 23 15.64

Ø 90 / 80 80 90 5 1.34 0.668 2.40 1.21 26.9 23 27.83

Table 2.11: T-profiles
T-profile H B T1 T2 R A Ak, y Ak, x g Ixx Wxx Iyy Wyy e1 E0º E0º·Ixx
HxBxT1xT2 mm mm mm mm mm mm2 mm2 mm2 kg/m mm4 mm3 mm4 mm3 mm MPa Nmm 2
factor 1 1 1 1 1 103 103 103 1 106 103 106 103 1 103 109
T 60x60x6x6 60 60 6 6 7 0.70 0.342 0.288 1.27 0.23 5.46 0.109 3.65 43.1 23 5.290
T 90x72x11x10 90 72 11 10 7 1.62 0.941 0.576 2.92 1.28 21.2 0.321 8.92 60.5 23 29.44

v
Table 2.12: Angle profiles

L-profile R A Ak, y Ak, x g Ixx Wxx Iyy Wyy Izz Iee e1 e2 v E0º E0º·Ixx
HxBxT1) mm mm2 mm2 mm2 kg/m mm4 mm3 mm4 mm3 mm4 mm4 mm mm Grd. MPa Nmm 2
factor 1 103 103 103 1 106 103 106 103 106 106 1 1 1 103 109
L 50x50x6 7 0.57 0.27 0.27 1.03 0.13 3.72 0.13 3.72 0.21 0.057 14.6 14.6 -450 23 2.990
L 50x50x8 7 0.75 0.36 0.36 1.34 0.17 4.79 0.17 4.79 0.26 0.071 15.3 15.3 -45.0 23 3.910
L 75x75x6 7 0.87 0.40 0.40 1.57 0.47 8.69 0.47 8.69 0.74 0.203 20.8 20.8 -45.0 23 10.81
L 75x75x8 7 1.15 0.54 0.54 2.06 0.60 11.3 0.60 11.3 0.95 0.256 21.6 21.6 -45.0 23 13.80
L 80x80x8 7 1.23 0.58 0.58 2.21 0.74 12.9 0.74 12.9 1.16 0.313 22.8 22.8 -45.0 23 17.02
L 100x100x8 7 1.55 0.72 0.72 2.78 1.49 20.6 1.49 20.6 2.34 0.626 27.8 27.8 -45.0 23 34.27
L 100x100x10 7 1.91 0.90 0.90 3.44 1.80 25.3 1.80 25.3 2.85 0.757 28.6 28.6 -45.0 23 41.40
L 100x100x12 7 2.27 1.08 1.08 4.08 2.10 29.8 2.10 29.8 3.32 0.883 29.3 29.3 -45.0 23 48.30
L 150x100x8 7 1.95 1.08 0.72 3.50 4.57 44.7 1.67 21.6 5.27 0.971 47.8 22.9 -23.8 23 105.1
L 150x100x10 7 2.41 1.35 0.90 4.34 5.59 55.1 2.03 26.6 6.44 1.180 48.6 23.7 -23.7 23 128.6
L 150x100x12 7 2.87 1.62 1.08 5.16 6.57 65.3 2.37 31.3 7.56 1.380 49.4 24.5 -23.6 23 151.1
L 150x150x8 7 2.35 1.08 1.08 4.22 5.21 47.5 5.21 47.5 8.24 2.170 40.3 40.3 -45.0 23 119.8
L 150x150x10 7 2.91 1.35 1.35 5.24 6.38 58.6 6.38 58.6 10.1 2.650 41.1 41.1 -45.0 23 146.7
L 150x150x12 7 3.47 1.62 1.62 6.24 7.51 69.4 7.51 69.4 11.9 3.110 41.9 41.9 -45.0 23 172.7

Table 2.13: Flat profiles, plates and sheets
Profile B T A Ak,y Ak,x g Ixx W xx Iyy Wyy
2 2 2 4 3 4
BxT mm mm mm mm mm kg/m mm mm mm mm3
factor 1 1 103 103 103 1 106 103 106 103
30x6 30 6 0.18 0.12 0.12 0.32 0.0005 0.18 0.013 0.90
50x6 50 6 0.30 0.20 0.20 0.54 0.0009 0.30 0.062 2.50
50x10 50 10 0.50 0.33 0.33 0.90 0.0042 0.83 0.104 4.17
100x6 100 6 0.60 0.40 0.40 1.08 0.0018 0.60 0.500 10.0
100x10 100 10 1.00 0.67 0.67 1.80 0.0083 1.67 0.833 16.7
140x10 140 10 1.40 0.93 0.93 2.52 0.0117 2.33 2.290 32.7
200x10 200 10 2.00 1.33 1.33 3.60 0.0167 3.33 6.670 66.7
300x10 300 10 3,00 2.00 2.00 5.40 0.0250 5.00 22.50 150
1220x6 1220 6 7.32 4.88 4.88 13.18 0.0220 7.32 907.9 1488
1220x8 1220 8 9.76 6.51 6.51 17.57 0.0521 13.0 1211 1985
1220x10 1220 10 12.2 8.13 8.13 21.96 0.1020 20.3 1513 2480
1220x12 1220 12 14.6 9.76 9.76 26.35 01757 29.3 1816 2977
The elasticity modulus 23,000 MPa is not valid for flat profiles and sheets.

Table 2.14: Handrail
Profile H B1 B2 T1 R A Ak, y Ak, x g Ixx Wxx Iyy Wyy E0º E0º·Ixx
HxBxT1xT2 mm mm mm mm mm mm2 mm2 mm2 kg/m mm4 mm3 mm4 mm3 MPa Nmm 2
factor 1 1 1 1 1 103 103 103 1 106 103 106 103 103 109
120x180x8 120 180 100 8 6 3.61 1.81 2.53 6.50 4.94 85.8 11.95 133 23 113.6

CHAPTER 1
Section 3: Profiles used as beams and columns

Profiles subjected to tensile strength or compression (columns and tension rods) ............ 1.3.03
Example 3.1: Column .......................................................................................................... 1.3.05
Example 3.2: Profile in lattice column ................................................................................. 1.3.06
Profiles subjected to compressive force and flexural moment ............................................. 1.3.08
Example 3.3: Column subjected to moment of stress ........................................................ 1.3.09
Beam loaded in transverse direction ................................................................................... 1.3.11
Example 3.4: Supporting beam ........................................................................................... 1.3.13

I
Profiles subjected to tension or compression (Columns
and tension rods)
Lk : Buckling length for column
A : Cross-section of profile
I : Moment of inertia
Nd : Design value of normal force (including partial coefficient)
fc,0°/ft,0° : Characteristic compressive/tensile strength (excluding partial coefficient)
E 0° : Characteristic modulus of elasticity (excluding partial coefficient)
γm, f : Partial coefficient for fc,0°/ft,0° in ultimate limit state
γm, E : Partial coefficient for E in ultimate limit state
Ncr : Critical load on column
Nel : Load according to elastic theory (Euler load)
Fd : Compressive load
Profiles subjected to tension
The maximum permissible load Nd is determined on the basis of the characteristic tensile stress level in the
profile and the cross-sectional area of the profile.
A · ft,0°
Nd ≤ ______
γm,f
Profiles subjected to compression
The design value of the normal force Nd must be lower than the critical column load Ncr. The value of the critical
column load depends on the length of the column, since the critical compressive stress will be a dimensioning
factor in a short column length. Longer columns are to be dimensioned in accordance with the Euler load,
using the following formula:
Fd Fd
Nd ≤ Ncr = ______ = ______
Fd
1 + ___ 1 + λ2r
Nel

In which:
√
fc,0°
λr = ________
σel · γm,f
A · fc,0°
Fd = ______
γm,f
π2 · E0° · I
Nel = _________
γm,E · L2k
Nel
σel = ____
A
Provided the Nd < Ncr criterion is met, the column will be stable.

Example 3.1: Column
Square tubes of 50 x 50 x 5 mm are used as stanchions in Fiberline railing systems. Square tubes can often be
used in platform constructions as supporting columns, with the stanchions being extended to serve as the
platform legs.
The following example illustrates how to determine the load-bearing capacity of a 2-metre length of square
tube. The calculation is based on the assumption that the profile is simply supported, making the buckling
length equivalent to the length of the profile. See Figure 3.1.
From Tables 2.1, 2.2, 2.0b and 2.9:
A = 0,903 · 103 mm2

Ixx = 0,309 · 106 mm4
Iyy = 0,309 · 106 mm4
E0° = 23 000 MPa
fc,0° = 240 MPa
γm, E = 1,3
γm, f = 1,3
LK = 2000 mm
Calculations must be made in accordance with the instructions given in the

theory for columns. On this basis, the critical compressive load can be
calculated as follows:
A · fc,0° 0,903 · 103 mm2 · 240 MPa

Fd = ______ = _________________________ · 10-3 = 166,7 kN
γm,f 1,3
The critical Euler load is calculated in the same way:
π2 · E0° · I Figure 3.1

Nel = _________
γm,E · Lk2
π2 · 23 000 MPa · 0,309 · 106 mm4

= _______________________________ · 10-3
1,3 · (2 000 mm)2
= 13,49 kN
The Euler load is the dimensioning factor. The critical column load is calculated as follows:
Fd 166,7 kN
Ncr = _______ = _____________ = 12,48 kN
Fd 166,7 kN
1 + ___ 1 + _________
Nel 13,49 kN
If this load is not exceeded, the profile itself will be stable when used as a 2-metre column.

Example 3.2: Profile in lattice column
Determining the load-bearing capacity of a column (part of a lattice column; see Figure 3.2). The profile is simply
supported.
Buckling = Lx = 3,60 m ( buckling in the "strong" direction ).

Buckling length = Ly = 0,90 m ( buckling in the "weak" direction ).
Partial coefficient for E0° γm, E = 1,3

Partial coefficient for fc,0° γm, f = 1,3
Load:
Dead weight including profile G = 20 kN

Imposed load Q1 = 100 kN
Partial coefficient, dead weight γfg = 1,35
Partial coefficient, imposed load γfq = 1,5
Profile selected: I 200 x 100 x 10
In Tables 2.1, 2.2 and 2.5:
A = 3,89 · 103 mm2

Ixx = 23,6 · 106 mm4
Iyy = 1,69 · 106 mm4
E = 28 000 MPa
fc,0° = 240 MPa
Figure 3.2
Ulitimate limit state:
Nd = γfg· G + γf · Q1 = 1,35 · 20 + 1,5 · 100 = 177,0 kN
A · fc,0° 3,89 · 103 · 240 -3

Fd = ______ = ______________ · 10 = 718,2 kN
γm,f 1,3
π2 · E0° · Ixx π2 · 28 000 · 23,6 · 106

Nel,x = __________ = _____________________ · 10-3 = 387,1 kN
γm,f · Lx2 1,3 · 3 6002
Fd 718,2 kN
Ncr,x = ________ = _____________ = 251,5 kN
Fd 718,2 kN
1 + ___ 1 + _________
Nel,x 387,1 kN
As Ncr, x is larger than Nd ( 251,5 kN > 177,0 kN ), the column is stable in this direction.

A similar calculation can be made for the 'weak' direction:
π2 · E0° · Iyy π2 · 28 000 · 1,69 · 106

Nel,y = __________ = _____________________ · 10-3 = 443,5 kN
γm,f · L2y 1,3 · 9002
Fd 718,2 kN
Ncr,y = ________ = _____________ = 274,2 kN
Fd 718,2 kN
1 + ___ 1 + _________
Nel,y 443,5 kN
As also Ncr, y is larger than Nd , the column is also stable in this direction.

Profiles subjected to compressive force and flexural
moment
When a profile is subjected to both normal compressive force and flexural moment, the load-bearing capacity
can be evaluated as stated below.
Evaluation must be done in the ultimate limit state.
The normal compressive force and the flexural moment are interdependent, as the transverse deflection in
connection with the normal force causes a moment in the profile (allowance for deflection).
Allow for this by multiplying the moment (which is determined without taking deflections into account) by a
moment intensification factor.
Cross-sectional forces (design values)
Nd : Normal compressive force
Md : flexural moment (determined without taking profile deformations into account)
Cross-sectional constants
A : Cross-section area of profile
W : Section modulus of profile
Cross-sectional constants are listed in the data sheets for profiles.
Stress control
The maximum compressive stress in the profile is:
fc,0°
σmax < ____
γm,f
Nd 1 Md
σmax = ___ + ______ · ___
1 - __
N
A W d
N cr
in which:
fc,0°/γm, f = design value for compressive strength of profile
Ncr = critical compressive force for profile (see data sheet)

Example 3.3: Column subjected to axial load and moment
Figure 3.3 illustrates a U-profile 200 x 60 x 10 used as a
supporting column in a structure. The U-profile is subjected to
a normal force (P = 20 kN) and also to flexural moment, since
the normal force acts at a distance to the centre of gravity axis
of the U-profile. x x
According to the data sheet, the critical normal force, or column

load, is 23.2 kN. The two joints of the structure are subjected to a
maximum load of 24.8 kN (top joint) and 20.0 kN (bottom joint).
x
Assuming that the column load is transferred by shear force
2700
between the joints, the size of the moment can be determined
x
by using the moment intensification factor. The column can be
dimensioned on this basis. First, determine the distance from
the point of action of the force to the centre of gravity axis
according to Table 2.7
The size of the moment will be equal to the distance to the

centre of gravity multiplied by the normal force, equivalent to
Nd · ex . The normal stress factor in the column is determined
as follows: Figure 3.3
P=N
d
Nd 1 Nd · ex
σmax = ___ + ______ · ______
1 - __
N
A Wyy
d
Ncr
20,0 · 103 1 20,0 · 103 · 15,0

σmax = _________3 + __________ · _______________
1 - ______ 18,3 · 103
3
20,0 · 10
3,04 · 10
23,5 · 103
σmax = 6,6 + (6,71 · 16,4)
σmax = 117 MPa
fc,0° 240 MPa

σcr = ___ = _________ = 185 MPa
γm,f 1,3
As 117 < 185 MPa, the existing stress will not cause a critical condition in the column.

Similarly, the deflection can be determined using the formula below, assuming that the column is simply supported
at both ends and that it is subjected to a constant moment, without taking the impact of normal force into
account:
M0 · l 2
δmoment = _________
8 · E0° · Iyy
The deflection value must also be multiplied by the moment intensification factor as:
1 N · ex · l 2
δtotal = ______ · ________
1 - __
N
8 · E0° · Iyy
d
Ncr
1 20,0 · 103 · 14,9 · 20002

δtotal = __________ · _____________________
1 - ______ 8 · 28000 · 0,825 · 106
3
20,0 · 10
3
23,2 · 10
δtotal = 7,25 · 6,5
δtotal = 47,1 mm
The example illustrates that even a small eccentricity can have significant impact on stresses and deformations.
It is therefore recommended that loads be introduced centrally into columns, and that structures be given
sufficient moment capacity.

Transversely loaded beam
Calculation method for a beam simply supported at both ends.
L : Length of span (span between the supports)

Ak : Shear area
W : Section modulus
I : Moment of inertia
qk : Transverse load used in determining deflection (often characteristic value of largest imposed load)
pd : Total transverse load including partial coefficient
kM : Coefficient describing maximum moment
kV : Coefficient describing maximum shear force
kδM : Coefficient describing maximum deflection from flexural moment
kδV : Coefficient describing maximum deflection from shear force
fb,0° : Characteristic flexural strength (excluding partial coefficient)
fτ : Characteristic shear strength (excluding partial coefficient)
E : Characteristic E-modulus (excluding partial coefficient)
G : Characteristic modulus in shear (excluding partial coefficient)
γm, f : Partial coefficient for fb,1 and fτ in ultimate limit state
δ : Deflection
Bending: kM · pd · L2 fb,0°
__________ ≤ ____
W γm,f
Shear: kV · pd · L fτ
__________ ≤ ____
Ak γm,f
Deflection limit:
Max δ 1
_______ < __
L α
Max δ kδ M · qk · L3 kδ V · qk · L
_______ = ___________ + ___________
L E0° · I G · Ak
in which α is typically selected between 200 and 400

Bending:
kM · qk · L2
__________ < fb0°,d ( σb,0° from Table 2.3 )
W
Shear:
kV · pd · L
__________ < fτ,d ( τ from Table 2.3 )
Ak
The two stress values σb,0° and τ are listed in Table 2.3 which is divided into two categories. The degree of
exposure determines selection of short-term or long-term values.
Summary of describing coefficients
Coefficients One span Two spans Three spans

2
kM = M / pd · L 0,125 0,125 0,100
kV = V / pd · L 0,500 0,625 0,600
kδ,M = δmax,moment · E · I / q · L 4
0,01302 0,00542 0,00688
kδ,V = δmax, shear · G · Ak / q · L 2
0,125 0,125 0,125
Table 3.1

Example 3.4: Girder
Determination of load-bearing capacity of a two-span
girder subjected to transverse load.
Span L = 4,0 m
Load:
Dead weight, including beam g = 0,5 kN/m

Imposed load, short-term q1 = 3,0 kN/m
Partial coefficient for dead weight γfg = 1,35
Partial coefficient for imposed load γf,q = 1,5
Maximum deflection L/300 Figure 3.4
Selected profile:
I 200 x 100 x 10 with load acting in the direction y.
From Table 3.1:
Two spans: kM = 0,125 kV = 0,625

kδM = 0,00542 kδV = 0,125
Ultimate limit state:
pd = γf,g · g + γf,q · q1 = 1,35 · 0,5 + 1,5 · 3,0 = 5,2 kN/m
Md = kM · pd · L² = 0,125 · 5,2 · 42 = 10,4 kNm = 10,4 · 106 Nmm
σmax = Md / Wxx = 10,4 · 106 / 236 · 103 = 44 MPa
f b,f,d = fb,0° / γm,f = 240/1,3 = 185 MPa
σmax < fb,f,d ( OK! )
Vd = kV · pd · L = 0,625 · 5,2 · 4 = 13 kN = 13000 N
τ max = Vd / Ak, y = 13000 / 1,90 · 103 = 6,8 MPa
fτ / γm, f = 25 / 1,3 = 19,2 MPa
τmax < fτ / γm, f ( OK! )

Deflection (for imposed load):
qk = q1 = 3,0 kN/m (total imposed load)
δ
___ kδ M · qk · L3 kδ V · qk · L
= __________ + __________
L E0° · Ixx G · Ak,y
δ
___ 0,00542 · 3,0 · 40003 0,125 · 3,0 · 4000
= __________________ + _________________
L 28000 · 23,6 · 106
3000 · 1,90 · 103
___ = 0,0016 + 0,0003
δ
___ 1
= ____
L 526
δ
___ 1
< ____ ( OK! )
LL 300

CHAPTER 1
Section 4: Bolted joints
Calculation of bolted joints ................................................................................................... 1.4.03
Load-bearing capacity of bolts - shear in longitudinal direction (0°) ...................................... 1.4.06
Load-bearing capacity of bolts - shear in transverse direction (90°) ..................................... 1.4.09
Load-bearing capacity of bolts – tensile strength ................................................................... 1.4.12
Example 4.1: Bolts subjected to shear ................................................................................. 1.4.13
Table 4.1 - Load-bearing capacity of bolts - shear in longitudinal direction (0°) .................... 1.4.14
Table 4.2 - Load-bearing capacity of bolts - shear in transverse direction (90°) .................... 1.4.14
Table 4.3 - Load-bearing capacity of bolts - tensile strength .................................................. 1.4.15
Example 4.2: Foot detail of column - I 200 x 100 x 10 .......................................................... 1.4.16
Example 4.3: Foot detail of column - U 200 x 60 x 10 .......................................................... 1.4.17
Example 4.4: Foot detail of column - square tube 100 x 100 x 8 .......................................... 1.4.20
Example 4.5: Beam U 200 x 60 x 10 and column I 200 x 100 x 10 ....................................... 1.4.22
Example 4.6: Beam and column I 200 x 100 x 10 ................................................................. 1.4.24
Example 4.7: Beam U 200x60x10 and column - square tube 100x100x8 ............................. 1.4.26
Example 4.8: Two horizontal beams I 200 x 100 x 10 ........................................................... 1.4.28
Example 4.9: Two horizontal beams U 200 x 60 x 10 ............................................................ 1.4.31

I
Calculation of bolted joints
A bolted joint transfers the shear forces between the profiles in a structure. Bolted joints transfer the shear force
by friction through regions of concentrated local compression of the profiles around the bolts.
In static calculations for bolted joints, it is necessary to ensure that the profile and the bolts can withstand this
concentrated local compression. It is also necessary to ensure that the region surrounding a group of bolts will
not be torn out of the profile: i.e. that the region around the bolted joint has sufficient capacity to transfer the load
to the rest of the structure.
The load-bearing capacity of a bolted joint is sufficient when the following criteria have been fulfilled:
• The required bolt forces are sufficient to reach equilibrium with the existing shear forces
• The contact compression between the profile must be able to be absorbed locally. This is ensured if
the required bolt forces do not exceed the limits stated in Tables 4.1, 4.2 and 4.3.
• The shear forces for which the bolted joint is dimensioned, must be transferred by the laminate in the
remaining surface between the bolt group and the rest of the profile; i.e. it must not be possible for
the entire bolted joint to tear out of the profile.
Bolt forces in a bolted joint can be distributed by using the elasticity theory. In predominantly static loads,
distribution determined by plasticity theory can be realistic for joints in which the bolts are actuated for shear.
Tests show that the bolts are normally so strong in relation to the laminate that deformations can occur which
activate all the bolts. In the event of a break in the laminate, the size of deformations in front of bolts can
typically be a few millimetres or more.
All relevant failure modes should be considered, to ensure that an entire bolt group cannot be torn out of the
laminate. It may be necessary to evaluate several possible modes of failure to fully determine the load-bearing
capacity of a joint. The examples below illustrate how this should be done.
To achieve the expected load-bearing capacity it is essential that the minimum spacings shown in Figure 4.1 are
maintained. Please note the significance of the pultrusion direction, in which the main reinforcing fibres lie.
No more than 4 bolts should be placed in a row. If this is unavoidable, special calculations are required and
Fiberline should be consulted.
No attempt should be made to cut threads in the composite material. Correct and incorrect configurations are
shown below.
No threads in the Threads in the composite

composite material material
(correct mounting) (incorrect mounting)

Direction of pultrusion (0°)

Figure 4.1 Minimum distances
Characteristic strengths
ft,0° = 240 MPa
fc,0° = 240 MPa
ft,90° = 50 MPa
fc,90° = 70 MPa
fτ = 25 MPa
f c,v = min {fc,90° + fτ · cot(v) ; fc,0° + fτ · tan(v)}
Example 4.00
Failure of tension rod

subjected to tensile force in the direction of pultrusion (0°) Direction of pultrusion (0°)
The line of fracture is illustrated in Figure 4.2.
The width of the laminate is 8 · d. The thickness is t, while d indicates

the diameter of the bolt.
After subtracting the bolt-holes, the effective area of the laminate is

6 · d · t.
The total force that can be transferred through this failure surface is
Nmax = 6 · d · t · ft,0°
in which ft,0° is the tensile strength in the direction of pultrusion. 3,5
For horizontal (90°) loads, the tensile strength for the horizontal
direction should be used.
Figure 4.2

Example 4.01
Bolts tearing out of the flange of an I-profile

Influence of direction of force on load-bearing capacity
The estimated line of fracture is shown in Figure 4.3. The thickness

of the laminate is indicated as t, while d indicates the diameter of
the bolt.

The load-bearing capacity for tearing can be determined by
(8 · d - 2 · d) · t · ft,90° = 6 · d · t · ft,90°
in which f t,90° indicates the tensile strength of the laminate

perpendicular to the direction of pultrusion.
Figure 4.3
Example 4.02
Torn tension rod / flat profile due to tensile force at

an angle to the direction of pultrusion of 45°
The line of fracture is illustrated in Figure 4.4.

Di
p u recti
The width of the laminate is 4 · d. The thickness is t, l t r u on
s i o of
while d indicates the diameter of the bolt. n
(0°
)
After subtracting the bolt holes, the effective area of the
laminate is
( 4 √2 -1 ) · d · t
Figure 4.4
The total shear force that can be transferred through this cross-section is
Tmax = ( 4 √2 -1 ) · d · t · fτ
in which fτ is the shear strength of the laminate.
Projection of the bolt strength PBolt on the line of fracture gives T = PBolt x √2 / 2, so that the maximum
bolt strength that can be absorbed is
PBolt, max = √2 x ( 4 √2 -1 ) · d · t · fτ

- shear in the longitudinal direction (0°)
The approximate distribution of tension in the laminate around a bolt subjected to shear is described in
Figure 4.5.
The load-bearing capacity of a bolt subjected to shear will be sufficient if the stress which occurs does not
exceed the relevant strengths.
The shear for a bolt can be determined as

d · t · 150 MPa
PB,D = = d · t · 115,4 MPa
γm
in which
γm = 1,3
d = nominal diameter of the bolt
t = thickness of the laminate
The values are based on

a = 3,5 · d
b = 1,0 · d
c = 2,0 · d
Theoretical derivatives for load-bearing capacity terms

Geometry:
Figure 4.5
a Distance from the centre line of the bolt to Direction of pultrusion (0°)
the edge in the direction of force
(longitudinal direction).
b Width of area in front of the bolt where

interlaminar forces occur.
c Distance from the centre line of the bolt to

the edge perpendicular to the direction of force.
d Diameter of bolt.
v Angle of inclined pressure:

tan(v) = [c/2+d/4]/[a-b/2]
t Thickness of laminate.
Static conditions:
P1 = ½ · PBolt · tan(v)
PBolt
P2 =
2 · cos(v)
P3 = ½ · PBolt

Stress-related conditions:
The force diagrams for the various conditions are illustrated in the figures below. The line of fracture is also
illustrated.
Condition 1 : Tensile stress in the longitudinal direction

next to bolt
P3
(c-d
2
) ·t
Fibre in 0° overloaded
See Figure 4.6
Load-bearing
capacity PBolt ≤ 720 MPa · t · d

Figure 4.6
Condition 2 : Cleavage stress in area in front of bolt

P1
b·t
Fibre in 90° overloaded

See Figure 4.7
Load-bearing

Figure 4.7
Condition 3 : Tearing of laminate in front of bolt

PBolt
2 · ( a - -d2 ) · t
shear stress exceeded in the lines
of fracture shown
See Figure 4.8
Load-bearing

Figure 4.8

Condition 4 : Inclined distribution in front of bolt
P2
d·t
The compression stress in the inclined
failure surface exceeds the compression
strength.
See Figure 4.9
Load-bearing
fτ · cos v
f c,v
fc,0° · cos v
fτ · sin v
fc,90° · sin v
Vertical projection:
fc,v · sin v = fc,90° · sin v + fτ · cos v
Horizontal projection:
fc,v · cos v = fc,0° · cos v + fτ · sin v
Figure 4.9
Strength fc,v in inclined forces
Condition 5 : Laminate compresses in front of bolt

PBolt
d·t
Contact compression between bolt and
laminate exceeds the compression strength,
so the bolt "eats" into the laminate.
See Figure 4.10
Load-bearing
Figure 4.10

- shear in the transverse direction (90°)
The approximate distribution of stress in the laminate around a bolt subjected to shear can be described
as shown in Figure 4.11.
The load-bearing capacity of a bolt subjected to shear, if the stress does not exceed the relevant strengths.
Calculation of shear strength:

d · t · 70 MPa
PB,d = = d · t · 53,8 MPa
γm
in which
γm = 1,3
d = nominal diameter of bolt
t = thickness of laminate
Values are based on

a = 3,5 · d
b = 1,0 · d
c = 2,0 · d
Theoretical derivatives for load-bearing capacity terms
Geometry:
a Distance from centre line of bolt to edge Figure 4.11

in direction of force (transverse direction)

b Width of area in front of bolt where
interlaminar forces occur
c Distance from centre line of bolt to edge

perpendicular to direction of force
d Bolt diameter
v Angle of inclined pressure:

tan(v) = [c/2+d/4]/[a-b/2]
t Thickness of laminate
Static conditions:
P1 = ½ · PBolt · tan(v)
PBolt
P2 = 2 · cos(v)
P3 = ½ · PBolt

Stress-related conditions:
The force diagrams for the various conditions are illustrated in the figures below. The line of fracture is also
illustrated.
Condition 1 : P3
(c - d2 ) · t

Tensile force in longitudinal
direction next to bolt.
See Figure 4.12
Load-bearing
Figure 4.12
P1
Condition 2 :
b·t

Cleavage in area in front of bolt.
Fibre in 90° overloaded.
See Figure 4.13
Load-bearing
Figure 4.13
Condition 3 : PBolt
2 · ( a - -d2 ) · t
Tearing of laminate in front of bolt.

The strength of shear is exceeded
in the illustrated lines of fracture.
See Figure 4.14
Load-bearing
Figure 4.14

P2
Condition 4 :
d·t

Inclined distribution in front of bolt.
Compression stress in the inclined
failure surface exceeds the compression
strength.
See Figure 4.15
Load-bearing
capacity The following geometric parameters:
a = 2,5 · d
b = 1,0 · d
c = 2,0 · d
are to be put into the conditions

listed above to find:
PBolt ≤ 145 MPa · t · d
fτ · cos v
f c,v
fc,0° · cos v
fτ · sin v
fc,90° · sin v
Vertical projection:
fc,v · sin v = fc,90° · sin v + fτ · cos v
Horizontal projection:
fc,v · cos v = fc,0° · cos v + fτ · sin v
Figure 4.15
Strength fc,v in inclined forces
Condition 5 : PBolt
d·t
Pressure deformation of
laminate in front of bolt.
The contact compression between

the bolt and laminate exceeds the
pin-bearing strength, so the bolt
'eats' into the laminate.
See Figure 4.16.
Load-bearing
capacity PBolt ≤ 70 MPa · t · d Figure 4.16

Load-bearing capacity of bolts – tensile force
The load-bearing capacity of a bolt subjected to tensile force is determined by:
- the tensile force load-bearing capacity of the bolt

- punching of the laminate
Laminate
Geometry:
d Diameter of the bolt.
As Stress area of the bolt.
t Thickness of the laminate.
Diameter of washer = 2 · d
Figure 4.17
Strengths:
f yk = Characteristic tensile strength of bolt = 210 MPa for quality A4.
fτ = Shear strength of the laminate = 25 MPa
Static conditions:
Condition 1 : As · fyk ( Tearing of bolt in threaded cross-section )

γm,f
2 · d · π · t · fτ
Condition 2 : ( Shear fracture at rim of washer )
γm,f
Load-bearing capacity:
As · 210 MPa
P = = As · 164,1 MPa ( Bolt )
1,28
25 MPa
P = = 120,8 MPa · t · d ( Laminate )
1,3

Example 4.1: Bolts subjected to shear
Dimensioning of a bolted joint for securing a flat profile which is subjected to tensile force in 0°, to a U-profile, as
shown in Figure 4.18.
Flat profile
Figure 4.18
The tensile force load is 1000 kg or 9.82 kN. The thickness of the flat profile is t = 6 mm. No friction between the
two points of attachment has been taken into account.
Dimensioning is done in two steps. First, the size of the bolt is selected, then the minimum width of the flat
profile is determined.
An M10 bolt is selected. The table on page 1.4.14 indicates that the maximum load-bearing capacity of a
laminate with a thickness of 6 mm combined with an M10 bolt is 6.9 kN in the longitudinal direction. Consequently,
two M10 bolts must be used which can bear 13.8 kN (> 9,82 kN), and which are placed in the longitudinal
direction of the flat profile. The EUROCOMP safety standards are included in the table, thus providing the
necessary design safety.
The width of the flat profile is determined on the basis of the size of the bolt. In section 4.1, Load-bearing capacity
of bolts - shear in the longitudinal direction (1), Figure 4.2 illustrates that the distance from the centre line of the
bolt to the edge of the flat profile must be 2 · d (2 x the diameter of the bolt). Thus, the total width of the flat profile
must be 4 · d or 4 ·10 mm = 40 mm. The distance to the end of the flat profile must be at least 3.5d or 35 mm. In
this case, the distance between the two bolts must be 4 · d, or 40 mm.
A similar calculation can be done for the U-profiles of 90° in the pultrusion / longitudinal direction on the basis of
Section 4 Load-bearing capacity of bolts - shear in 90° and Table 4.2 on page 1.4.14.

Load-bearing capacity of bolts subjected to shear in kN
Design value of ultimate limit state
Safety class: normal Laminate
Bolt quality: A4
Washers under head and nut: D = Dbolt · 2
Hole drilled in profile for bolt: D = Dbolt + 1mm
Pin-bearing strength (P) in kN for direction of force 0° (longitudinal direction of profile)
Load-
bearing
Bolt Thickness of laminate in mm
capacity
per cut (kN)
1 2
5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20
cut cuts
M 6 2,7 5,4 3,5 4,2 4,8 5,5 6,2 6,9 7,6 8,3 9,0 9,7 10,4 11,1 11,8 12,5 13,2 13,8
M 8 4,8 9,5 4,6 5,5 6,5 7,4 8,3 9,2 10,2 11,1 12,0 12,9 13,8 14,8 15,7 16,6 17,5 18,5
M 10 7,4 14,9 5,8 6,9 8,1 9,2 10,4 11,5 12,7 13,8 15,0 16,2 17,3 18,5 19,6 20,8 21,9 23,1
M 12 10,7 21,4 6,9 8,3 9,7 11,1 12,5 13,8 15,2 16,6 18,0 19,4 20,8 22,2 23,5 24,9 26,3 27,7
M 14 14,6 29,2 8,1 9,7 11,3 12,9 14,5 16,2 17,8 19,4 21,0 22,6 24,2 25,8 27,5 29,1 30,7 32,3
M 16 19,0 38,1 9,2 11,1 12,9 14,8 16,6 18,5 20,3 22,2 24,0 25,8 27,7 29,5 31,4 33,2 35,1 36,9
M 20 30 59 11,5 13,8 16,2 18,5 20,8 23,1 25,4 27,7 30,0 32,3 34,6 36,9 39,2 41,5 43,8 46,2
M 22 36 72 12,7 15,2 17,8 20,3 22,8 25,4 27,9 30,5 33,0 35,5 38,1 40,6 43,2 45,7 48,2 50,8
M 24 43 86 13,8 16,6 19,4 22,2 24,9 27,7 30,5 33,2 36,0 38,8 41,5 44,3 47,1 49,8 52,6 55,4
M 27 54 109 15,6 18,7 21,8 24,9 28,0 31,2 34,3 37,4 40,5 43,6 46,7 49,8 53,0 56,1 59,2 62,3
M 30 67 134 17,3 20,8 24,2 27,7 31,2 34,6 38,1 41,5 45,0 48,5 51,9 55,4 58,8 62,3 65,8 69,2
M 36 96 193 20,8 24,9 29,1 33,2 37,4 41,5 45,7 49,8 54,0 58,2 62,3 66,5 70,6 74,8 78,9 83,1
M 42 131 262 24,2 29,1 33,9 38,8 43,6 48,5 53,3 58,2 63,0 67,8 72,7 77,5 82,4 87,2 92,1 96,9
M 48 171 343 27,7 33,2 38,8 44,3 49,8 55,4 60,9 66,5 72,0 77,5 83,1 88,6 94,2 99,7 105,2 110,8
Table 4.1
Pin-bearing strength (P) in kN for direction of force 90° (transverse direction of profile)
Load-
Bolt bearing Thickness of laminate in mm
capacity
per cut (kN)
1 2 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20
cut cuts
M 6 2,7 5,4 1,6 1,9 2,3 2,6 2,9 3,2 3,6 3,9 4,2 4,5 4,8 5,2 5,5 5,8 6,1 6,5
M 8 4,8 9,5 2,2 2,6 3,0 3,4 3,9 4,3 4,7 5,2 5,6 6,0 6,5 6,9 7,3 7,8 8,2 8,6
M 10 7,4 14,9 2,7 3,2 3,8 4,3 4,8 5,4 5,9 6,5 7,0 7,5 8,1 8,6 9,2 9,7 10,2 10,8
M 12 10,7 21,4 3,2 3,9 4,5 5,2 5,8 6,5 7,1 7,8 8,4 9,0 9,7 10,3 11,0 11,6 12,3 12,9
M 14 14,6 29,2 3,8 4,5 5,3 6,0 6,8 7,5 8,3 9,0 9,8 10,6 11,3 12,1 12,8 13,6 14,3 15,1
M 16 19,0 38,1 4,3 5,2 6,0 6,9 7,8 8,6 9,5 10,3 11,2 12,1 12,9 13,8 14,6 15,5 16,4 17,2
M 20 30 59 5,4 6,5 7,5 8,6 9,7 10,8 11,8 12,9 14,0 15,1 16,2 17,2 18,3 19,4 20,5 21,5
M 22 36 72 5,9 7,1 8,3 9,5 10,7 11,8 13,0 14,2 15,4 16,6 17,8 19,0 20,1 21,3 22,5 23,7
M 24 43 86 6,5 7,8 9,0 10,3 11,6 12,9 14,2 15,5 16,8 18,1 19,4 20,7 22,0 23,3 24,6 25,8
M 27 54 109 7,3 8,7 10,2 11,6 13,1 14,5 16,0 17,4 18,9 20,4 21,8 23,3 24,7 26,2 27,6 29,1
M 30 67 134 8,1 9,7 11,3 12,9 14,5 16,2 17,8 19,4 21,0 22,6 24,2 25,8 27,5 29,1 30,7 32,3
M 36 96 193 9,7 11,6 13,6 15,5 17,4 19,4 21,3 23,3 25,2 27,1 29,1 31,0 33,0 34,9 36,8 38,8
M 42 131 262 11,3 13,6 15,8 18,1 20,4 22,6 24,9 27,1 29,4 31,7 33,9 36,2 38,4 40,7 43,0 45,2
M 48 171 343 12,9 15,5 18,1 20,7 23,3 25,8 28,4 31,0 33,6 36,2 38,8 41,4 43,9 46,5 49,1 51,7
Table 4.2

Load-bearing capacity of bolts in kN
- tensile force perpendicular to the laminate
Design value of ultimate limit state
Safety class: normal
Bolt quality: A4
Washers under head and nut: D = Dbolt · 2
Hole drilled in profile for bolt: D = Dbolt + 1mm
Laminate
Load-bearing capacity for punched holes in kN

Bolt
load- Thickness of laminate in mm
Bolt
bearing
capacity 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20
M 6 2,7 3,6 4,3 5,1 5,8 6,5 7,2 8,0 8,7 9,4 10,1 10,9 11,6 12,3 13,0 13,8 14,5
M 8 5,1 4,8 5,8 6,8 7,7 8,7 9,7 10,6 11,6 12,6 13,5 14,5 15,5 16,4 17,4 18,4 19,3
M 10 8,1 6,0 7,2 8,5 9,7 10,9 12,1 13,3 14,5 15,7 16,9 18,1 19,3 20,5 21,7 23,0 24,2
M 12 11,8 7,2 8,7 10,1 11,6 13,0 14,5 15,9 17,4 18,8 20,3 21,7 23,2 24,6 26,1 27,5 29,0
M 14 16,1 8,5 10,1 11,8 13,5 15,2 16,9 18,6 20,3 22,0 23,7 25,4 27,1 28,8 30,4 32,1 33,8
M 16 21,9 9,7 11,6 13,5 15,5 17,4 19,3 21,3 23,2 25,1 27,1 29,0 30,9 32,9 34,8 36,7 38,7
M 20 34 12,1 14,5 16,9 19,3 21,7 24,2 26,6 29,0 31,4 33,8 36,2 38,7 41,1 43,5 45,9 48,3
M 22 42 13,3 15,9 18,6 21,3 23,9 26,6 29,2 31,9 34,6 37,2 39,9 42,5 45,2 47,8 50,5 53,2
M 24 49 14,5 17,4 20,3 23,2 26,1 29,0 31,9 34,8 37,7 40,6 43,5 46,4 49,3 52,2 55,1 58,0
M 27 64 16,3 19,6 22,8 26,1 29,4 32,6 35,9 39,1 42,4 45,7 48,9 52,2 55,5 58,7 62,0 65,2
M 30 78 18,1 21,7 25,4 29,0 32,6 36,2 39,9 43,5 47,1 50,7 54,4 58,0 61,6 65,2 68,9 72,5
M 36 114 21,7 26,1 30,4 34,8 39,1 43,5 47,8 52,2 56,5 60,9 65,2 69,6 73,9 78,3 82,6 87,0
M 42 156 25,4 30,4 35,5 40,6 45,7 50,7 55,8 60,9 66,0 71,0 76,1 81,2 86,3 91,3 96,4 101,5
M 48 205 29,0 34,8 40,6 46,4 52,2 58,0 63,8 69,6 75,4 81,2 87,0 92,8 98,6 104,4 110,2 116,0
Table 4.3

Example 4.2: Detail of column base I 200 x 100 x 10
The joint is illustrated on the next page in Figure 4.19.
Load
The joint must be capable of transferring a vertical downward force in the column I 200 x 100 x 10.
Distance requirements
I 200 x 100 x 10
distance between bolts: 65 mm > 4,0 · 16 mm (OK!)
L 150 x 100 x 8
distance from edge: 35 mm > 2,0 · 16 mm (OK!)
Static model
The bolts are assumed to be subjected to shear only.
Bolt strengths and load-bearing capacity
The total vertical force is indicated as F.
I 200 x 100 x 10
F
Pvert: < 18,5 kN (Table 4.1)
4
L 150 x 100 x 8
Pvert: F < 6,9 kN (Table 4.2)

8
thus F < 55,2 kN (8 · 6,9 kN)

Figure 4.19
JOINT SECTION A-A
SECTION
B B-B
B
NOTE
Bolt Dimension: M16
Hole Dimension: ø17
Washer Dimension: ø48

Example 4.3: Detail of column base U 200 x 60 x 10
An asymmetrical joint which is illustrated on the next page in Figure 4.20, is used, for example, when a platform
or stairs is placed against an existing structure. A symmetrical joint is illustrated in Example 4.2.
Load
The joint must be able to transfer a vertical force in U 200 x 60 x 10
Distances between bolts
U 200 x 60x 10
Distances between bolts 65 mm > 4,0 · 16 mm (OK!)
L 150 x 100 x 8
from edge in transverse direction: 35 mm > 2,0 · 16 mm (OK!)
Static model

F
U 200 x 60 x 10 Pvert: < 18,5 kN ( Table 4.1 )
4
F
L 150 x 100 x 8 Pvert: < 6,9 kN ( Table 4.2 )
4
thus F < 27,6 kN (4 · 6,9 kN)

Figure 4.20
JOINT SECTION A-A
B B-B
SECTION B
NOTE
Bolt Dimension: M16

Example 4.4: Detail of column base
– square tube 100 x 100 x 8
To allow joints to be bolted on the outside of the structure, place a solid fibreglass profile inside the square tube.
The joint is illustrated in Figure 4.21.
Load
The joint must be capable of transferring a vertical force in a square tube 100 x 100 x 8.
Square tube 100 x 100 x 8
distance between bolts: 65 mm > 4.0 · 16 mm (OK!)
L 150 x 100 x 8
from edge in transverse direction: 50 mm > 2,0 · 16 mm (OK!)
Static model
Square tube 100 x 100 x 8 Pvert: < 14.8 kN ( Table 4.1 )

F
4
L 150 x 100 x 8 Pvert: < 6.9 kN ( Table 4.2 )
F
4
thus F < 27.6 kN (4 · 6.9 kN)

Figure 4.21
JOINT SECTION A-A
SOLID SECTION
B B-B
B
NOTE
Bolt Dimension: M16
Solid is chamfed on vertical edges

Example 4.5: Beam U 200 x 60 x 10
and column I 200 x 100 x 10
The joint illustrated in Figure 4.22 can, for example, be used between supporting beams and columns.
Load
The joint must be able to transfer a vertical shear force from U 200 x 60 x 10 to column I 200 x 100 x 10.
I 200 x 100 x 10
U 200 x 60 x 10
distance between bolts: 100 mm > 4,.0 · 16 mm (OK!)
Static model
U 200 x 60 x 10 is the dimensioning factor, as loads act on this profile in the transverse direction.
The total shear force F can be calculated as:
F
Pvert: < 8.6 kN ( Table 4.2 )
4
or
F < 34.4 kN

Figure 4.22
JOINT SECTION A-A
SECTION
B BB-B
NOTE
Bolt Dimension: M16
Radii not stated R10

Example 4.6: Beam and column I 200 x 100 x 10
Load
The joint must be able to transfer a vertical force from the beam to the column.
I 200 x 100 x 10

distance from edge: 25 mm > 2.0 · 12 mm (OK!)
L 150 x 100 x 8

distance from edge: 25 mm > 2.0 · 12 mm (OK!)
Static model
I 200 x 100 x 10
F
Pvert: 8 < 10.0 kN (Table 4.1 )
L 150 x 100 x 12
F
Pvert: 8 < 5.6 kN (Table 4.2 )
thus F < 44.8 kN (8 · 5.6 kN)

Figure 4.23
A
JOINT SECTION A-A
B B B
SECTION B-B
NOTE
Bolt Dimension: M12
C Hole Dimension: ø13
SECTION
C C-C
C Washer Dimension: ø24

Example 4.7: Beam U200x60x10
and column. Square tube 100x100x8
Load
The joint must be capable of transferring a vertical force from the beam to the column.
U 200 x 60 x 10
Static model
U 200 x 60 x 10
F
Pvert: 2 < 8.6 kN (Table 4.2 )

F
Pvert: < 14.8 kN (Table 4.1 )
2
thus F < 17,2 kN (2 · 8.6 kN)

Figure 4.24
JOINT SECTION A
A-AA
Firkantrør
Square tube
SQUARE TUBE 100x100x8 U 200x60x10

FIRKANTRØR
NOTE
Bolt Dimension: M16

Example 4.8: Two horizontal beams I 200 x 100 x 10
This joint can be used between supporting beams in a platform. An example is illustrated on page 1.4.30 in
Figure 4.25.
Load
The joint must be capable of transferring a vertical shear force from the I 200 x 100 x 10 to which it is connected,
to the through-going I 200 x 100 x 10.
I 200 x 100 x 10
from edge in longitudinal direction (0°) 35 mm = 3.5 · 10 mm (OK!)

from edge in transverse direction (90°): 35 mm > 2.0 · 10 mm (OK!)
L 75 x 75 x 8
from edge in longitudinal direction (0°): 35 mm = 3,5 · 10 mm (OK!)

from edge in transverse direction (90°): 35 mm > 2,5 · 10 mm (OK!)
Static model
Bolt strengths are determined on the basis that these must be statically equivalent to a shear force imposed in the
middle of the through-going I 200 x 100 x 10.
Bolt strengths in the connected I 200 x 100 x 10
Bolt strengths are determined on the basis of the total shear force F.
Bolt strength is compared with the relevant load-bearing capacity in the tables in section 4.
Bottom bolt:
Phorz < 11.5 kN

F · 45 mm
Phorz =
90 mm
= 0.500 · F
Pvert < 3.9 kN
Pvert = F · α
The combined load-bearing capacity will be sufficient if

P ² P ²
( 11,5horz
kN ) +
( 5,4 kN ) vert
< 1,0

Middle bolt:
Pvert: F · (1 - 2 · α) < 5.4 kN ( table 4.2 )
Top bolt:
As bottom bolt
If α = 0.3, the maximum value for F cannot exceed 13.4 kN.
Bolt strengths in L 75 x 75 x 8 brackets
Bolt strengths in joint connecting I 200 x 100 x 10 are half of the values indicated above.
Utilization of the bolts in terms of F= 13.4 kN
Bottom bolt:
( 4,3P kN )² + ( 9,2P kN )²
horz vert
< 1.0
( 3,4 )
kN ²
4,3 kN
+ (
9,2 kN )
2,0 kN ²
= 0.67 (OK!)
Middle bolt:
Pvert: 2.6 kN < 9.2 kN (OK!) ( Table 4.1 )
Bolt strengths in through-going I 200 x 100 x 10
According to the established conditions, these bolts are only subjected to shear force.
Given the same distribution as in the joint connecting the I 200, the values from the top and bottom bolts are:
Pvert = 0.5 · 0.3 · 13.4 kN = 2.0 kN

0,5 · 13,4 · 45 mm
Phorz = = 3.4 kN
90 mm
There is sufficient capacity, since

P ² P ²
+ (
( 11,5 kN ) 5,4 kN )
horz vert
< 1.0
( 11,5 kN )
2,0 kN ²
+ (
5,4 kN )
3,4 kN ²
= 0.43 (OK!) ( Table 4.1 and 4.2 )
The value for the middle bolt is:
Pvert < 5.4 kN
Pvert = 0.5 · 0.4 · 13.4 kN = 2.7 kN (OK!) ( Table 4.2 )

Figure 4.25
A A
JOINT A-A A-A

SECTION
NOTE
Bolt Dimension: M10
Radii not stated R10

Example 4.9: Two horizontal beams U 200 x 60 x 10
This joint can be used to connect supporting beams in a platform. It is illustrated on page 1.4.33 in Figure 4.26.
Load
The joint must be able to transfer vertical shear force from the one U 100 x 60 x 10 beam to the other.
U 200 x 60 x 10
from edge in longitudinal direction (0°): 50 mm > 3.5 · 12 mm (OK!)
L 100 x 100 x 12
from edge in longitudinal direction (0°): 45 mm > 3.5 · 12 mm (OK!)
from edge in transverse direction (90°): 40 mm > 2.5 · 12 mm (OK!)
Static model
Bolt strengths must be statically equivalent to shear force imposed in the secant between the centre lines of the
web of the two U 200 x 60 x 10 profiles.

Bolt strengths in L 100 x 100 x 12
Bolts are subjected to both vertical and horizontal forces.
Bolt strengths are determined on the basis of the total shear force F.
The bolt strength is compared with the relevant load-bearing capacity in Tables 4.1 and 4.2 for load-bearing
capacity of bolts subjected to shear.
Phorz < 7.8 kN

F · 64 mm
Phorz = = 0.914 · F ( Table 4.2 )
70 mm
Pvert: F · 0.500 < 16.6 kN ( Table 4.1 )
The combined load-bearing capacity is sufficient if

P ²
( 7,8P kN )² + ( 16,6
horz
kN )
vert
< 1.0
thus the maximum value of F cannot exceed 8.3 kN.
Bolt strengths in U 200 x 60 x 10
For F = 8.3 kN the bolt strengths will be
Phorz < 13.8 kN
Phorz = F · 64 mm = 0.914 · F =7.6 kN ( Table 4.1 )

70 mm
Pvert < 6.5 kN
Pvert = F · 0,500 = 4.2 kN ( Table 4.2 )
The combined load-bearing capacity will be sufficient if

P ² P ²
( 13,8
horz
kN ) + (
6,5 kN ) vert
< 1.0
( 13,8 kN )
7,6 kN ²
+ (
6,5 kN )
4,2 kN ²
= 0.72 ( OK! )

Figure 4.26
A A
JOINT SECTION A-A

A-A
NOTE
Bolt Dimension: M12

CHAPTER 1
Section 5: Glued joints

Glued joints ..................................................................................................................... 1.5.03
Example of glued joint in combination with bolts .............................................................. 1.5.04

I
Glued joints
Using glue (an adhesive agent) can be a suitable method for joining pultruded profiles.
Glue has many advantages.
•It is easy to make aesthetic joints.

•Glued joints between profiles are typically more rigid than traditional bolted joints.
•Some types of glue are extremely strong, making it possible to limit the extent of contact areas.
•Glued joints subjected to dynamic loads are good.
However, it is necessary to consider a number of conditions in using a glued joint.
• A number of adhesive agents have properties that depend on time, and are influenced by
environmental factors such as humidity and the chemical composition of the air.
• Failure in glued joints takes place suddenly in contrast to bolted joints.
• The load-bearing capacity of a glued joint is not proportional to the area which is glued. The load-
bearing capacity of a specific joint only increases with the glued area to a certain point, after which
it remains constant for the glued area. This condition is due to the fact that fracture is connected
with certain tensions in the adhesive layer, typically in the transition from the one profile to the
other.
Because failure in glued joints occurs suddenly, joints in load-bearing structures are normally secured with
bolts. In many cases, an adhesive is applied to the contact surfaces between the joined profiles, thus
increasing the rigidity of the joint in operation.
Glued joints have many advantages in comparison with bolted joints. Around the world, intensive research is
being carried out in the mode of operation of glued joints. When sufficient knowledge becomes available,
advance verification of tests will be unnecessary, and glued joints will undoubtedly find favour as primary joints
in bearing structures. Fiberline takes active part in this research process.
Many tests suggest that also combining bolts and glue in joints can be interesting, since appropriately placed
bolts can prevent the spread of cracks which leads to failure in a glued joint.
Examples of glued joints are illustrated in Figure 6.1.
N N N N
N
N N
N N
N N
N N
N N
N N
N N
N N
Figure 6.1. Examples of glued joints

Example of glued joint in combination with bolts
Materials for use in joints with
glue and bolts.
Types of glue:
For a load-bearing structure, use

a two-component epoxy or a
polyurethane glue, following the
instructions of an authorized
supplier.
Boring bolt-holes Grinding and cleaning Applying glue with a filling Assembly of glued
glue surfaces knife. surfaces with the aid of
bolts

CHAPTER 1
Section 6: Profile tables

Introduction ......................................................................................................................... 1.6.003
I- profile .............................................................................................................................. 1.6.005
IL- profile ............................................................................................................................ 1.6.017
U- profile ............................................................................................................................ 1.6.029
UL- profile ........................................................................................................................... 1.6.047
Square tube ........................................................................................................................ 1.6.059
Pipe profile ......................................................................................................................... 1.6.081
T - profile ............................................................................................................................ 1.6.085
L - profile ............................................................................................................................ 1.6.089
Handrail .............................................................................................................................. 1.6.117

Introduction
Profile A axial load-bearing capacity (or: load-bearing capacity as column) in kN.
Profile B transverse load-bearing capacity (or: load-bearing capacity as beam) in kN/m.
Each Fiberline structural profile is presented on two pages. The front page shows an illustration of the profile, as
well as its geometric data and tables of the load-bearing capacity as a column, while the tables on the back
page present information on the load-bearing capacity of the profile as a one-, two-, or three-span beam.
For columns (page A), the buckling length is determined first, using the figures shown for the four elementary
situations at the bottom of the page to the right. The buckling length is used to determine the maximum permissible
load around both the strong and the weak profile axes in the tables to the left. The column calculations have
been carried out as described in Chapter 1, Section 3, Profiles subjected to tensile strength or compression, on
page 1.3.3.
The tables can be used to analyse compound structures subjected to compression, for example lattice columns
and compression flanges in lattice girders, provided that angular motion of the profile subjected to compression
is sufficiently prevented.
It is sufficient that I- and U-profiles are secured against buckling in the "weak" direction, so that angular motion
of the column profile is prevented.
The critical loads for local instability (flange buckling) of L- and T- profiles, which are not resistant to buckling,
are listed in the data sheets. If a profile is subjected to compression that exceeds the load-bearing capacity of
a local instability, it is necessary to prevent angular motion. Cases in which local instability can be decisive are
indicated in the tables with •.
The second page (Page B) has three tables which provide information for a simply supported profile of one, two
or three spans. The load-bearing capacity is a uniform line load in all three examples. The span of the profile,
which is illustrated next to each of the three examples, is used to determine the load-bearing capacity in kN/m
by means of four different design criteria. At the top, the ultimate limit state indicates the absolute maximum
load-bearing capacity of the profile. The middle example is the serviceability limit state. Its criterion is the
deflection which is a predetermined ratio of the length of span L.
The load-bearing capacity of the profile is illustrated as the maximum deflection for L/200, L/300 and L/400,
respectively. The load-bearing capacity around the weak axis of the profile is indicated by a dark background.
In all calculations, it is assumed that the compressed part of the profile is secured to prevent lateral buckling.
The material constants and partial coefficients used are summarized schematically in Section 2. This section
also contains a complete list of the geometric data of the profiles and a list of masses.

Axial load-bearing capacity in kN - I 120 x 60 x 6 - A
Design value for compressive

load-bearing capacity
Buckling in y direction
Buckling length Load-bearing capacity
Lk in m in kN
2.00 89.2
2.25 76.0
2.50 65.1
2.75 56.2
3.00 48.9
3.25 42.9
3.50 37.8
3.75 33.6
4.00 30.0
4.25 26.9
4.50 24.3
4.75 22.0
5.00 20.0
5.25 18.3
5.50 16.8
5.75 15.4
Geometry
6.00 14.2
H 120 mm
6.25 13.2 B 60 mm
6.50 12.2 6 mm
T1
6.75 11.4
T2 6 mm
7.00 10.6
R 7,5 mm
7.25 9.9
7.50 9.3
Cross-section constants
7.75 8.7
A 1 416 mm2
8.00 8.2
Ixx 3 103 591 mm4
Design value for compressive Wxx 51 727 mm3
load-bearing capacity Ak,y 684 mm2
Buckling in x direction Iyy 219 095 mm4
Buckling length Load-bearing capacity Wyy 7 303 mm3
Lk in m in kN Ak,x 576 mm2
0.50 96.5
Material properties
0.60 75.6
E0° 23 000 MPa
0.70 60.1
0.80 48.7 fc, 0° 240 MPa
0.90 40.0
1.00 33.4 Partial coefficients
1.10 28.2 γm,E 1.3
1.20 24.1 γm,f 1.3
1.30 20.8
1.40 18.2 Design value for load-bearing capacity
1.50 16.0 261.5 kN
1.60 14.1
1.70 12.6 Dead weight
1.80 11.3 2.55 kg/m
1.90 10.2
2.00 9.2 Buckling length
2.10 8.4
2.20 7.7
2.30 7.0
2.40 6.5
2.50 6.0
2.60 5.5
2.70 5.1
Lk = L 0.7L 0.5L 2L
2.80 4.8
3.00 4.2

Load-bearing capacity in kN/m - I 120 x 60 x 6 - B
One span
L (m) = 2.00 2.25 2.50 2.75 3.00 3.25 3.50 3.75 4.00 4.25 4.50 4.75 5.00 5.25 5.50 5.75 6.00
Breaking point
x direction 13.15 11.69 10.52 9.57 8.49 7.23 6.24 5.43 4.77 4.23 3.77 3.39 3.06 2.77 2.53 2.31 2.12
y direction 2.70 2.13 1.73 1.43 1.20 1.02 0.88 0.77 0.67 0.60 0.53 0.48 0.43 0.39 0.36 0.33 0.30
Application limit point
δmax < L / 200 x direction 3.16 2.26 1.67 1.26 0.98 0.77 0.62 0.51 0.42 0.35 0.30 0.25 0.22 0.19 0.16 0.14 0.13
y direction 0.24 0.17 0.12 0.09 0.07 0.06 0.05 0.04 0.03 0.03 0.02 0.02 0.02 0.01 0.01 0.01 0.01
y direction 0.16 0.11 0.08 0.06 0.05 0.04 0.03 0.02 0.02 0.02 0.01 0.01 0.01 0.01 0.01 0.01 0.01
y direction 0.12 0.08 0.06 0.05 0.04 0.03 0.02 0.02 0.02 0.01 0.01 0.01 0.01 0.01 0.01 0.01 0.00
Two spans
L (m) = 2.00 2.25 2.50 2.75 3.00 3.25 3.50 3.75 4.00 4.25 4.50 4.75 5.00 5.25 5.50 5.75 6.00
Breaking point
x direction 10.52 9.35 8.42 7.65 7.02 6.48 6.01 5.43 4.77 4.23 3.77 3.39 3.06 2.77 2.53 2.31 2.12
y direction 2.70 2.13 1.73 1.43 1.20 1.02 0.88 0.77 0.67 0.60 0.53 0.48 0.43 0.39 0.36 0.33 0.30
y direction 0.57 0.40 0.29 0.22 0.17 0.13 0.11 0.09 0.07 0.06 0.05 0.04 0.04 0.03 0.03 0.02 0.02
y direction 0.38 0.27 0.20 0.15 0.11 0.09 0.07 0.06 0.05 0.04 0.03 0.03 0.02 0.02 0.02 0.02 0.01
y direction 0.29 0.20 0.15 0.11 0.09 0.07 0.05 0.04 0.04 0.03 0.03 0.02 0.02 0.02 0.01 0.01 0.01
Three spans
L (m) = 2.00 2.25 2.50 2.75 3.00 3.25 3.50 3.75 4.00 4.25 4.50 4.75 5.00 5.25 5.50 5.75 6.00
Breaking point
x direction 10.96 9.74 8.77 7.97 7.31 6.75 6.26 5.85 5.48 5.16 4.72 4.23 3.82 3.46 3.16 2.89 2.65
y direction 3.37 2.66 2.16 1.78 1.50 1.28 1.10 0.96 0.84 0.75 0.67 0.60 0.54 0.49 0.45 0.41 0.37
y direction 0.45 0.32 0.23 0.17 0.13 0.11 0.09 0.07 0.06 0.05 0.04 0.03 0.03 0.03 0.02 0.02 0.02
y direction 0.30 0.21 0.15 0.12 0.09 0.07 0.06 0.05 0.04 0.03 0.03 0.02 0.02 0.02 0.01 0.01 0.01
y direction 0.23 0.16 0.12 0.09 0.07 0.05 0.04 0.03 0.03 0.02 0.02 0.02 0.01 0.01 0.01 0.01 0.01


Lk in m in kN
2.00 242.4
2.25 215.4
2.50 191.5
2.75 170.6
3.00 152.4
3.25 136.6
3.50 122.8
3.75 110.8
4.00 100.3
4.25 91.1
4.50 83.1
4.75 76.0
5.00 69.7
5.25 64.1
5.50 59.1
5.75 54.7
6.00 50.7 Geometry
6.25 47.2 H 160 mm
6.50 44.0 B 80 mm
6.75 41.0 T1 8 mm
7.00 38.4 T2 8 mm
7.25 36.0 R 8 mm
7.50 33.8
7.75 31.8 Cross-section constants
8.00 30.0 A 2 487 mm2
Ixx 9 661 724 mm4
load-bearing capacity 1 216 mm2
Ak,y
Buckling in x direction 690 774 mm4
Iyy
Lk in m in kN Ak,x 1 024 mm2
0.50 257.7
0.60 216.0 Material properties
0.70 181.3 E0° 28 000 MPa
0.80 153.0 fc, 0° 240 MPa
0.90 130.0
1.10 96.0 γm,E 1.3
1.20 83.4 γm,f 1.3
1.30 73.1
1.40 64.4
Design value for load-bearing capacity
1.50 57.1
459.1 kN
1.60 51.0
1.70 45.7
Dead weight
1.80 41.2
1.90 37.4 4.48 kg/m
2.00 34.0
2.20 28.5
2.30 26.2
2.40 24.2
2.50 22.4
2.60 20.7
2.70 19.3
2.80 18.0 Lk = L 0.7L 0.5L 2L
3.00 15.8

One span
L (m) = 2.00 2.25 2.50 2.75 3.00 3.25 3.50 3.75 4.00 4.25 4.50 4.75 5.00 5.25 5.50 5.75 6.00
Breaking point
x direction 23.38 20.79 18.71 17.01 15.59 14.39 13.36 12.47 11.15 9.88 8.81 7.91 7.13 6.47 5.90 5.39 4.95
y direction 6.38 5.04 4.08 3.37 2.83 2.41 2.08 1.81 1.59 1.41 1.26 1.13 1.02 0.93 0.84 0.77 0.71
y direction 0.91 0.64 0.47 0.35 0.27 0.22 0.17 0.14 0.12 0.10 0.08 0.07 0.06 0.05 0.04 0.04 0.03
y direction 0.61 0.43 0.31 0.24 0.18 0.14 0.12 0.09 0.08 0.06 0.05 0.05 0.04 0.03 0.03 0.03 0.02
y direction 0.46 0.32 0.24 0.18 0.14 0.11 0.09 0.07 0.06 0.05 0.04 0.03 0.03 0.03 0.02 0.02 0.02
Two spans
L (m) = 2.00 2.25 2.50 2.75 3.00 3.25 3.50 3.75 4.00 4.25 4.50 4.75 5.00 5.25 5.50 5.75 6.00
Breaking point
x direction 18.71 16.63 14.97 13.61 12.47 11.51 10.69 9.98 9.35 8.80 8.31 7.88 7.13 6.47 5.90 5.39 4.95
y direction 6.38 5.04 4.08 3.37 2.83 2.41 2.08 1.81 1.59 1.41 1.26 1.13 1.02 0.93 0.84 0.77 0.71
y direction 2.15 1.52 1.12 0.84 0.65 0.51 0.41 0.33 0.28 0.23 0.19 0.17 0.14 0.12 0.11 0.09 0.08
y direction 1.43 1.02 0.74 0.56 0.43 0.34 0.27 0.22 0.18 0.15 0.13 0.11 0.09 0.08 0.07 0.06 0.05
y direction 1.08 0.76 0.56 0.42 0.33 0.26 0.21 0.17 0.14 0.12 0.10 0.08 0.07 0.06 0.05 0.05 0.04
Three spans
L (m) = 2.00 2.25 2.50 2.75 3.00 3.25 3.50 3.75 4.00 4.25 4.50 4.75 5.00 5.25 5.50 5.75 6.00
Breaking point
x direction 19.49 17.32 15.59 14.17 12.99 11.99 11.14 10.39 9.74 9.17 8.66 8.21 7.79 7.42 7.09 6.74 6.19
y direction 7.97 6.30 5.10 4.22 3.54 3.02 2.60 2.27 1.99 1.77 1.57 1.41 1.28 1.16 1.05 0.96 0.89
y direction 1.71 1.21 0.88 0.67 0.51 0.41 0.32 0.26 0.22 0.18 0.15 0.13 0.11 0.10 0.08 0.07 0.06
y direction 1.14 0.80 0.59 0.44 0.34 0.27 0.22 0.18 0.15 0.12 0.10 0.09 0.07 0.06 0.06 0.05 0.04
y direction 0.85 0.60 0.44 0.33 0.26 0.20 0.16 0.13 0.11 0.09 0.08 0.07 0.06 0.05 0.04 0.04 0.03


Lk in m in kN
2.00 456.3
2.25 416.0
2.50 378.7
2.75 344.6
3.00 313.6
3.25 285.7
3.50 260.6
3.75 238.2
4.00 218.1
4.25 200.2
4.50 184.1
4.75 169.7
5.00 156.7
5.25 145.1
5.50 134.6
5.75 125.2
6.00 116.6 Geometry
6.25 108.9 H 200 mm
6.50 101.8 B 100 mm
6.75 95.4 T1 10 mm
7.00 89.6 T2 10 mm
7.25 84.2 R 10 mm
7.50 79.3
8.00 70.6 A 3 886 mm2
Ixx 23 588 193 mm4
load-bearing capacity Ak,y 1 900 mm2
Buckling in x direction 1 686 460 mm4
Iyy
0.50 478.2
0.70 362.2 E0° 28 000 MPa
0.80 314.5 fc, 0° 240 MPa
0.90 273.7
1.10 209.7 γm,E 1.3
1.20 184.8 γm,f 1.3
1.30 163.7
1.40 145.7
1.50 130.4
717.4 kN
1.60 117.2
1.70 105.8
Dead weight
1.80 95.9
6.99 kg/m
1.90 87.2
2.00 79.7
Buckling length
2.10 73.0
2.20 67.1
2.30 61.9
2.40 57.3
2.50 53.1
2.60 49.4
2.70 46.0
2.80 43.0 Lk = L 0.7L 0.5L 2L
3.00 37.7

One span
L (m) = 2.00 2.25 2.50 2.75 3.00 3.25 3.50 3.75 4.00 4.25 4.50 4.75 5.00 5.25 5.50 5.75 6.00
Breaking point
x direction 36.54 32.48 29.23 26.57 24.36 22.49 20.88 19.49 18.27 17.19 16.24 15.38 13.94 12.64 11.52 10.54 9.68
y direction 12.45 9.84 7.97 6.59 5.54 4.72 4.07 3.54 3.11 2.76 2.46 2.21 1.99 1.81 1.65 1.51 1.38
y direction 2.21 1.56 1.14 0.86 0.66 0.52 0.42 0.34 0.28 0.23 0.20 0.17 0.14 0.12 0.11 0.10 0.08
y direction 1.48 1.04 0.76 0.58 0.44 0.35 0.28 0.23 0.19 0.16 0.13 0.11 0.10 0.08 0.07 0.06 0.06
y direction 1.11 0.78 0.57 0.43 0.33 0.26 0.21 0.17 0.14 0.12 0.10 0.08 0.07 0.06 0.05 0.05 0.04
Two spans
L (m) = 2.00 2.25 2.50 2.75 3.00 3.25 3.50 3.75 4.00 4.25 4.50 4.75 5.00 5.25 5.50 5.75 6.00
Breaking point
x direction 29.23 25.98 23.38 21.26 19.49 17.99 16.70 15.59 14.62 13.76 12.99 12.31 11.69 11.14 10.63 10.17 9.68
y direction 12.45 9.84 7.97 6.59 5.54 4.72 4.07 3.54 3.11 2.76 2.46 2.21 1.99 1.81 1.65 1.51 1.38
y direction 5.15 3.66 2.69 2.03 1.57 1.24 1.00 0.81 0.67 0.56 0.47 0.40 0.35 0.30 0.26 0.23 0.20
y direction 3.44 2.44 1.79 1.36 1.05 0.83 0.67 0.54 0.45 0.37 0.32 0.27 0.23 0.20 0.17 0.15 0.13
y direction 2.58 1.83 1.35 1.02 0.79 0.62 0.50 0.41 0.34 0.28 0.24 0.20 0.17 0.15 0.13 0.11 0.10
Three spans
L (m) = 2.00 2.25 2.50 2.75 3.00 3.25 3.50 3.75 4.00 4.25 4.50 4.75 5.00 5.25 5.50 5.75 6.00
Breaking point
x direction 30.45 27.07 24.36 22.14 20.30 18.74 17.40 16.24 15.22 14.33 13.53 12.82 12.18 11.60 11.07 10.59 10.15
y direction 15.57 12.30 9.96 8.23 6.92 5.90 5.08 4.43 3.89 3.45 3.08 2.76 2.49 2.26 2.06 1.88 1.73
y direction 4.11 2.91 2.14 1.61 1.25 0.98 0.79 0.64 0.53 0.44 0.37 0.32 0.27 0.24 0.21 0.18 0.16
y direction 2.74 1.94 1.42 1.07 0.83 0.66 0.53 0.43 0.35 0.30 0.25 0.21 0.18 0.16 0.14 0.12 0.11
y direction 2.05 1.46 1.07 0.81 0.62 0.49 0.39 0.32 0.27 0.22 0.19 0.16 0.14 0.12 0.10 0.09 0.08


Lk in m in kN
2.00 739.2
2.25 687.3
2.50 637.3
2.75 589.8
3.00 545.4
3.25 504.1
3.50 465.9
3.75 430.9
4.00 398.9
4.25 369.7
4.50 343.0
4.75 318.7
5.00 296.5
5.25 276.3
5.50 257.9
5.75 241.1
6.00 225.7 Geometry
6.25 211.6 H 240 mm
B 120 mm
6.50 198.7
T1 12 mm
6.75 186.9
7.00 176.0 T2 12 mm
7.25 166.0 R 12 mm
7.50 156.8
8.00 140.4 A 5 596 mm2
Ixx 48 912 478 mm4
Buckling in x direction Iyy 3 497 044 mm4
0.50 766.7
0.70 614.6 E0° 28 000 MPa
0.80 546.8 fc, 0° 240 MPa
0.90 486.0
1.10 385.3 γm,E 1.3
1.20 344.2 γm,f 1.3
1.30 308.5
1.50 250.3
1033.0 kN
1.60 226.7
1.70 205.9
Dead weight
1.80 187.7
10.1 kg/m
1.90 171.7
2.00 157.5
Buckling length
2.10 144.9
2.20 133.7
2.30 123.7
2.40 114.7
2.50 106.7
2.60 99.4
2.70 92.8
2.80 86.8 Lk = L 0.7L 0.5L 2L
3.00 76.5

One span
L (m) = 2.00 2.25 2.50 2.75 3.00 3.25 3.50 3.75 4.00 4.25 4.50 4.75 5.00 5.25 5.50 5.75 6.00
Breaking point
x direction 52.62 46.77 42.09 38.27 35.08 32.38 30.07 28.06 26.31 24.76 23.38 22.15 21.05 20.04 19.13 18.21 16.72
y direction 21.52 17.00 13.77 11.38 9.56 8.15 7.03 6.12 5.38 4.77 4.25 3.82 3.44 3.12 2.85 2.60 2.39
y direction 4.55 3.21 2.36 1.78 1.37 1.08 0.87 0.71 0.58 0.49 0.41 0.35 0.30 0.26 0.22 0.20 0.17
y direction 3.03 2.15 1.58 1.19 0.92 0.72 0.58 0.47 0.39 0.33 0.27 0.23 0.20 0.17 0.15 0.13 0.12
y direction 2.27 1.61 1.18 0.89 0.69 0.54 0.44 0.35 0.29 0.24 0.21 0.17 0.15 0.13 0.11 0.10 0.09
Two spans
L (m) = 2.00 2.25 2.50 2.75 3.00 3.25 3.50 3.75 4.00 4.25 4.50 4.75 5.00 5.25 5.50 5.75 6.00
Breaking point
x direction 42.09 37.42 33.67 30.61 28.06 25.90 24.05 22.45 21.05 19.81 18.71 17.72 16.84 16.04 15.31 14.64 14.03
y direction 21.52 17.00 13.77 11.38 9.56 8.15 7.03 6.12 5.38 4.77 4.25 3.82 3.44 3.12 2.85 2.60 2.39
y direction 10.44 7.45 5.49 4.16 3.23 2.55 2.05 1.67 1.38 1.16 0.98 0.83 0.71 0.62 0.54 0.47 0.41
y direction 6.96 4.97 3.66 2.78 2.15 1.70 1.37 1.12 0.92 0.77 0.65 0.55 0.48 0.41 0.36 0.31 0.28
y direction 5.22 3.72 2.75 2.08 1.61 1.28 1.03 0.84 0.69 0.58 0.49 0.42 0.36 0.31 0.27 0.24 0.21
Three spans
L (m) = 2.00 2.25 2.50 2.75 3.00 3.25 3.50 3.75 4.00 4.25 4.50 4.75 5.00 5.25 5.50 5.75 6.00
Breaking point
x direction 43.85 38.97 35.08 31.89 29.23 26.98 25.05 23.38 21.92 20.63 19.49 18.46 17.54 16.70 15.94 15.25 14.62
y direction 26.90 21.25 17.22 14.23 11.96 10.19 8.78 7.65 6.73 5.96 5.31 4.77 4.30 3.90 3.56 3.25 2.99
y direction 8.36 5.95 4.37 3.31 2.56 2.02 1.63 1.33 1.09 0.91 0.77 0.66 0.56 0.49 0.42 0.37 0.33
y direction 5.57 3.96 2.92 2.21 1.71 1.35 1.08 0.88 0.73 0.61 0.51 0.44 0.38 0.32 0.28 0.25 0.22
y direction 4.18 2.97 2.19 1.65 1.28 1.01 0.81 0.66 0.55 0.46 0.39 0.33 0.28 0.24 0.21 0.19 0.16


Lk in m in kN
2.00 1286.8
2.25 1221.1
2.50 1155.1
2.75 1090.0
3.00 1026.6
3.25 965.6
3.50 907.4
3.75 852.1
4.00 800.1
4.25 751.3
4.50 705.6
4.75 663.0
5.00 623.3
5.25 586.4
5.50 552.1
5.75 520.3
6.00 490.7 Geometry
6.25 463.3 H 300 mm
6.50 437.8 B 150 mm
6.75 414.2 T1 15 mm
7.00 392.2 T2 15 mm
7.25 371.7 R 15 mm
7.50 352.7
8.00 318.4 A 8 743 mm2
Ixx 119 415 229 mm4
Iyy
0.50 1320.5
0.70 1124.2 E0° 28 000 MPa
0.80 1028.6 fc, 0° 240 MPa
0.90 938.2
1.10 777.5 γm,E 1.3
1.20 707.7 γm,f 1.3
1.30 644.9
1.40 588.4
1.50 537.8
1614.1 kN
1.60 492.6
1.70 452.1
Dead weight
1.80 415.8
15.7 kg/m
1.90 383.3
2.00 354.2
Buckling length
2.10 327.9
2.20 304.3
2.30 282.9
2.40 263.6
2.50 246.1
2.60 230.2
2.70 215.7
2.80 202.5 Lk = L 0.7L 0.5L 2L
3.00 179.3

One span
L (m) = 3,00 3,25 3,50 3,75 4,00 4,25 4,50 4,75 5,00 5,25 5,50 5,75 6,00 6,25 6,50 6,75 7,00
Breaking point
x direction 54,81 50,59 46,98 43,85 41,11 38,69 36,54 34,62 32,88 31,32 29,90 28,60 27,40 26,31 25,30 24,36 23,49
y direction 18,68 15,92 13,72 11,96 10,51 9,31 8,30 7,45 6,73 6,10 5,56 5,09 4,67 4,30 3,98 3,69 3,43
δmax < L / 200 x direction 37,21 30,24 24,87 20,67 17,35 14,69 12,54 10,78 9,34 8,13 7,13 6,28 5,56 4,94 4,41 3,96 3,56
y direction 3,32 2,62 2,10 1,71 1,42 1,18 1,00 0,85 0,73 0,63 0,55 0,48 0,42 0,37 0,33 0,30 0,27
y direction 2,21 1,75 1,41 1,15 0,95 0,79 0,67 0,57 0,49 0,42 0,37 0,32 0,28 0,25 0,22 0,20 0,18
y direction 1,66 1,31 1,05 0,86 0,71 0,59 0,50 0,43 0,37 0,32 0,27 0,24 0,21 0,19 0,17 0,15 0,13
Two spans
L (m) = 3.00 3.25 3.50 3.75 4.00 4.25 4.50 4.75 5.00 5.25 5.50 5.75 6.00 6.25 6.50 6.75 7.00
Breaking point
x direction 43.85 40.47 37.58 35.08 32.88 30.95 29.23 27.69 26.31 25.05 23.92 22.88 21.92 21.05 20.24 19.49 18.79
y direction 18.68 15.92 13.72 11.96 10.51 9.31 8.30 7.45 6.73 6.10 5.56 5.09 4.67 4.30 3.98 3.69 3.43
y direction 7.73 6.13 4.94 4.04 3.34 2.79 2.36 2.01 1.73 1.50 1.30 1.14 1.01 0.89 0.79 0.71 0.64
y direction 5.15 4.09 3.29 2.69 2.23 1.86 1.57 1.34 1.15 1.00 0.87 0.76 0.67 0.59 0.53 0.47 0.42
y direction 3.86 3.06 2.47 2.02 1.67 1.40 1.18 1.01 0.86 0.75 0.65 0.57 0.50 0.45 0.40 0.35 0.32
Three spans
L (m) = 3.00 3.25 3.50 3.75 4.00 4.25 4.50 4.75 5.00 5.25 5.50 5.75 6.00 6.25 6.50 6.75 7.00
Breaking point
x direction 45.67 42.16 39.15 36.54 34.25 32.24 30.45 28.85 27.40 26.10 24.91 23.83 22.84 21.92 21.08 20.30 19.57
y direction 23.35 19.90 17.16 14.94 13.13 11.64 10.38 9.31 8.41 7.62 6.95 6.36 5.84 5.38 4.97 4.61 4.29
y direction 6.16 4.88 3.92 3.20 2.65 2.21 1.87 1.59 1.37 1.18 1.03 0.90 0.80 0.70 0.63 0.56 0.50
y direction 4.11 3.25 2.62 2.14 1.77 1.48 1.25 1.06 0.91 0.79 0.69 0.60 0.53 0.47 0.42 0.37 0.33
y direction 3.08 2.44 1.96 1.60 1.32 1.11 0.93 0.80 0.68 0.59 0.52 0.45 0.40 0.35 0.31 0.28 0.25


Lk in m in kN
2.00 1975.4
2.25 1899.7
2.50 1821.6
2.75 1742.5
3.00 1663.3
3.25 1585.1
3.50 1508.4
3.75 1433.9
4.00 1362.0
4.25 1293.0
4.50 1227.1
4.75 1164.3
5.00 1104.8
5.25 1048.4
5.50 995.1
5.75 944.9
6.00 897.5 Geometry
6.25 853.0 H 360 mm
B 180 mm
6.50 811.1
T1 18 mm
6.75 771.7
7.00 734.7 T2 18 mm
7.25 699.9 R 18 mm
7.50 667.2
8.00 607.5 A 12 590 mm2
Ixx 247 619 419 mm4
Design value for compressive Wxx 1 375 663 mm3
0.50 2013.4
0.70 1784.3 E0° 28 000 MPa
0.80 1665.9 fc, 0° 240 MPa
0.90 1549.3
1.10 1330.2 γm,E 1.3
1.20 1230.2 γm,f 1.3
1.30 1137.3
1.50 972.7
2324.3 kN
1.60 900.5
1.70 834.6
Dead weight
1.80 774.5
22.7 kg/m
1.90 719.7
2.00 669.7
Buckling length
2.10 624.2
2.20 582.6
2.30 544.7
2.40 510.0
2.50 478.2
2.60 449.1
2.70 422.4
2.80 397.9 Lk = L 0.7L 0.5L 2L
3.00 354.4

One span
L (m) = 3,50 3,75 4,00 4,25 4,50 4,75 5,00 5,25 5,50 5,75 6,00 6,25 6,50 6,75 7,00 7,25 7,50
Breaking point
x direction 67,65 63,14 59,19 55,71 52,62 49,85 47,35 45,10 43,05 41,18 39,46 37,88 36,43 35,08 33,82 32,66 31,57
y direction 23,72 20,66 18,16 16,08 14,35 12,88 11,62 10,54 9,60 8,79 8,07 7,44 6,88 6,38 5,93 5,53 5,16
εmax < L / 200 x direction 47,98 40,19 33,95 28,91 24,80 21,42 18,62 16,27 14,30 12,63 11,20 9,98 8,93 8,02 7,23 6,54 5,93
y direction 4,33 3,53 2,92 2,44 2,06 1,75 1,50 1,30 1,13 0,99 0,87 0,77 0,69 0,61 0,55 0,50 0,45
y direction 2,89 2,36 1,95 1,63 1,38 1,17 1,01 0,87 0,76 0,66 0,58 0,52 0,46 0,41 0,37 0,33 0,30
y direction 2,17 1,77 1,46 1,22 1,03 0,88 0,75 0,65 0,57 0,50 0,44 0,39 0,35 0,31 0,28 0,25 0,23
Two spans
L (m) = 3.50 3.75 4.00 4.25 4.50 4.75 5.00 5.25 5.50 5.75 6.00 6.25 6.50 6.75 7.00 7.25 7.50
Breaking point
x direction 54.12 50.51 47.35 44.57 42.09 39.88 37.88 36.08 34.44 32.94 31.57 30.31 29.14 28.06 27.06 26.13 25.26
y direction 23.72 20.66 18.16 16.08 14.35 12.88 11.62 10.54 9.60 8.79 8.07 7.44 6.88 6.38 5.93 5.53 5.16
εmax < L / 200 x direction 87.40 75.07 64.85 56.32 49.17 43.13 38.01 33.64 29.89 26.66 23.87 21.44 19.33 17.48 15.85 14.41 13.14
y direction 10.06 8.24 6.83 5.72 4.84 4.13 3.55 3.08 2.68 2.35 2.07 1.84 1.64 1.46 1.31 1.18 1.07
y direction 6.71 5.49 4.55 3.82 3.23 2.75 2.37 2.05 1.79 1.57 1.38 1.23 1.09 0.98 0.88 0.79 0.71
y direction 5.03 4.12 3.42 2.86 2.42 2.07 1.78 1.54 1.34 1.18 1.04 0.92 0.82 0.73 0.66 0.59 0.53
Three spans
L (m) = 3.50 3.75 4.00 4.25 4.50 4.75 5.00 5.25 5.50 5.75 6.00 6.25 6.50 6.75 7.00 7.25 7.50
Breaking point
x direction 56.37 52.62 49.33 46.43 43.85 41.54 39.46 37.58 35.87 34.31 32.88 31.57 30.36 29.23 28.19 27.21 26.31
y direction 29.65 25.82 22.70 20.11 17.93 16.10 14.53 13.18 12.01 10.98 10.09 9.30 8.60 7.97 7.41 6.91 6.46
y direction 8.02 6.56 5.43 4.55 3.84 3.28 2.82 2.44 2.12 1.86 1.64 1.45 1.29 1.16 1.04 0.94 0.85
y direction 5.35 4.37 3.62 3.03 2.56 2.18 1.88 1.63 1.42 1.24 1.09 0.97 0.86 0.77 0.69 0.62 0.56
y direction 4.01 3.28 2.72 2.27 1.92 1.64 1.41 1.22 1.06 0.93 0.82 0.73 0.65 0.58 0.52 0.47 0.42

Axial load-bearing capacity in kN - IL 120 x 60 x 5/5 - A

Lk in m in kN
2.00 47.6
2.25 42.8
2.50 38.5
2.75 34.7
3.00 31.2
3.25 28.2
3.50 25.5
3.75 23.2
4.00 21.1
4.25 19.2
4.50 17.6
4.75 16.2
5.00 14.9
5.25 13.7
5.50 12.7
5.75 11.8
6.00 10.9 Geometry
6.25 10.2 H 120 mm
B 60 mm
6.50 9.5
T1 5 mm
6.75 8.9
7.00 8.3 T2 5 mm
7.25 7.8 R 5,0 mm
7.50 7.4
8.00 6.5 A 1 171 mm2
Ixx 2 601 910 mm4
0.50 49.8
0.70 36.2 E0° 23 000 MPa
0.80 30.9 fc, 0° 240 MPa
0.90 26.5
1.10 19.8 γm,E 1.3
1.20 17.3 γm,f 1.3
1.30 15.3
1.50 12.0 216.3 kN
1.60 10.8
1.70 9.7
Dead weight
1.80 8.7
2.11 kg/m
1.90 7.9
2.00 7.2
Buckling length
2.10 6.6
2.20 6.1
2.30 5.6
2.40 5.2
2.50 4.8
2.60 4.4
2.70 4.1
2.80 3.9
3.00 3.4

Load-bearing capacity in kN/m - IL 120 x 60 x 5/5 - B
One span
L (m) = 2.00 2.25 2.50 2.75 3.00 3.25 3.50 3.75 4.00 4.25 4.50 4.75 5.00 5.25 5.50 5.75 6.00
Breaking point
x direction 6.07 4.80 3.89 3.21 2.70 2.30 1.98 1.73 1.52 1.34 1.20 1.08 0.97 0.88 0.80 0.73 0.67
y direction 0.85 0.67 0.54 0.45 0.38 0.32 0.28 0.24 0.21 0.19 0.17 0.15 0.14 0.12 0.11 0.10 0.09
y direction 0.20 0.14 0.10 0.08 0.06 0.05 0.04 0.03 0.02 0.02 0.02 0.01 0.01 0.01 0.01 0.01 0.01
y direction 0.13 0.09 0.07 0.05 0.04 0.03 0.02 0.02 0.02 0.01 0.01 0.01 0.01 0.01 0.01 0.01 0.00
y direction 0.10 0.07 0.05 0.04 0.03 0.02 0.02 0.02 0.01 0.01 0.01 0.01 0.01 0.01 0.00 0.00 0.00
Two spans
L (m) = 2.00 2.25 2.50 2.75 3.00 3.25 3.50 3.75 4.00 4.25 4.50 4.75 5.00 5.25 5.50 5.75 6.00
Breaking point
x direction 6.07 4.80 3.89 3.21 2.70 2.30 1.98 1.73 1.52 1.34 1.20 1.08 0.97 0.88 0.80 0.73 0.67
y direction 0.85 0.67 0.54 0.45 0.38 0.32 0.28 0.24 0.21 0.19 0.17 0.15 0.14 0.12 0.11 0.10 0.09
y direction 0.47 0.33 0.24 0.18 0.14 0.11 0.09 0.07 0.06 0.05 0.04 0.04 0.03 0.03 0.02 0.02 0.02
y direction 0.32 0.22 0.16 0.12 0.09 0.07 0.06 0.05 0.04 0.03 0.03 0.02 0.02 0.02 0.02 0.01 0.01
y direction 0.24 0.17 0.12 0.09 0.07 0.06 0.04 0.04 0.03 0.02 0.02 0.02 0.02 0.01 0.01 0.01 0.01
Three spans
L (m) = 2.00 2.25 2.50 2.75 3.00 3.25 3.50 3.75 4.00 4.25 4.50 4.75 5.00 5.25 5.50 5.75 6.00
Breaking point
x direction 7.59 6.00 4.86 4.01 3.37 2.87 2.48 2.16 1.90 1.68 1.50 1.35 1.21 1.10 1.00 0.92 0.84
y direction 1.06 0.84 0.68 0.56 0.47 0.40 0.35 0.30 0.26 0.23 0.21 0.19 0.17 0.15 0.14 0.13 0.12
y direction 0.37 0.26 0.19 0.14 0.11 0.09 0.07 0.06 0.05 0.04 0.03 0.03 0.02 0.02 0.02 0.02 0.01
y direction 0.25 0.18 0.13 0.10 0.07 0.06 0.05 0.04 0.03 0.03 0.02 0.02 0.02 0.01 0.01 0.01 0.01
y direction 0.19 0.13 0.10 0.07 0.06 0.04 0.04 0.03 0.02 0.02 0.02 0.01 0.01 0.01 0.01 0.01 0.01


Lk in m in kN
2.00 109.9
2.25 103.4
2.50 97.0
2.75 90.8
3.00 84.9
3.25 79.2
3.50 73.9
3.75 68.9
4.00 64.3
4.25 60.1
4.50 56.1
4.75 52.4
5.00 49.1
5.25 46.0
5.50 43.1
5.75 40.5
6.00 38.0 Geometry
6.25 35.8 H 160 mm
6.50 33.7 B 80 mm
6.75 31.8 T1 8 mm
7.00 30.1 T2 5 mm
7.25 28.4 R 8 mm
7.50 26.9
8.00 24.2 A 2 055 mm2
Ixx 8 759 190 mm4
load-bearing capacity 760 mm2
Ak,y
Iyy
Buckling length Load-bearing capacity Wyy 17127 mm3
0.50 115.4
0.70 96.9 E0° 28 000 MPa
0.80 88.1 240 MPa
fc, 0°
0.90 79.9
1.10 65.5 γm,E 1.3
1.20 59.4
γm,f 1.3
1.30 53.9
1.50 44.6
379.4 kN
1.60 40.8
1.70 37.3
Dead weight
1.80 34.2
3.70 kg/m
1.90 31.5
2.00 29.1
Buckling length
2.10 26.9
2.20 24.9
2.30 23.1
2.40 21.5
2.50 20.1
2.60 18.7
2.70 17.5
2.80 16.5 Lk = L 0.7L 0.5L 2L
3.00 14.5

One span
L (m) = 2.00 2.25 2.50 2.75 3.00 3.25 3.50 3.75 4.00 4.25 4.50 4.75 5.00 5.25 5.50 5.75 6.00
Breaking point
x direction 14.62 12.11 9.81 8.11 6.81 5.80 5.01 4.36 3.83 3.39 3.03 2.72 2.45 2.22 2.03 1.85 1.70
y direction 2.40 1.89 1.53 1.27 1.07 0.91 0.78 0.68 0.60 0.53 0.47 0.43 0.38 0.35 0.32 0.29 0.27
y direction 0.91 0.64 0.47 0.35 0.27 0.21 0.17 0.14 0.11 0.10 0.08 0.07 0.06 0.05 0.04 0.04 0.03
y direction 0.60 0.43 0.31 0.23 0.18 0.14 0.11 0.09 0.08 0.06 0.05 0.05 0.04 0.03 0.03 0.03 0.02
y direction 0.45 0.32 0.23 0.18 0.14 0.11 0.09 0.07 0.06 0.05 0.04 0.03 0.03 0.03 0.02 0.02 0.02
Two spans
L (m) = 2.00 2.25 2.50 2.75 3.00 3.25 3.50 3.75 4.00 4.25 4.50 4.75 5.00 5.25 5.50 5.75 6.00
Breaking point
x direction 11.69 10.39 9.35 8.11 6.81 5.80 5.01 4.36 3.83 3.39 3.03 2.72 2.45 2.22 2.03 1.85 1.70
y direction 2.40 1.89 1.53 1.27 1.07 0.91 0.78 0.68 0.60 0.53 0.47 0.43 0.38 0.35 0.32 0.29 0.27
y direction 2.14 1.51 1.11 0.83 0.65 0.51 0.41 0.33 0.27 0.23 0.19 0.16 0.14 0.12 0.11 0.09 0.08
y direction 1.42 1.01 0.74 0.56 0.43 0.34 0.27 0.22 0.18 0.15 0.13 0.11 0.09 0.08 0.07 0.06 0.05
y direction 1.07 0.76 0.55 0.42 0.32 0.25 0.20 0.17 0.14 0.11 0.10 0.08 0.07 0.06 0.05 0.05 0.04
Three spans
L (m) = 2.00 2.25 2.50 2.75 3.00 3.25 3.50 3.75 4.00 4.25 4.50 4.75 5.00 5.25 5.50 5.75 6.00
Breaking point
x direction 12.18 10.83 9.74 8.86 8.12 7.26 6.26 5.45 4.79 4.24 3.78 3.40 3.07 2.78 2.53 2.32 2.13
y direction 3.00 2.37 1.92 1.59 1.33 1.14 0.98 0.85 0.75 0.66 0.59 0.53 0.48 0.43 0.40 0.36 0.33
y direction 1.69 1.20 0.88 0.66 0.51 0.40 0.32 0.26 0.22 0.18 0.15 0.13 0.11 0.10 0.08 0.07 0.06
y direction 1.13 0.80 0.58 0.44 0.34 0.27 0.21 0.17 0.14 0.12 0.10 0.09 0.07 0.06 0.06 0.05 0.04
y direction 0.85 0.60 0.44 0.33 0.25 0.20 0.16 0.13 0.11 0.09 0.08 0.06 0.06 0.05 0.04 0.04 0.03


Lk in m in kN
2.00 223.5
2.25 213.4
2.50 203.1
2.75 192.9
3.00 182.8
3.25 172.9
3.50 163.4
3.75 154.3
4.00 145.6
4.25 137.4
4.50 129.6
4.75 122.3
5.00 115.4
5.25 109.0
5.50 103.0
5.75 97.4
6.00 92.1 Geometry
6.25 87.2 H 200 mm
B 100 mm
6.50 82.6
T1 8 mm
6.75 78.4
7.00 74.4 T2 5 mm
7.25 70.6 R 8 mm
7.50 67.1
8.00 60.8 A 2 575 mm2
Ixx 17 444 191 mm4
0.50 228.6
0.70 198.3 E0° 28 000 MPa
0.80 183.1 fc, 0° 240 MPa
0.90 168.5
1.10 141.8 γm,E 1.3
1.20 130.0 γm,f 1.3
1.30 119.2
1.50 100.5
475.4 kN
1.60 92.4
1.70 85.2
Dead weight
1.80 78.7
4.63 kg/m
1.90 72.7
2.00 67.4
Buckling length
2.10 62.6
2.20 58.2
2.30 54.3
2.40 50.7
2.50 47.4
2.60 44.4
2.70 41.6
2.80 39.1 Lk = L 0.7L 0.5L 2L
3.00 34.7

Load-bearing capacity in kN/m - IL 200 - B
One span
L (m) = 2.00 2.25 2.50 2.75 3.00 3.25 3.50 3.75 4.00 4.25 4.50 4.75 5.00 5.25 5.50 5.75 6.00
Breaking point
x direction 18.27 16.24 14.62 12.92 10.85 9.25 7.97 6.95 6.11 5.41 4.82 4.33 3.91 3.54 3.23 2.95 2.71
y direction 3.74 2.96 2.39 1.98 1.66 1.42 1.22 1.06 0.94 0.83 0.74 0.66 0.60 0.54 0.49 0.45 0.42
y direction 1.75 1.24 0.91 0.68 0.53 0.41 0.33 0.27 0.22 0.19 0.16 0.13 0.11 0.10 0.09 0.08 0.07
y direction 1.17 0.83 0.61 0.46 0.35 0.28 0.22 0.18 0.15 0.12 0.10 0.09 0.08 0.07 0.06 0.05 0.04
y direction 0.88 0.62 0.45 0.34 0.26 0.21 0.17 0.14 0.11 0.09 0.08 0.07 0.06 0.05 0.04 0.04 0.03
Two spans
L (m) = 2.00 2.25 2.50 2.75 3.00 3.25 3.50 3.75 4.00 4.25 4.50 4.75 5.00 5.25 5.50 5.75 6.00
Breaking point
x direction 14.62 12.99 11.69 10.63 9.74 8.99 7.97 6.95 6.11 5.41 4.82 4.33 3.91 3.54 3.23 2.95 2.71
y direction 3.74 2.96 2.39 1.98 1.66 1.42 1.22 1.06 0.94 0.83 0.74 0.66 0.60 0.54 0.49 0.45 0.42
y direction 4.08 2.90 2.13 1.61 1.25 0.98 0.79 0.64 0.53 0.44 0.37 0.32 0.27 0.24 0.21 0.18 0.16
y direction 2.72 1.93 1.42 1.07 0.83 0.66 0.53 0.43 0.35 0.30 0.25 0.21 0.18 0.16 0.14 0.12 0.11
y direction 2.04 1.45 1.07 0.81 0.62 0.49 0.40 0.32 0.27 0.22 0.19 0.16 0.14 0.12 0.10 0.09 0.08
Three spans
L (m) = 2.00 2.25 2.50 2.75 3.00 3.25 3.50 3.75 4.00 4.25 4.50 4.75 5.00 5.25 5.50 5.75 6.00
Breaking point
x direction 15.22 13.53 12.18 11.07 10.15 9.37 8.70 8.12 7.61 6.76 6.03 5.41 4.88 4.43 4.04 3.69 3.39
y direction 4.68 3.69 2.99 2.47 2.08 1.77 1.53 1.33 1.17 1.04 0.92 0.83 0.75 0.68 0.62 0.57 0.52
y direction 3.25 2.31 1.69 1.28 0.99 0.78 0.63 0.51 0.42 0.35 0.30 0.25 0.22 0.19 0.16 0.14 0.13
y direction 2.17 1.54 1.13 0.85 0.66 0.52 0.42 0.34 0.28 0.23 0.20 0.17 0.14 0.12 0.11 0.09 0.08
y direction 1.63 1.15 0.85 0.64 0.49 0.39 0.31 0.25 0.21 0.18 0.15 0.13 0.11 0.09 0.08 0.07 0.06


Lk in m in kN
2.00 247.4
2.25 239.6
2.50 231.5
2.75 223.1
3.00 214.7
3.25 206.1
3.50 197.6
3.75 189.3
4.00 181.1
4.25 173.1
4.50 165.4
4.75 157.9
5.00 150.8
5.25 143.9
5.50 137.4
5.75 131.1
6.00 125.2 Geometry
6.25 119.5 H 240 mm
B 120 mm
6.50 114.2
T1 10 mm
6.75 109.1
7.00 104.2 T2 7 mm
7.25 99.7 R 10 mm
7.50 95.4
8.00 87.4 A 4 026 mm2
Ixx 38 135 220 mm4
0.50 252.8
0.70 230.1 E0° 28 000 MPa
0.80 217.8 fc, 0° 240 MPa
0.90 205.4
1.10 181.2 γm,E 1.3
1.20 169.7 γm,f 1,3
1.30 158.7
1.50 138.6 743.2 kN
1.60 129.6
1.70 121.1
Dead weight
1.80 113.3
7.25 kg/m
1.90 106.1
2.00 99.4
Buckling length
2.10 93.2
2.20 87.5
2.30 82.2
2.40 77.3
2.50 72.8
2.60 68.7
2.70 64.8
Lk = L 0.7L 0.5L 2L
2.80 61.3
3.00 54.9

Load-bearing capacity in kN/m - IL 240 x 120 x 10/7- B
One span
L (m) = 2.00 2.25 2.50 2.75 3.00 3.25 3.50 3.75 4.00 4.25 4.50 4.75 5.00 5.25 5.50 5.75 6.00
Breaking point
x direction 30.69 27.28 24.55 22.32 19.77 16.85 14.53 12.66 11.12 9.85 8.79 7.89 7.12 6.46 5.88 5.38 4.94
y direction 6.74 5.33 4.31 3.56 3.00 2.55 2.20 1.92 1.68 1.49 1.33 1.19 1.08 0.98 0.89 0.82 0.75
y direction 3.76 2.66 1.95 1.47 1.13 0.89 0.72 0.58 0.48 0.40 0.34 0.29 0.25 0.21 0.19 0.16 0.14
y direction 2.50 1.78 1.30 0.98 0.76 0.60 0.48 0.39 0.32 0.27 0.23 0.19 0.17 0.14 0.12 0.11 0.10
y direction 1.88 1.33 0.98 0.74 0.57 0.45 0.36 0.29 0.24 0.20 0.17 0.14 0.12 0.11 0.09 0.08 0.07
Two spans
L (m) = 2.00 2.25 2.50 2.75 3.00 3.25 3.50 3.75 4.00 4.25 4.50 4.75 5.00 5.25 5.50 5.75 6.00
Breaking point
x direction 24.55 21.83 19.64 17.86 16.37 15.11 14.03 12.66 11.12 9.85 8.79 7.89 7.12 6.46 5.88 5.38 4.94
y direction 6.74 5.33 4.31 3.56 3.00 2.55 2.20 1.92 1.68 1.49 1.33 1.19 1.08 0.98 0.89 0.82 0.75
y direction 8.63 6.16 4.54 3.44 2.67 2.11 1.70 1.38 1.14 0.95 0.81 0.69 0.59 0.51 0.44 0.39 0.34
y direction 5.75 4.10 3.03 2.29 1.78 1.41 1.13 0.92 0.76 0.64 0.54 0.46 0.39 0.34 0.30 0.26 0.23
y direction 4.31 3.08 2.27 1.72 1.33 1.05 0.85 0.69 0.57 0.48 0.40 0.34 0.29 0.25 0.22 0.19 0.17
Three spans
L (m) = 2.00 2.25 2.50 2.75 3.00 3.25 3.50 3.75 4.00 4.25 4.50 4.75 5.00 5.25 5.50 5.75 6.00
Breaking point
x direction 25.58 22.74 20.46 18.60 17.05 15.74 14.62 13.64 12.79 12.04 10.99 9.86 8.90 8.07 7.35 6.73 6.18
y direction 8.42 6.66 5.39 4.46 3.74 3.19 2.75 2.40 2.11 1.87 1.66 1.49 1.35 1.22 1.11 1.02 0.94
y direction 6.91 4.91 3.61 2.73 2.12 1.67 1.34 1.09 0.90 0.75 0.64 0.54 0.47 0.40 0.35 0.31 0.27
y direction 4.60 3.27 2.41 1.82 1.41 1.11 0.90 0.73 0.60 0.50 0.42 0.36 0.31 0.27 0.23 0.20 0.18
y direction 3.45 2.46 1.81 1.37 1.06 0.84 0.67 0.55 0.45 0.38 0.32 0.27 0.23 0.20 0.18 0.15 0.14


Lk in m in kN
2.00 382.4
2.25 374.5
2.50 366.1
2.75 357.2
3.00 348.0
3.25 338.5
3.50 328.7
3.75 318.9
4.00 309.0
4.25 299.2
4.50 289.4
4.75 279.7
5.00 270.2
5.25 260.8
5.50 251.7
5.75 242.8
6.00 234.2 Geometry
6.25 225.8 H 300 mm
B 150 mm
6.50 217.7
T1 12 mm
6.75 209.9
7.00 202.3 T2 8 mm
7.25 195.1 R 12 mm
7.50 188.1
8.00 174.9 A 5 932 mm2
Ixx 90 973 293 mm4
0.50 387.3
0.70 363.8 E0° 28 000 MPa
0.80 350.5 fc, 0° 240 MPa
0.90 336.5
1.10 307.7 γm,E 1.3
1.20 293.3 γm,f 1.3
1.30 279.1
1.50 251.7 1095.1 kN
1.60 238.8
1.70 226.4
Dead weight
1.80 214.6
10.68 kg/m
1.90 203.4
2.00 192.7
Buckling length
2.10 182.7
2.20 173.2
2.30 164.3
2.40 156.0
2.50 148.1
2.60 140.7
2.70 133.8
Lk = L 0.7L 0.5L 2L
2.80 127.3
3.00 115.4

One span
L (m) = 3.00 3.25 3.50 3.75 4.00 4.25 4.50 4.75 5.00 5.25 5.50 5.75 6.00 6.25 6.50 6.75 7.00
Breaking point
x direction 29.23 26.98 25.05 23.38 21.23 18.80 16.77 15.05 13.59 12.32 11.23 10.27 9.43 8.69 8.04 7.45 6.93
y direction 5.61 4.78 4.13 3.59 3.16 2.80 2.50 2.24 2.02 1.83 1.67 1.53 1.40 1.29 1.20 1.11 1.03
y direction 2.63 2.08 1.67 1.36 1.12 0.94 0.79 0.67 0.58 0.50 0.43 0.38 0.33 0.30 0.26 0.24 0.21
y direction 1.76 1.39 1.12 0.91 0.75 0.63 0.53 0.45 0.39 0.33 0.29 0.25 0.22 0.20 0.18 0.16 0.14
y direction 1.32 1.04 0.84 0.68 0.56 0.47 0.40 0.34 0.29 0.25 0.22 0.19 0.17 0.15 0.13 0.12 0.11
Two spans
L (m) = 3.00 3.25 3.50 3.75 4.00 4.25 4.50 4.75 5.00 5.25 5.50 5.75 6.00 6.25 6.50 6.75 7.00
Breaking point
x direction 23.38 21.59 20.04 18.71 17.54 16.51 15.59 14.77 13.59 12.32 11.23 10.27 9.43 8.69 8.04 7.45 6.93
y direction 5.61 4.78 4.13 3.59 3.16 2.80 2.50 2.24 2.02 1.83 1.67 1.53 1.40 1.29 1.20 1.11 1.03
y direction 6.13 4.86 3.92 3.20 2.65 2.22 1.87 1.60 1.37 1.19 1.03 0.91 0.80 0.71 0.63 0.56 0.50
y direction 4.09 3.24 2.61 2.13 1.77 1.48 1.25 1.06 0.91 0.79 0.69 0.60 0.53 0.47 0.42 0.37 0.34
y direction 3.07 2.43 1.96 1.60 1.32 1.11 0.94 0.80 0.69 0.59 0.52 0.45 0.40 0.35 0.31 0.28 0.25
Three spans
L (m) = 3.00 3.25 3.50 3.75 4.00 4.25 4.50 4.75 5.00 5.25 5.50 5.75 6.00 6.25 6.50 6.75 7.00
Breaking point
x direction 24.36 22.49 20.88 19.49 18.27 17.19 16.24 15.38 14.62 13.92 13.29 12.71 11.79 10.87 10.05 9.32 8.66
y direction 7.02 5.98 5.16 4.49 3.95 3.50 3.12 2.80 2.53 2.29 2.09 1.91 1.75 1.62 1.50 1.39 1.29
y direction 4.88 3.87 3.11 2.54 2.10 1.76 1.48 1.26 1.08 0.94 0.82 0.72 0.63 0.56 0.50 0.44 0.40
y direction 3.26 2.58 2.07 1.69 1.40 1.17 0.99 0.84 0.72 0.63 0.54 0.48 0.42 0.37 0.33 0.30 0.27
y direction 2.44 1.93 1.56 1.27 1.05 0.88 0.74 0.63 0.54 0.47 0.41 0.36 0.32 0.28 0.25 0.22 0.20


Lk in m in kN
2.00 580.3
2.25 570.0
2.50 558.9
2.75 547.2
3.00 534.9
3.25 522.1
3.50 509.0
3.75 495.6
4.00 482.1
4.25 468.4
4.50 454.8
4.75 441.2
5.00 427.8
5.25 414.5
5.50 401.4
5.75 388.6
6.00 376.0 Geometry
6.25 363.8 H 360 mm
B 180 mm
6.50 351.8
T1 15 mm
6.75 340.2
7.00 329.0 T2 10 mm
7.25 318.1 R 15 mm
7.50 307.5
8.00 287.5 A 8 893 mm2
Ixx 195 780 926 mm4
Design value for compressive Wxx 1 087 672 mm3
0.50 586.8
0.70 556.1 E0° 28 000 MPa
0.80 538.5 fc, 0° 240 MPa
0.90 519.9
1.10 480.7 γm,E 1.3
1.20 460.8 γm,f 1.3
1.30 440.9
1.50 402.0 1641.8 kN
1.60 383.3
1.70 365.2
Dead weight
1.80 347.8
16.01 kg/m
1.90 331.1
2.00 315.2
Buckling length
2.10 300.0
2.20 285.6
2.30 271.9
2.40 258.9
2.50 246.7
2.60 235.1
2.70 224.1
Lk = L 0.7L 0.5L 2L
2.80 213.8
3.00 194.9

One span
L (m) = 3.50 3.75 4.00 4.25 4.50 4.75 5.00 5.25 5.50 5.75 6.00 6.25 6.50 6.75 7.00 7.25 7.50
Breaking point
x direction 37.58 35.08 32.88 30.95 29.23 27.00 24.36 22.10 20.14 18.42 16.92 15.59 14.42 13.37 12.43 11.59 10.83
y direction 7.43 6.47 5.69 5.04 4.49 4.03 3.64 3.30 3.01 2.75 2.53 2.33 2.15 2.00 1.86 1.73 1.62
y direction 3.58 2.92 2.41 2.01 1.70 1.45 1.24 1.07 0.94 0.82 0.72 0.64 0.57 0.51 0.46 0.41 0.37
y direction 2.39 1.95 1.61 1.35 1.14 0.97 0.83 0.72 0.63 0.55 0.48 0.43 0.38 0.34 0.30 0.27 0.25
y direction 1.79 1.46 1.21 1.01 0.85 0.73 0.62 0.54 0.47 0.41 0.36 0.32 0.29 0.25 0.23 0.21 0.19
Two spans
L (m) = 3.50 3.75 4.00 4.25 4.50 4.75 5.00 5.25 5.50 5.75 6.00 6.25 6.50 6.75 7.00 7.25 7.50
Breaking point
x direction 30.07 28.06 26.31 24.76 23.38 22.15 21.05 20.04 19.13 18.30 16.92 15.59 14.42 13.37 12.43 11.59 10.83
y direction 7.43 6.47 5.69 5.04 4.49 4.03 3.64 3.30 3.01 2.75 2.53 2.33 2.15 2.00 1.86 1.73 1.62
y direction 8.31 6.81 5.64 4.73 4.00 3.41 2.94 2.54 2.22 1.94 1.71 1.52 1.35 1.21 1.09 0.98 0.88
y direction 5.54 4.54 3.76 3.15 2.67 2.28 1.96 1.70 1.48 1.30 1.14 1.01 0.90 0.81 0.72 0.65 0.59
y direction 4.16 3.40 2.82 2.36 2.00 1.71 1.47 1.27 1.11 0.97 0.86 0.76 0.68 0.60 0.54 0.49 0.44
Three spans
L (m) = 3.50 3.75 4.00 4.25 4.50 4.75 5.00 5.25 5.50 5.75 6.00 6.25 6.50 6.75 7.00 7.25 7.50
Breaking point
x direction 31.32 29.23 27.40 25.79 24.36 23.08 21.92 20.88 19.93 19.06 18.27 17.54 16.86 16.24 15.54 14.49 13.54
y direction 9.28 8.09 7.11 6.30 5.62 5.04 4.55 4.13 3.76 3.44 3.16 2.91 2.69 2.50 2.32 2.16 2.02
y direction 6.63 5.42 4.49 3.76 3.18 2.71 2.33 2.01 1.76 1.54 1.36 1.20 1.07 0.96 0.86 0.77 0.70
y direction 4.42 3.61 2.99 2.50 2.12 1.81 1.55 1.34 1.17 1.03 0.90 0.80 0.71 0.64 0.57 0.51 0.47
y direction 3.31 2.71 2.24 1.88 1.59 1.35 1.16 1.01 0.88 0.77 0.68 0.60 0.53 0.48 0.43 0.39 0.35

Axial load-bearing capacity in kN - U 120 x 36 x 6 - A

Lk in m in kN
2.00 63.3
2.25 53.5
2.50 45.6
2.75 39.2
3.00 34.0
3.25 29.7
3.50 26.1
3.75 23.1
4.00 20.6
4.25 18.5
4.50 16.6
4.75 15.1
5.00 13.7
5.25 12.5
5.50 11.4
5.75 10.5 Geometry
6.00 9.7 H 120 mm
B 36 mm
6.25 9.0
T1 6 mm
6.50 8.3
6.75 7.7 T2 6 mm
7.00 7.2 R 7,5 mm
7.25 6.7
7.75 5.9 A 1 104 mm2
8.00 5.6 Ixx 2 100 868 mm4
Wxx 35 014 mm3
Design value for compressive Ak,y 648 mm2
Iyy
Wyy
Buckling length Load-bearing capacity Ak,x 367 mm2
Lk in m in kN e 9.0 mm
0.50 2.7
0.70 1.4 E0° 23 000 MPa
0.80 1.1 fc, 0° 240 MPa
0.90 0.8
1.10 0.6 λm,E 1.3
1.20 0.5
λm,f 1.3
1.30 0.4
1.40 0.4
1.50 0.3
203.8 kN
1.60 0.3
1.70 0.2
1.80 0.2
Dead weight
1.90 0.2 1.99 kg/m
2.00 0.2
2.20 0.1
2.30 0.1
2.40 0.1
2.50 0.1
2.60 0.1
2.70 0.1
2.80 0.1 Lk = L 0.7L 0.5L 2L
3.00 0.1

Load-bearing capacity in kN/m - U 120 x 36 x 6 - B
One span
L (m) = 2.00 2.25 2.50 2.75 3.00 3.25 3.50 3.75 4.00 4.25 4.50 4.75 5.00 5.25 5.50 5.75 6.00
Breaking point
x direction 12.46 10.22 8.27 6.84 5.75 4.90 4.22 3.68 3.23 2.86 2.55 2.29 2.07 1.88 1.71 1.56 1.44
y direction 1.46 1.16 0.94 0.77 0.65 0.55 0.48 0.42 0.37 0.32 0.29 0.26 0.23 0.21 0.19 0.18 0.16
y direction 0.12 0.08 0.06 0.05 0.03 0.03 0.02 0.02 0.01 0.01 0.01 0.01 0.01 0.01 0.01 0.00 0.00
y direction 0.08 0.06 0.04 0.03 0.02 0.02 0.01 0.01 0.01 0.01 0.01 0.01 0.01 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00
y direction 0.06 0.04 0.03 0.02 0.02 0.01 0.01 0.01 0.01 0.01 0.01 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00
Two spans
L (m) = 2.00 2.25 2.50 2.75 3.00 3.25 3.50 3.75 4.00 4.25 4.50 4.75 5.00 5.25 5.50 5.75 6.00
Breaking point
x direction 9.97 8.86 7.98 6.84 5.75 4.90 4.22 3.68 3.23 2.86 2.55 2.29 2.07 1.88 1.71 1.56 1.44
y direction 1.46 1.16 0.94 0.77 0.65 0.55 0.48 0.42 0.37 0.32 0.29 0.26 0.23 0.21 0.19 0.18 0.16
y direction 0.28 0.20 0.14 0.11 0.08 0.07 0.05 0.04 0.04 0.03 0.02 0.02 0.02 0.02 0.01 0.01 0.01
y direction 0.19 0.13 0.10 0.07 0.06 0.04 0.04 0.03 0.02 0.02 0.02 0.01 0.01 0.01 0.01 0.01 0.01
y direction 0.14 0.10 0.07 0.05 0.04 0.03 0.03 0.02 0.02 0.01 0.01 0.01 0.01 0.01 0.01 0.01 0.01
Three spans
L (m) = 2.00 2.25 2.50 2.75 3.00 3.25 3.50 3.75 4.00 4.25 4.50 4.75 5.00 5.25 5.50 5.75 6.00
Breaking point
x direction 10.38 9.23 8.31 7.55 6.92 6.12 5.28 4.60 4.04 3.58 3.19 2.87 2.59 2.35 2.14 1.96 1.80
y direction 1.83 1.44 1.17 0.97 0.81 0.69 0.60 0.52 0.46 0.40 0.36 0.32 0.29 0.27 0.24 0.22 0.20
y direction 0.22 0.16 0.11 0.09 0.07 0.05 0.04 0.03 0.03 0.02 0.02 0.02 0.01 0.01 0.01 0.01 0.01
y direction 0.15 0.10 0.08 0.06 0.04 0.03 0.03 0.02 0.02 0.02 0.01 0.01 0.01 0.01 0.01 0.01 0.01
y direction 0.11 0.08 0.06 0.04 0.03 0.03 0.02 0.02 0.01 0.01 0.01 0.01 0.01 0.01 0.01 0.00 0.00


Lk in m in kN
2.00 77.5
2.25 65.7
2.50 56.2
2.75 48.5
3.00 42.1
3.25 36.9
3.50 32.5
3.75 28.8
4.00 25.7
4.25 23.1
4.50 20.8
4.75 18.8
5.00 17.1
5.25 15.7
5.50 14.3
5.75 13.2
6.00 12.2 Geometry
6.25 11.3 H 120 mm
B 50 mm
6.50 10.5
T1 6 mm
6.75 9.7
7.00 9.1 T2 6 mm
7.25 8.5 R 7,5 mm
7.50 7.9
8.00 7.0 A 1 272 mm2
Ixx 2 647 204 mm4
0.50 106.4 e 13.5 mm
0.60 85.8
0.80 57.4 E0° 23 000 MPa
0.90 47.8 fc, 0° 240 MPa
1.00 40.3
1.20 29.5 γm,E 1.3
1.30 25.6 γm,f 1.3
1.40 22.4
1.60 17.6
234.9 kN
1.70 15.7
1.80 14.1
Dead weight
1.90 12.7
2.29 kg/m
2.00 11.6
2.10 10.5
Buckling length
2.20 9.6
2.30 8.8
2.40 8.2
2.50 7.5
2.60 7.0
2.70 6.5
2.80 6.0
Lk = L 0.7L 0.5L 2L
3.00 5.3

One span
L (m) = 2.00 2.25 2.50 2.75 3.00 3.25 3.50 3.75 4.00 4.25 4.50 4.75 5.00 5.25 5.50 5.75 6.00
Breaking point
x direction 12.46 11.08 9.97 8.62 7.24 6.17 5.32 4.63 4.07 3.61 3.22 2.89 2.61 2.36 2.15 1.97 1.81
y direction 2.82 2.22 1.80 1.49 1.25 1.07 0.92 0.80 0.70 0.62 0.56 0.50 0.45 0.41 0.37 0.34 0.31
y direction 0.30 0.21 0.16 0.12 0.09 0.07 0.06 0.05 0.04 0.03 0.03 0.02 0.02 0.02 0.01 0.01 0.01
y direction 0.20 0.14 0.10 0.08 0.06 0.05 0.04 0.03 0.03 0.02 0.02 0.02 0.01 0.01 0.01 0.01 0.01
y direction 0.15 0.11 0.08 0.06 0.05 0.04 0.03 0.02 0.02 0.02 0.01 0.01 0.01 0.01 0.01 0.01 0.01
Two spans
L (m) = 2.00 2.25 2.50 2.75 3.00 3.25 3.50 3.75 4.00 4.25 4.50 4.75 5.00 5.25 5.50 5.75 6.00
Breaking point
x direction 9.97 8.86 7.98 7.25 6.65 6.13 5.32 4.63 4.07 3.61 3.22 2.89 2.61 2.36 2.15 1.97 1.81
y direction 2.82 2.22 1.80 1.49 1.25 1.07 0.92 0.80 0.70 0.62 0.56 0.50 0.45 0.41 0.37 0.34 0.31
y direction 0.72 0.51 0.37 0.28 0.22 0.17 0.14 0.11 0.09 0.08 0.06 0.05 0.05 0.04 0.04 0.03 0.03
y direction 0.48 0.34 0.25 0.19 0.14 0.11 0.09 0.07 0.06 0.05 0.04 0.04 0.03 0.03 0.02 0.02 0.02
y direction 0.36 0.25 0.19 0.14 0.11 0.09 0.07 0.06 0.05 0.04 0.03 0.03 0.02 0.02 0.02 0.02 0.01
Three spans
L (m) = 2.00 2.25 2.50 2.75 3.00 3.25 3.50 3.75 4.00 4.25 4.50 4.75 5.00 5.25 5.50 5.75 6.00
Breaking point
x direction 10.38 9.23 8.31 7.55 6.92 6.39 5.93 5.54 5.09 4.51 4.02 3.61 3.26 2.96 2.69 2.46 2.26
y direction 3.52 2.78 2.25 1.86 1.56 1.33 1.15 1.00 0.88 0.78 0.70 0.62 0.56 0.51 0.47 0.43 0.39
y direction 0.57 0.40 0.29 0.22 0.17 0.13 0.11 0.09 0.07 0.06 0.05 0.04 0.04 0.03 0.03 0.02 0.02
y direction 0.38 0.27 0.20 0.15 0.11 0.09 0.07 0.06 0.05 0.04 0.03 0.03 0.02 0.02 0.02 0.02 0.01
y direction 0.29 0.20 0.15 0.11 0.09 0.07 0.05 0.04 0.04 0.03 0.03 0.02 0.02 0.02 0.01 0.01 0.01


Lk in m in kN
2.00 75.0
2.25 64.4
2.50 55.6
2.75 48.4
3.00 42.3
3.25 37.3
3.50 33.0
3.75 29.4
4.00 26.3
4.25 23.7
4.50 21.4
4.75 19.4
5.00 17.7
5.25 16.2
5.50 14.8
5.75 13.7
6.00 12.6 Geometry
6.25 11.7 H 140 mm
B 40 mm
6.50 10.9
T1 5 mm
6.75 10.1
7.00 9.4 T2 5 mm
7.25 8.8 R 5 mm
7.50 8.3
8.00 7.3 A 1 061 mm2
Ixx 2 782 550 mm4
0.50 62.2 e 9.1 mm
0.60 47.9
0.80 30.2 E0° 23 000 MPa
0.90 24.6 fc, 0° 240 MPa
1.00 20.4
1.20 14.7 γm,E 1.3
1.30 12.6 γm,f 1.3
1.40 11.0
1.60 8.5 195.8 kN
1.70 7.6
1.80 6.8
Dead weight
1.90 6.1
1.91 kg/m
2.00 5.5
2.10 5.0
Buckling length
2.20 4.6
2.30 4.2
2.40 3.9
2.50 3.6
2.60 3.3
2.70 3.1
2.80 2.9
Lk = L 0.7L 0.5L 2L
3.00 2.5

One span
L (m) = 2.00 2.25 2.50 2.75 3.00 3.25 3.50 3.75 4.00 4.25 4.50 4.75 5.00 5.25 5.50 5.75 6.00
Breaking point
x direction 12.12 10.77 9.39 7.76 6.52 5.56 4.79 4.17 3.67 3.25 2.90 2.60 2.35 2.13 1.94 1.78 1.63
y direction 1.56 1.23 1.00 0.83 0.69 0.59 0.51 0.44 0.39 0.35 0.31 0.28 0.25 0.23 0.21 0.19 0.17
y direction 0.14 0.10 0.07 0.06 0.04 0.03 0.03 0.02 0.02 0.02 0.01 0.01 0.01 0.01 0.01 0.01 0.01
y direction 0.10 0.07 0.05 0.04 0.03 0.02 0.02 0.01 0.01 0.01 0.01 0.01 0.01 0.01 0.00 0.00 0.00
y direction 0.07 0.05 0.04 0.03 0.02 0.02 0.01 0.01 0.01 0.01 0.01 0.01 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00
Two spans
L (m) = 2.00 2.25 2.50 2.75 3.00 3.25 3.50 3.75 4.00 4.25 4.50 4.75 5.00 5.25 5.50 5.75 6.00
Breaking point
x direction 9.69 8.62 7.75 7.05 6.46 5.56 4.79 4.17 3.67 3.25 2.90 2.60 2.35 2.13 1.94 1.78 1.63
y direction 1.56 1.23 1.00 0.83 0.69 0.59 0.51 0.44 0.39 0.35 0.31 0.28 0.25 0.23 0.21 0.19 0.17
y direction 0.34 0.24 0.18 0.13 0.10 0.08 0.06 0.05 0.04 0.04 0.03 0.03 0.02 0.02 0.02 0.01 0.01
y direction 0.23 0.16 0.12 0.09 0.07 0.05 0.04 0.03 0.03 0.02 0.02 0.02 0.01 0.01 0.01 0.01 0.01
y direction 0.17 0.12 0.09 0.07 0.05 0.04 0.03 0.03 0.02 0.02 0.02 0.01 0.01 0.01 0.01 0.01 0.01
Three spans
L (m) = 2.00 2.25 2.50 2.75 3.00 3.25 3.50 3.75 4.00 4.25 4.50 4.75 5.00 5.25 5.50 5.75 6.00
Breaking point
x direction 10.10 8.97 8.08 7.34 6.73 6.21 5.77 5.22 4.59 4.06 3.62 3.25 2.94 2.66 2.43 2.22 2.04
y direction 1.95 1.54 1.25 1.03 0.87 0.74 0.64 0.56 0.49 0.43 0.39 0.35 0.31 0.28 0.26 0.24 0.22
y direction 0.27 0.19 0.14 0.10 0.08 0.06 0.05 0.04 0.03 0.03 0.02 0.02 0.02 0.02 0.01 0.01 0.01
y direction 0.18 0.13 0.09 0.07 0.05 0.04 0.03 0.03 0.02 0.02 0.02 0.01 0.01 0.01 0.01 0.01 0.01
y direction 0.13 0.09 0.07 0.05 0.04 0.03 0.03 0.02 0.02 0.01 0.01 0.01 0.01 0.01 0.01 0.01 0.01


Lk in m in kN
2.00 177.1
2.25 156.0
2.50 137.8
2.75 122.0
3.00 108.4
3.25 96.6
3.50 86.5
3.75 77.8
4.00 70.2
4.25 63.6
4.50 57.8
4.75 52.8
5.00 48.3
5.25 44.4
5.50 40.9
5.75 37.8
6.00 35.0 Geometry
6.25 32.5 H 160 mm
B 48 mm
6.50 30.3
T1 8 mm
6.75 28.2
7.00 26.4 T2 8 mm
7.25 24.7 R 8 mm
7.50 23.2
8.00 20.6 A 1 947 mm2
Ixx 6 566 201 mm4
0.50 159.8 e 12.0 mm
0.60 128.4
0.80 85.6 E0° 28 000 MPa
0.90 71.2 fc, 0° 240 MPa
1.00 59.9
1.20 43.8 γm,E 1.3
1.30 38.0 γm,f 1.3
1.40 33.3
1.60 26.0
359.5 kN
1.70 23.3
1.80 20.9
Dead weight
1.90 18.9
3.505 kg/m
2.00 17.1
2.10 15.6
Buckling length
2.20 14.3
2.30 13.1
2.40 12.1
2.50 11.1
2.60 10.3
2.70 9.6
2.80 8.9
3.00 7.8 Lk = L 0.7L 0.5L 2L

One span
L (m) = 2.00 2.25 2.50 2.75 3.00 3.25 3.50 3.75 4.00 4.25 4.50 4.75 5.00 5.25 5.50 5.75 6.00
Breaking point
x direction 22.15 19.69 17.72 16.03 13.47 11.48 9.90 8.62 7.58 6.71 5.99 5.37 4.85 4.40 4.01 3.67 3.37
y direction 3.46 2.74 2.22 1.83 1.54 1.31 1.13 0.99 0.87 0.77 0.68 0.61 0.55 0.50 0.46 0.42 0.38
y direction 0.45 0.32 0.23 0.17 0.13 0.11 0.08 0.07 0.06 0.05 0.04 0.03 0.03 0.03 0.02 0.02 0.02
y direction 0.30 0.21 0.15 0.12 0.09 0.07 0.06 0.05 0.04 0.03 0.03 0.02 0.02 0.02 0.01 0.01 0.01
y direction 0.22 0.16 0.12 0.09 0.07 0.05 0.04 0.03 0.03 0.02 0.02 0.02 0.01 0.01 0.01 0.01 0.01
Two spans
L (m) = 2.00 2.25 2.50 2.75 3.00 3.25 3.50 3.75 4.00 4.25 4.50 4.75 5.00 5.25 5.50 5.75 6.00
Breaking point
x direction 17.72 15.75 14.18 12.89 11.82 10.91 9.90 8.62 7.58 6.71 5.99 5.37 4.85 4.40 4.01 3.67 3.37
y direction 3.46 2.74 2.22 1.83 1.54 1.31 1.13 0.99 0.87 0.77 0.68 0.61 0.55 0.50 0.46 0.42 0.38
y direction 1.06 0.75 0.55 0.41 0.32 0.25 0.20 0.16 0.14 0.11 0.10 0.08 0.07 0.06 0.05 0.05 0.04
y direction 0.71 0.50 0.37 0.28 0.21 0.17 0.13 0.11 0.09 0.08 0.06 0.05 0.05 0.04 0.03 0.03 0.03
y direction 0.53 0.38 0.27 0.21 0.16 0.13 0.10 0.08 0.07 0.06 0.05 0.04 0.03 0.03 0.03 0.02 0.02
Three spans
L (m) = 2.00 2.25 2.50 2.75 3.00 3.25 3.50 3.75 4.00 4.25 4.50 4.75 5.00 5.25 5.50 5.75 6.00
Breaking point
x direction 18.46 16.41 14.77 13.43 12.31 11.36 10.55 9.85 9.23 8.39 7.48 6.72 6.06 5.50 5.01 4.58 4.21
y direction 4.33 3.42 2.77 2.29 1.92 1.64 1.41 1.23 1.08 0.96 0.86 0.77 0.69 0.63 0.57 0.52 0.48
y direction 0.84 0.59 0.43 0.33 0.25 0.20 0.16 0.13 0.11 0.09 0.08 0.06 0.05 0.05 0.04 0.04 0.03
y direction 0.56 0.40 0.29 0.22 0.17 0.13 0.11 0.09 0.07 0.06 0.05 0.04 0.04 0.03 0.03 0.02 0.02
y direction 0.42 0.30 0.22 0.16 0.13 0.10 0.08 0.06 0.05 0.04 0.04 0.03 0.03 0.02 0.02 0.02 0.02


Lk in m in kN
2.00 338.5
2.25 306.2
2.50 276.7
2.75 250.0
3.00 226.2
3.25 204.9
3.50 186.1
3.75 169.3
4.00 154.4
4.25 141.2
4.50 129.5
4.75 119.0
5.00 109.7
5.25 101.3
5.50 93.8
5.75 87.1
6.00 81.0 Geometry
6.25 75.5 H 200 mm
B 60 mm
6.50 70.5
T1 10 mm
6.75 66.0
7.00 61.9 T2 10 mm
7.25 58.1 R 10 mm
7.50 54.7
8.00 48.6 A 3 043 mm2
Ixx 16 030 763 mm4
0.50 312.0 e 15.0 mm
0.60 261.0
0.80 184.3 E0° 28 000 MPa
0.90 156.3 fc, 0° 240 MPa
1.00 133.7
1.20 100.1 γm,E 1.3
1.30 87.6 γm,f 1.3
1.40 77.2
1.60 61.1 561.8 kN
1.70 54.8
1.80 49.4
Dead weight
1.90 44.7
5.447 kg/m
2.00 40.7
2.10 37.2
Buckling length
2.20 34.1
2.30 31.3
2.40 28.9
2.50 26.7
2.60 24.8
2.70 23.1
2.80 21.5
Lk = L 0.7L 0.5L 2L
3.00 18.8

One span
L (m) = 2.00 2.25 2.50 2.75 3.00 3.25 3.50 3.75 4.00 4.25 4.50 4.75 5.00 5.25 5.50 5.75 6.00
Breaking point
x direction 34.62 30.77 27.69 25.17 23.08 21.30 19.33 16.84 14.80 13.11 11.69 10.49 9.47 8.59 7.83 7.16 6.58
y direction 6.77 5.35 4.33 3.58 3.01 2.56 2.21 1.92 1.69 1.50 1.34 1.20 1.08 0.98 0.89 0.82 0.75
y direction 1.09 0.77 0.56 0.42 0.33 0.26 0.21 0.17 0.14 0.12 0.10 0.08 0.07 0.06 0.05 0.05 0.04
y direction 0.73 0.51 0.38 0.28 0.22 0.17 0.14 0.11 0.09 0.08 0.06 0.06 0.05 0.04 0.04 0.03 0.03
y direction 0.54 0.38 0.28 0.21 0.16 0.13 0.10 0.08 0.07 0.06 0.05 0.04 0.04 0.03 0.03 0.02 0.02
Two spans
L (m) = 2.00 2.25 2.50 2.75 3.00 3.25 3.50 3.75 4.00 4.25 4.50 4.75 5.00 5.25 5.50 5.75 6.00
Breaking point
x direction 27.69 24.62 22.15 20.14 18.46 17.04 15.82 14.77 13.85 13.03 11.69 10.49 9.47 8.59 7.83 7.16 6.58
y direction 6.77 5.35 4.33 3.58 3.01 2.56 2.21 1.92 1.69 1.50 1.34 1.20 1.08 0.98 0.89 0.82 0.75
y direction 2.55 1.81 1.33 1.00 0.77 0.61 0.49 0.40 0.33 0.28 0.23 0.20 0.17 0.15 0.13 0.11 0.10
y direction 1.70 1.21 0.89 0.67 0.52 0.41 0.33 0.27 0.22 0.18 0.15 0.13 0.11 0.10 0.08 0.07 0.07
y direction 1.28 0.90 0.66 0.50 0.39 0.31 0.25 0.20 0.16 0.14 0.12 0.10 0.08 0.07 0.06 0.06 0.05
Three spans
L (m) = 2.00 2.25 2.50 2.75 3.00 3.25 3.50 3.75 4.00 4.25 4.50 4.75 5.00 5.25 5.50 5.75 6.00
Breaking point
x direction 28.85 25.64 23.08 20.98 19.23 17.75 16.48 15.38 14.42 13.57 12.82 12.15 11.54 10.74 9.78 8.95 8.22
y direction 8.46 6.68 5.41 4.47 3.76 3.20 2.76 2.41 2.11 1.87 1.67 1.50 1.35 1.23 1.12 1.02 0.94
y direction 2.03 1.44 1.05 0.79 0.61 0.48 0.39 0.32 0.26 0.22 0.18 0.16 0.13 0.12 0.10 0.09 0.08
y direction 1.35 0.96 0.70 0.53 0.41 0.32 0.26 0.21 0.17 0.14 0.12 0.10 0.09 0.08 0.07 0.06 0.05
y direction 1.02 0.72 0.53 0.40 0.31 0.24 0.19 0.16 0.13 0.11 0.09 0.08 0.07 0.06 0.05 0.04 0.04


Lk in m in kN
2.00 380.3
2.25 351.7
2.50 324.4
2.75 298.7
3.00 274.9
3.25 253.0
3.50 233.0
3.75 214.7
4.00 198.1
4.25 183.0
4.50 169.3
4.75 156.9
5.00 145.7
5.25 135.5
5.50 126.2
5.75 117.8
6.00 110.1 Geometry
6.25 103.1 H 240 mm
B 72 mm
6.50 96.7
T1 8 mm
6.75 90.8
7.00 85.5 T2 8 mm
7.25 80.5 R 8 mm
7.50 76.0
8.00 67.9 A 2 971 mm2
Ixx 23 334 131 mm4
0.50 359.5 e 16.5 mm
0.60 312.2
0.80 233.8 E0° 28 000 MPa
0.90 202.9 fc, 0° 240 MPa
1.00 176.7
1.20 136.1 γm,E 1.3
1.30 120.4 γm,f 1.3
1.40 107.1
1.60 85.9
548.6 kN
1.70 77.5
1.80 70.2
Dead weight
1.90 63.8
5.348 kg/m
2.00 58.3
2.10 53.4
Buckling length
2.20 49.1
2.30 45.2
2.40 41.8
2.50 38.8
2.60 36.0
2.70 33.6
2.80 31.4
3.00 27.5 Lk = L 0.7L 0.5L 2L

One span
L (m) = 2.00 2.25 2.50 2.75 3.00 3.25 3.50 3.75 4.00 4.25 4.50 4.75 5.00 5.25 5.50 5.75 6.00
Breaking point
x direction 33.23 29.54 26.58 24.17 22.15 20.45 18.99 17.72 16.62 15.64 14.18 12.73 11.49 10.42 9.49 8.69 7.98
y direction 8.15 6.44 5.22 4.31 3.62 3.09 2.66 2.32 2.04 1.81 1.61 1.45 1.30 1.18 1.08 0.99 0.91
y direction 1.60 1.13 0.83 0.62 0.48 0.38 0.30 0.25 0.20 0.17 0.14 0.12 0.11 0.09 0.08 0.07 0.06
y direction 1.07 0.76 0.55 0.42 0.32 0.25 0.20 0.17 0.14 0.11 0.10 0.08 0.07 0.06 0.05 0.05 0.04
y direction 0.80 0.57 0.42 0.31 0.24 0.19 0.15 0.12 0.10 0.09 0.07 0.06 0.05 0.05 0.04 0.03 0.03
Two spans
L (m) = 2.00 2.25 2.50 2.75 3.00 3.25 3.50 3.75 4.00 4.25 4.50 4.75 5.00 5.25 5.50 5.75 6.00
Breaking point
x direction 26.58 23.63 21.27 19.33 17.72 16.36 15.19 14.18 13.29 12.51 11.82 11.19 10.63 10.13 9.49 8.69 7.98
y direction 8.15 6.44 5.22 4.31 3.62 3.09 2.66 2.32 2.04 1.81 1.61 1.45 1.30 1.18 1.08 0.99 0.91
y direction 3.71 2.64 1.94 1.47 1.14 0.90 0.72 0.59 0.49 0.41 0.34 0.29 0.25 0.22 0.19 0.17 0.15
y direction 2.47 1.76 1.30 0.98 0.76 0.60 0.48 0.39 0.32 0.27 0.23 0.19 0.17 0.14 0.13 0.11 0.10
y direction 1.86 1.32 0.97 0.74 0.57 0.45 0.36 0.29 0.24 0.20 0.17 0.15 0.13 0.11 0.09 0.08 0.07
Three spans
L (m) = 2.00 2.25 2.50 2.75 3.00 3.25 3.50 3.75 4.00 4.25 4.50 4.75 5.00 5.25 5.50 5.75 6.00
Breaking point
x direction 27.69 24.62 22.15 20.14 18.46 17.04 15.82 14.77 13.85 13.03 12.31 11.66 11.08 10.55 10.07 9.63 9.23
y direction 10.19 8.05 6.52 5.39 4.53 3.86 3.33 2.90 2.55 2.26 2.01 1.81 1.63 1.48 1.35 1.23 1.13
y direction 2.96 2.10 1.54 1.17 0.90 0.71 0.57 0.47 0.38 0.32 0.27 0.23 0.20 0.17 0.15 0.13 0.11
y direction 1.98 1.40 1.03 0.78 0.60 0.48 0.38 0.31 0.26 0.21 0.18 0.15 0.13 0.11 0.10 0.09 0.08
y direction 1.48 1.05 0.77 0.58 0.45 0.36 0.29 0.23 0.19 0.16 0.14 0.12 0.10 0.09 0.07 0.07 0.06


Lk in m in kN
2.00 554.9
2.25 512.1
2.50 471.6
2.75 433.6
3.00 398.4
3.25 366.2
3.50 336.7
3.75 310.0
4.00 285.7
4.25 263.7
4.50 243.8
4.75 225.8
5.00 209.5
5.25 194.7
5.50 181.3
5.75 169.1
6.00 158.0 Geometry
6.25 147.8 H 240 mm
B 72 mm
6.50 138.6
T1 12 mm
6.75 130.1
7.00 122.4 T2 12 mm
7.25 115.3 R 12 mm
7.50 108.7
8.00 97.2 A 4 382 mm2
Ixx 33 241 391 mm4
0.50 520.0 e 18.0 mm
0.60 449.3
0.80 333.9 E0° 28 000 MPa
0.90 288.8 fc, 0° 240 MPa
1.00 251.0
1.20 192.5 γm,E 1.3
1.30 170.0 γm,f 1.3
1.40 151.0
1.60 120.9 808.9 kN
1.70 108.9
1.80 98.6
Dead weight
1.90 89.6
7.888 kg/m
2.00 81.8
2.10 74.9
Buckling length
2.20 68.8
2.30 63.4
2.40 58.6
2.50 54.3
2.60 50.5
2.70 47.0
2.80 43.9
Lk = L 0.7L 0.5L 2L
3.00 38.5

Load-bearing capacity in kN/m - U240 x 72 x 12 - B
One span
L (m) = 2.00 2.25 2.50 2.75 3.00 3.25 3.50 3.75 4.00 4.25 4.50 4.75 5.00 5.25 5.50 5.75 6.00
Breaking point
x direction 49.85 44.31 39.88 36.25 33.23 30.67 28.48 26.58 24.92 22.65 20.20 18.13 16.36 14.84 13.52 12.37 11.36
y direction 11.69 9.24 7.48 6.19 5.20 4.43 3.82 3.33 2.92 2.59 2.31 2.07 1.87 1.70 1.55 1.41 1.30
y direction 2.24 1.58 1.16 0.87 0.67 0.53 0.43 0.35 0.29 0.24 0.20 0.17 0.15 0.13 0.11 0.10 0.08
y direction 1.49 1.06 0.77 0.58 0.45 0.36 0.28 0.23 0.19 0.16 0.13 0.11 0.10 0.08 0.07 0.06 0.06
y direction 1.12 0.79 0.58 0.44 0.34 0.27 0.21 0.17 0.14 0.12 0.10 0.09 0.07 0.06 0.06 0.05 0.04
Two spans
L (m) = 2.00 2.25 2.50 2.75 3.00 3.25 3.50 3.75 4.00 4.25 4.50 4.75 5.00 5.25 5.50 5.75 6.00
Breaking point
x direction 39.88 35.45 31.90 29.00 26.58 24.54 22.79 21.27 19.94 18.77 17.72 16.79 15.95 14.84 13.52 12.37 11.36
y direction 11.69 9.24 7.48 6.19 5.20 4.43 3.82 3.33 2.92 2.59 2.31 2.07 1.87 1.70 1.55 1.41 1.30
y direction 5.20 3.70 2.72 2.06 1.59 1.26 1.01 0.82 0.68 0.57 0.48 0.41 0.35 0.30 0.26 0.23 0.20
y direction 3.47 2.47 1.81 1.37 1.06 0.84 0.67 0.55 0.45 0.38 0.32 0.27 0.23 0.20 0.18 0.15 0.14
y direction 2.60 1.85 1.36 1.03 0.80 0.63 0.51 0.41 0.34 0.28 0.24 0.20 0.18 0.15 0.13 0.12 0.10
Three spans
L (m) = 2.00 2.25 2.50 2.75 3.00 3.25 3.50 3.75 4.00 4.25 4.50 4.75 5.00 5.25 5.50 5.75 6.00
Breaking point
x direction 41.54 36.92 33.23 30.21 27.69 25.56 23.74 22.15 20.77 19.55 18.46 17.49 16.62 15.82 15.10 14.45 13.85
y direction 14.62 11.55 9.36 7.73 6.50 5.54 4.77 4.16 3.65 3.24 2.89 2.59 2.34 2.12 1.93 1.77 1.62
y direction 4.15 2.94 2.16 1.63 1.26 1.00 0.80 0.65 0.54 0.45 0.38 0.32 0.28 0.24 0.21 0.18 0.16
y direction 2.77 1.96 1.44 1.09 0.84 0.66 0.53 0.43 0.36 0.30 0.25 0.21 0.18 0.16 0.14 0.12 0.11
y direction 2.07 1.47 1.08 0.82 0.63 0.50 0.40 0.33 0.27 0.22 0.19 0.16 0.14 0.12 0.10 0.09 0.08

Axial load-bearing capacity in kN - U300 x 90 x 15 - A

Lk in m in kN
2.00 977.5
2.25 922.0
2.50 867.0
2.75 813.3
3.00 761.7
3.25 712.6
3.50 666.1
3.75 622.6
4.00 581.9
4.25 544.0
4.50 508.9
4.75 476.4
5.00 446.4
5.25 418.6
5.50 393.0
5.75 369.3
6.00 347.5 Geometry
6.25 327.3 H 300 mm
B 90 mm
6.50 308.6
T1 15 mm
6.75 291.4
7.00 275.4 T2 15 mm
7.25 260.6 R 15 mm
7.50 246.8
8.00 222.2 A 6 847 mm2
Ixx 81 155 740 mm4
0.50 932.3 e 22.4 mm
0.60 835.8
0.80 661.6 E0° 28 000 MPa
0.90 587.2 fc, 0° 240 MPa
1.00 521.7
1.20 414.6 γm,E 1.3
1.30 371.3 γm,f 1.3
1.40 333.6
1.60 272.3 1264.0 kN
1.70 247.3
1.80 225.3
Dead weight
1.90 206.0
12.345 kg/m
2.00 188.9
2.10 173.7
Buckling length
2.20 160.3
2.30 148.2
2.40 137.5
2.50 127.8
2.60 119.0
2.70 111.1
2.80 104.0
Lk = L 0.7L 0.5L 2L
3.00 91.6

One span
L (m) = 2.50 2.75 3.00 3.25 3.50 3.75 4.00 4.25 4.50 4.75 5.00 5.25 5.50 5.75 6.00 6.25 6.50
Breaking point
x direction 62.31 56.64 51.92 47.93 44.51 41.54 38.94 36.65 34.62 32.79 31.15 28.99 26.42 24.17 22.20 20.46 18.91
y direction 14.62 12.08 10.15 8.65 7.46 6.50 5.71 5.06 4.51 4.05 3.65 3.31 3.02 2.76 2.54 2.34 2.16
y direction 2.80 2.11 1.63 1.29 1.03 0.84 0.69 0.58 0.49 0.42 0.36 0.31 0.27 0.24 0.21 0.18 0.16
y direction 1.87 1.41 1.09 0.86 0.69 0.56 0.47 0.39 0.33 0.28 0.24 0.21 0.18 0.16 0.14 0.12 0.11
y direction 1.40 1.06 0.82 0.65 0.52 0.42 0.35 0.29 0.25 0.21 0.18 0.15 0.13 0.12 0.10 0.09 0.08
Two spans
L (m) = 2.50 2.75 3.00 3.25 3.50 3.75 4.00 4.25 4.50 4.75 5.00 5.25 5.50 5.75 6.00 6.25 6.50
Breaking point
x direction 49.85 45.31 41.54 38.34 35.60 33.23 31.15 29.32 27.69 26.23 24.92 23.74 22.66 21.67 20.77 19.94 18.91
y direction 14.62 12.08 10.15 8.65 7.46 6.50 5.71 5.06 4.51 4.05 3.65 3.31 3.02 2.76 2.54 2.34 2.16
y direction 6.50 4.93 3.83 3.03 2.44 1.99 1.65 1.38 1.16 0.99 0.85 0.74 0.64 0.56 0.49 0.44 0.39
y direction 4.33 3.29 2.55 2.02 1.63 1.33 1.10 0.92 0.77 0.66 0.57 0.49 0.43 0.37 0.33 0.29 0.26
y direction 3.25 2.47 1.92 1.52 1.22 1.00 0.82 0.69 0.58 0.50 0.43 0.37 0.32 0.28 0.25 0.22 0.19
Three spans
L (m) = 2.50 2.75 3.00 3.25 3.50 3.75 4.00 4.25 4.50 4.75 5.00 5.25 5.50 5.75 6.00 6.25 6.50
Breaking point
x direction 51.92 47.20 43.27 39.94 37.09 34.62 32.45 30.54 28.85 27.33 25.96 24.73 23.60 22.58 21.63 20.77 19.97
y direction 18.27 15.10 12.69 10.81 9.32 8.12 7.14 6.32 5.64 5.06 4.57 4.14 3.78 3.45 3.17 2.92 2.70
y direction 5.19 3.93 3.05 2.41 1.93 1.58 1.30 1.09 0.92 0.78 0.67 0.58 0.51 0.44 0.39 0.35 0.31
y direction 3.46 2.62 2.03 1.60 1.29 1.05 0.87 0.73 0.61 0.52 0.45 0.39 0.34 0.30 0.26 0.23 0.20
y direction 2.59 1.96 1.52 1.20 0.97 0.79 0.65 0.54 0.46 0.39 0.34 0.29 0.25 0.22 0.20 0.17 0.15

Axial load-bearing capacity in kN - U360 x 108 x 18 - A

Lk in m in kN
2.00 1512.3
2.25 1447.3
2.50 1381.0
2.75 1314.4
3.00 1248.4
3.25 1183.9
3.50 1121.3
3.75 1061.0
4.00 1003.3
4.25 948.5
4.50 896.5
4.75 847.4
5.00 801.1
5.25 757.6
5.50 716.8
5.75 678.6
6.00 642.8 Geometry
6.25 609.3 H 360 mm
B 108 mm
6.50 577.9
T1 18 mm
6.75 548.5
7.00 521.1 T2 18 mm
7.25 495.4 R 18 mm
7.50 471.3
8.00 427.6 A 9 859 mm2
Ixx 168 284 541 mm4
0.50 1459.6 e 26.9 mm
0.60 1342.6
0.80 1115.0 E0° 28 000 MPa
0.90 1011.0 fc, 0° 240 MPa
1.00 915.5
1.20 751.2 γm,E 1.3
1.30 681.7 γm,f 1.3
1.40 619.8
1.60 515.7
1820.1 kN
1.70 472.1
1.80 433.2
Dead weight
1.90 398.5
17.746 kg/m
2.00 367.5
2.10 339.7
Buckling length
2.20 314.8
2.30 292.3
2.40 272.0
2.50 253.7
2.60 237.0
2.70 221.9
2.80 208.1
3.00 184.0 Lk = L 0.7L 0.5L 2L

One span
L (m) = 3.00 3.25 3.50 3.75 4.00 4.25 4.50 4.75 5.00 5.25 5.50 5.75 6.00 6.25 6.50 6.75 7.00
Breaking point
x direction 74.77 69.02 64.09 59.82 56.08 52.78 49.85 47.22 44.86 42.73 40.78 39.01 37.38 35.35 32.68 30.31 28.18
y direction 17.54 14.95 12.89 11.23 9.87 8.74 7.80 7.00 6.31 5.73 5.22 4.77 4.39 4.04 3.74 3.46 3.22
y direction 3.36 2.66 2.13 1.74 1.43 1.20 1.01 0.86 0.74 0.64 0.56 0.49 0.43 0.38 0.34 0.30 0.27
y direction 2.24 1.77 1.43 1.16 0.96 0.80 0.68 0.58 0.49 0.43 0.37 0.33 0.29 0.25 0.23 0.20 0.18
y direction 1.68 1.33 1.07 0.87 0.72 0.60 0.51 0.43 0.37 0.32 0.28 0.24 0.21 0.19 0.17 0.15 0.14
Two spans
L (m) = 3.00 3.25 3.50 3.75 4.00 4.25 4.50 4.75 5.00 5.25 5.50 5.75 6.00 6.25 6.50 6.75 7.00
Breaking point
x direction 59.82 55.21 51.27 47.85 44.86 42.22 39.88 37.78 35.89 34.18 32.63 31.21 29.91 28.71 27.61 26.58 25.64
y direction 17.54 14.95 12.89 11.23 9.87 8.74 7.80 7.00 6.31 5.73 5.22 4.77 4.39 4.04 3.74 3.46 3.22
y direction 7.80 6.19 4.99 4.08 3.38 2.83 2.39 2.04 1.75 1.52 1.32 1.16 1.02 0.90 0.80 0.72 0.65
y direction 5.20 4.13 3.33 2.72 2.25 1.88 1.59 1.36 1.17 1.01 0.88 0.77 0.68 0.60 0.54 0.48 0.43
y direction 3.90 3.09 2.50 2.04 1.69 1.41 1.19 1.02 0.88 0.76 0.66 0.58 0.51 0.45 0.40 0.36 0.32
Three spans
L (m) = 3.00 3.25 3.50 3.75 4.00 4.25 4.50 4.75 5.00 5.25 5.50 5.75 6.00 6.25 6.50 6.75 7.00
Breaking point
x direction 62.31 57.51 53.41 49.85 46.73 43.98 41.54 39.35 37.38 35.60 33.99 32.51 31.15 29.91 28.76 27.69 26.70
y direction 21.93 18.68 16.11 14.03 12.33 10.93 9.74 8.75 7.89 7.16 6.52 5.97 5.48 5.05 4.67 4.33 4.03
y direction 6.22 4.93 3.97 3.24 2.68 2.24 1.89 1.61 1.39 1.20 1.04 0.92 0.81 0.71 0.64 0.57 0.51
y direction 4.15 3.29 2.65 2.16 1.79 1.49 1.26 1.08 0.92 0.80 0.70 0.61 0.54 0.48 0.42 0.38 0.34
y direction 3.11 2.46 1.98 1.62 1.34 1.12 0.95 0.81 0.69 0.60 0.52 0.46 0.40 0.36 0.32 0.28 0.25

Axial load-bearing capacity in kN - UL 120 x 50 x 5/5 - A

Lk in m in kN
2.00 42.2
2.25 37.9
2.50 34.0
2.75 30.5
3.00 27.4
3.25 24.7
3.50 22.3
3.75 20.2
4.00 18.4
4.25 16.8
4.50 15.3
4.75 14.1
5.00 12.9
5.25 11.9
5.50 11.0
5.75 10.2 Geometry
6.00 9.5 H 120 mm
B 50 mm
6.25 8.8
T1 5 mm
6.50 8.2
6.75 7.7 T2 5 mm
7.00 7.2 R 5,0 mm
7.25 6.8
7.75 6.0 A 1 061 mm2
8.00 5.6 Ixx 2 239 913 mm4
Wxx 37 332 mm3
load-bearing capacity Iyy 238 446 mm4
Buckling in x direction Wyy 6 469 mm3
0.50 4.3
0.70 2.2 E0° 23 000 MPa
0.80 1.7 fc, 0° 240 Mpa
0.90 1.4
1.10 0.9 λm,E 1.3
1.20 0.8 λm,f 1.3
1.30 0.7
1.40 0.6
1.50 0.5
195.8 kN
1.60 0.4
1.70 0.4
Dead weight
1.80 0.3
1.910 kg/m
1.90 0.3
2.00 0.3
2.10 0.3
Buckling length
2.20 0.2
2.30 0.2
2.40 0.2
2.50 0.2
2.60 0.2
2.70 0.2
2.80 0.1 Lk = L 0.7L 0.5L 2L
3.00 0.1

Load-bearing capacity in kN/m - UL 120 x 50 x 5/5 - B
One span
L (m) = 2.00 2.25 2.50 2.75 3.00 3.25 3.50 3.75 4.00 4.25 4.50 4.75 5.00 5.25 5.50 5.75 6.00
Breaking point
x direction 5.23 4.13 3.34 2.76 2.32 1.98 1.71 1.49 1.31 1.16 1.03 0.93 0.84 0.76 0.69 0.63 0.58
y direction 0.91 0.72 0.58 0.48 0.40 0.34 0.30 0.26 0.23 0.20 0.18 0.16 0.14 0.13 0.12 0.11 0.10
y direction 0.26 0.18 0.13 0.10 0.08 0.06 0.05 0.04 0.03 0.03 0.02 0.02 0.02 0.01 0.01 0.01 0.01
y direction 0.17 0.12 0.09 0.07 0.05 0.04 0.03 0.03 0.02 0.02 0.02 0.01 0.01 0.01 0.01 0.01 0.01
y direction 0.13 0.09 0.07 0.05 0.04 0.03 0.02 0.02 0.02 0.01 0.01 0.01 0.01 0.01 0.01 0.01 0.00
Two spans
L (m) = 2.00 2.25 2.50 2.75 3.00 3.25 3.50 3.75 4.00 4.25 4.50 4.75 5.00 5.25 5.50 5.75 6.00
Breaking point
x direction 5.23 4.13 3.34 2.76 2.32 1.98 1.71 1.49 1.31 1.16 1.03 0.93 0.84 0.76 0.69 0.63 0.58
y direction 1.60 1.27 1.03 0.85 0.71 0.61 0.52 0.46 0.40 0.35 0.32 0.28 0.26 0.23 0.21 0.19 0.18
y direction 1.07 0.76 0.56 0.42 0.33 0.26 0.21 0.17 0.14 0.12 0.10 0.08 0.07 0.06 0.05 0.05 0.04
y direction 0.71 0.51 0.37 0.28 0.22 0.17 0.14 0.11 0.09 0.08 0.06 0.06 0.05 0.04 0.04 0.03 0.03
y direction 0.54 0.38 0.28 0.21 0.16 0.13 0.10 0.08 0.07 0.06 0.05 0.04 0.04 0.03 0.03 0.02 0.02
Three spans
L (m) = 2.00 2.25 2.50 2.75 3.00 3.25 3.50 3.75 4.00 4.25 4.50 4.75 5.00 5.25 5.50 5.75 6.00
Breaking point
x direction 6.53 5.16 4.18 3.46 2.90 2.47 2.13 1.86 1.63 1.45 1.29 1.16 1.05 0.95 0.86 0.79 0.73
y direction 2.00 1.58 1.28 1.06 0.89 0.76 0.65 0.57 0.50 0.44 0.40 0.35 0.32 0.29 0.26 0.24 0.22
y direction 0.85 0.60 0.44 0.33 0.26 0.20 0.16 0.13 0.11 0.09 0.08 0.07 0.06 0.05 0.04 0.04 0.03
y direction 0.57 0.40 0.29 0.22 0.17 0.14 0.11 0.09 0.07 0.06 0.05 0.04 0.04 0.03 0.03 0.02 0.02
y direction 0.43 0.30 0.22 0.17 0.13 0.10 0.08 0.07 0.05 0.05 0.04 0.03 0.03 0.02 0.02 0.02 0.02


Lk in m in kN
2.00 74.0
2.25 69.4
2.50 65.0
2.75 60.7
3.00 56.6
3.25 52.7
3.50 49.1
3.75 45.7
4.00 42.6
4.25 39.7
4.50 37.0
4.75 34.6
5.00 32.3
5.25 30.2
5.50 28.3
5.75 26.6 Geometry
6.00 24.9 H 160 mm
6.25 23.5 B 48 mm
6.50 22.1 T1 8 mm
6.75 20.8 T2 5 mm
7.00 19.6 R 8 mm
7.25 18.6
7.75 16.6 A 1 401 mm2
8.00 15.8 Ixx 5 663 667 mm4
Wxx 70 796 mm3
load-bearing capacity Iyy 298 656 mm4
Buckling in x direction Wyy 8 934 mm3
0.50 82.2
Material properties
0.60 76.7
E0° 28 000 MPa
0.70 71.1
0.80 65.6 fc, 0° 240 Mpa
0.90 60.3
1.10 50.7 γm,E 1.3
1.20 46.4 γm,f 1.3
1.30 42.5
1.50 35.8 258.7 kN
1.60 32.9
1.80 28.0 2.522 kg/m
1.90 25.9
2.10 22.2
2.20 20.7
2.30 19.3
2.40 18.0
2.50 16.8
2.60 15.7
2.70 14.8 Lk = L 0.7L 0.5L 2L
2.80 13.9
3.00 12.3

One span
L (m) = 2.00 2.25 2.50 2.75 3.00 3.25 3.50 3.75 4.00 4.25 4.50 4.75 5.00 5.25 5.50 5.75 6.00
Breaking point
x direction 9.91 7.83 6.34 5.24 4.41 3.75 3.24 2.82 2.48 2.19 1.96 1.76 1.59 1.44 1.31 1.20 1.10
y direction 1.25 0.99 0.80 0.66 0.56 0.47 0.41 0.36 0.31 0.28 0.25 0.22 0.20 0.18 0.17 0.15 0.14
y direction 0.40 0.28 0.20 0.15 0.12 0.09 0.07 0.06 0.05 0.04 0.04 0.03 0.03 0.02 0.02 0.02 0.01
y direction 0.26 0.19 0.14 0.10 0.08 0.06 0.05 0.04 0.03 0.03 0.02 0.02 0.02 0.01 0.01 0.01 0.01
y direction 0.20 0.14 0.10 0.08 0.06 0.05 0.04 0.03 0.03 0.02 0.02 0.01 0.01 0.01 0.01 0.01 0.01
Two spans
L (m) = 2.00 2.25 2.50 2.75 3.00 3.25 3.50 3.75 4.00 4.25 4.50 4.75 5.00 5.25 5.50 5.75 6.00
Breaking point
x direction 9.91 7.83 6.34 5.24 4.41 3.75 3.24 2.82 2.48 2.19 1.96 1.76 1.59 1.44 1.31 1.20 1.10
y direction 1.25 0.99 0.80 0.66 0.56 0.47 0.41 0.36 0.31 0.28 0.25 0.22 0.20 0.18 0.17 0.15 0.14
y direction 0.94 0.66 0.49 0.37 0.28 0.22 0.18 0.15 0.12 0.10 0.08 0.07 0.06 0.05 0.05 0.04 0.04
y direction 0.63 0.44 0.32 0.24 0.19 0.15 0.12 0.10 0.08 0.07 0.06 0.05 0.04 0.04 0.03 0.03 0.02
y direction 0.47 0.33 0.24 0.18 0.14 0.11 0.09 0.07 0.06 0.05 0.04 0.04 0.03 0.03 0.02 0.02 0.02
Three spans
L (m) = 2.00 2.25 2.50 2.75 3.00 3.25 3.50 3.75 4.00 4.25 4.50 4.75 5.00 5.25 5.50 5.75 6.00
Breaking point
x direction 11.54 9.79 7.93 6.55 5.51 4.69 4.05 3.52 3.10 2.74 2.45 2.20 1.98 1.80 1.64 1.50 1.38
y direction 1.56 1.24 1.00 0.83 0.69 0.59 0.51 0.44 0.39 0.35 0.31 0.28 0.25 0.23 0.21 0.19 0.17
y direction 0.75 0.53 0.38 0.29 0.22 0.18 0.14 0.11 0.09 0.08 0.07 0.06 0.05 0.04 0.04 0.03 0.03
y direction 0.50 0.35 0.26 0.19 0.15 0.12 0.09 0.08 0.06 0.05 0.04 0.04 0.03 0.03 0.02 0.02 0.02
y direction 0.37 0.26 0.19 0.14 0.11 0.09 0.07 0.06 0.05 0.04 0.03 0.03 0.02 0.02 0.02 0.02 0.01

Axial load-bearing capacity in kN - UL 200 x 60 x 8/5- A

Lk in m in kN
2.00 102.1
2.25 97.7
2.50 93.2
2.75 88.7
3.00 84.3
3.25 79.9
3.50 75.6
3.75 71.6
4.00 67.7
4.25 64.0
4.50 60.4
4.75 57.1
5.00 54.0
5.25 51.1
5.50 48.3
5.75 45.7 Geometry
6.00 43.3 H 200 mm
6.25 41.0 B 60 mm
6.50 38.9 T1 8 mm
6.75 36.9 T2 5 mm
7.00 35.1 R 8 mm
7.25 33.4
7.75 30.2 A 1 757 mm2
8.00 28.8 Ixx 11 318 922 mm4
Wxx 113 189 mm3
Iyy 602 783 mm4
Buckling in x direction
Wyy 14 285 mm3
0.50 99.2
0.70 83.7 E0° 28 000 MPa
0.80 76.2 fc, 0° 240 Mpa
0.90 69.2
1.10 56.9 γm,E 1.3
1.20 51.6 γm,f 1.3
1.30 46.9
1.40 42.7
1.50 38.9
324.5 kN
1.60 35.6
1.70 32.6
Dead weight
1.80 29.9
3.163 kg/m
1.90 27.5
2.00 25.4
2.20 21.8
2.30 20.2
2.40 18.8
2.50 17.6
2.60 16.4
2.70 15.4
2.80 14.4 Lk = L 0.7L 0.5L 2L
3.00 12.8

Load-bearing capacity in kN/m - UL 200 - B
One span
L (m) = 2.00 2.25 2.50 2.75 3.00 3.25 3.50 3.75 4.00 4.25 4.50 4.75 5.00 5.25 5.50 5.75 6.00
Breaking point
x direction 15.85 12.52 10.14 8.38 7.04 6.00 5.17 4.51 3.96 3.51 3.13 2.81 2.54 2.30 2.10 1.92 1.76
y direction 2.00 1.58 1.28 1.06 0.89 0.76 0.65 0.57 0.50 0.44 0.40 0.35 0.32 0.29 0.26 0.24 0.22
y direction 0.80 0.56 0.41 0.31 0.24 0.19 0.15 0.12 0.10 0.08 0.07 0.06 0.05 0.04 0.04 0.03 0.03
y direction 0.53 0.37 0.27 0.21 0.16 0.13 0.10 0.08 0.07 0.06 0.05 0.04 0.03 0.03 0.03 0.02 0.02
y direction 0.40 0.28 0.21 0.15 0.12 0.09 0.08 0.06 0.05 0.04 0.04 0.03 0.03 0.02 0.02 0.02 0.01
Two spans
L (m) = 2.00 2.25 2.50 2.75 3.00 3.25 3.50 3.75 4.00 4.25 4.50 4.75 5.00 5.25 5.50 5.75 6.00
Breaking point
x direction 13.85 12.31 10.14 8.38 7.04 6.00 5.17 4.51 3.96 3.51 3.13 2.81 2.54 2.30 2.10 1.92 1.76
y direction 2.00 1.58 1.28 1.06 0.89 0.76 0.65 0.57 0.50 0.44 0.40 0.35 0.32 0.29 0.26 0.24 0.22
y direction 1.87 1.33 0.97 0.73 0.57 0.45 0.36 0.29 0.24 0.20 0.17 0.14 0.12 0.11 0.09 0.08 0.07
y direction 1.25 0.88 0.65 0.49 0.38 0.30 0.24 0.19 0.16 0.13 0.11 0.10 0.08 0.07 0.06 0.05 0.05
y direction 0.94 0.66 0.49 0.37 0.28 0.22 0.18 0.15 0.12 0.10 0.08 0.07 0.06 0.05 0.05 0.04 0.04
Three spans
L (m) = 2.00 2.25 2.50 2.75 3.00 3.25 3.50 3.75 4.00 4.25 4.50 4.75 5.00 5.25 5.50 5.75 6.00
Breaking point
x direction 14.42 12.82 11.54 10.48 8.80 7.50 6.47 5.63 4.95 4.39 3.91 3.51 3.17 2.87 2.62 2.40 2.20
y direction 2.50 1.98 1.60 1.32 1.11 0.95 0.82 0.71 0.62 0.55 0.49 0.44 0.40 0.36 0.33 0.30 0.28
y direction 1.49 1.05 0.77 0.58 0.45 0.35 0.28 0.23 0.19 0.16 0.13 0.11 0.10 0.08 0.07 0.06 0.06
y direction 0.99 0.70 0.51 0.39 0.30 0.24 0.19 0.15 0.13 0.11 0.09 0.08 0.07 0.06 0.05 0.04 0.04
y direction 0.74 0.53 0.38 0.29 0.22 0.18 0.14 0.12 0.10 0.08 0.07 0.06 0.05 0.04 0.04 0.03 0.03


Lk in m in kN
2.00 169.3
2.25 163.7
2.50 158.0
2.75 152.0
3.00 146.0
3.25 140.0
3.50 134.0
3.75 128.1
4.00 122.4
4.25 116.8
4.50 111.5
4.75 106.3
5.00 101.3
5.25 96.6
5.50 92.1
5.75 87.8
Geometry
6.00 83.7 H 240 mm
6.25 79.9 B 72 mm
6.50 76.2 T1 10 mm
6.75 72.7 7 mm
T2
7.00 69.5
R 10 mm
7.25 66.4
7.75 60.7 A 2 773 mm2
8.00 58.0
Ixx 24 932 610 mm4
Wyy 25 687 mm3
e 20.8 mm
0.50 165.4
0.60 155.3
Material properties
0.70 144.8
E0° 28 000 MPa
0.80 134.4
0.90 124.3 fc, 0° 240 Mpa
1.00 114.6
1.20 97.1 γm,E 1.3
1.30 89.3 γm,f 1.3
1.40 82.2
1.60 69.9 511.9 kN
1.70 64.6
1.90 55.4 4.991 kg/m
2.00 51.4
2.20 44.5
2.30 41.6
2.40 38.8
2.50 36.4
2.60 34.1
2.70 32.0
2.80 30.1
Lk = L 0.7L 0.5L 2L
3.00 26.8

One span
L (m) = 2.00 2.25 2.50 2.75 3.00 3.25 3.50 3.75 4.00 4.25 4.50 4.75 5.00 5.25 5.50 5.75 6.00
Breaking point
x direction 29.08 22.98 18.62 15.39 12.93 11.02 9.50 8.27 7.27 6.44 5.75 5.16 4.65 4.22 3.85 3.52 3.23
y direction 3.60 2.84 2.30 1.90 1.60 1.36 1.17 1.02 0.90 0.80 0.71 0.64 0.58 0.52 0.48 0.44 0.40
y direction 1.73 1.22 0.89 0.67 0.52 0.41 0.33 0.27 0.22 0.18 0.15 0.13 0.11 0.10 0.08 0.07 0.07
y direction 1.15 0.81 0.60 0.45 0.35 0.27 0.22 0.18 0.15 0.12 0.10 0.09 0.08 0.07 0.06 0.05 0.04
y direction 0.86 0.61 0.45 0.34 0.26 0.20 0.16 0.13 0.11 0.09 0.08 0.07 0.06 0.05 0.04 0.04 0.03
Two spans
L (m) = 2.00 2.25 2.50 2.75 3.00 3.25 3.50 3.75 4.00 4.25 4.50 4.75 5.00 5.25 5.50 5.75 6.00
Breaking point
x direction 23.26 20.68 18.61 15.39 12.93 11.02 9.50 8.27 7.27 6.44 5.75 5.16 4.65 4.22 3.85 3.52 3.23
y direction 3.60 2.84 2.30 1.90 1.60 1.36 1.17 1.02 0.90 0.80 0.71 0.64 0.58 0.52 0.48 0.44 0.40
y direction 4.02 2.85 2.10 1.59 1.23 0.97 0.78 0.63 0.52 0.44 0.37 0.31 0.27 0.23 0.20 0.18 0.16
y direction 2.68 1.90 1.40 1.06 0.82 0.65 0.52 0.42 0.35 0.29 0.25 0.21 0.18 0.16 0.14 0.12 0.10
y direction 2.01 1.43 1.05 0.79 0.61 0.48 0.39 0.32 0.26 0.22 0.18 0.16 0.13 0.12 0.10 0.09 0.08
Three spans
L (m) = 2.00 2.25 2.50 2.75 3.00 3.25 3.50 3.75 4.00 4.25 4.50 4.75 5.00 5.25 5.50 5.75 6.00
Breaking point
x direction 24.23 21.54 19.38 17.62 16.15 13.77 11.87 10.34 9.09 8.05 7.18 6.45 5.82 5.28 4.81 4.40 4.04
y direction 4.50 3.55 2.88 2.38 2.00 1.70 1.47 1.28 1.12 1.00 0.89 0.80 0.72 0.65 0.59 0.54 0.50
y direction 3.20 2.27 1.66 1.26 0.97 0.77 0.62 0.50 0.41 0.35 0.29 0.25 0.21 0.18 0.16 0.14 0.12
y direction 2.13 1.51 1.11 0.84 0.65 0.51 0.41 0.33 0.28 0.23 0.19 0.17 0.14 0.12 0.11 0.09 0.08
y direction 1.60 1.13 0.83 0.63 0.49 0.38 0.31 0.25 0.21 0.17 0.15 0.12 0.11 0.09 0.08 0.07 0.06


Lk in m in kN
2.00 282.6
2.25 276.1
2.50 269.2
2.75 261.9
3.00 254.4
3.25 246.7
3.50 238.9
3.75 231.0
4.00 223.2
4.25 215.4
4.50 207.7
4.75 200.2
5.00 192.8
5.25 185.6
5.50 178.6
5.75 171.9 Geometry
6.00 165.3 H 300 mm
6.25 159.0 B 90 mm
6.50 152.9 T1 12 mm
6.75 147.1 T2 8 mm
7.00 141.5 R 12 mm
7.25 136.1
7.75 126.0 A 4 430 mm2
8.00 121.3 Ixx 59 964 118 mm4
Wxx 399 761 mm3
Design value for compressive Ak,y 2 160 mm2
Iyy 3 316 782 mm4
Wyy 50 319 mm3
Buckling length Load-bearing capacity Ak,x 1 836 mm2
0.50 279.4
0.70 255.1 E0° 28 000 MPa
0.80 242.0 fc, 0° 240 Mpa
0.90 228.6
1.10 202.4 γm,E 1.3
1.20 189.9
γm,f 1.3
1.30 177.9
1.40 166.5
1.50 155.9
817.8 kN
1.60 145.9
1.70 136.5
1.90 119.8 7.974 kg/m
2.00 112.4
2.20 99.1
2.30 93.2
2.40 87.8
2.50 82.7
2.60 78.0
2.70 73.7
2.80 69.7 Lk = L 0.7L 0.5L 2L
3.00 62.5

One span
L (m) = 2.50 2.75 3.00 3.25 3.50 3.75 4.00 4.25 4.50 4.75 5.00 5.25 5.50 5.75 6.00 6.25 6.50
Breaking point
x direction 33.23 29.60 24.87 21.19 18.27 15.92 13.99 12.39 11.06 9.92 8.95 8.12 7.40 6.77 6.22 5.73 5.30
y direction 4.51 3.73 3.13 2.67 2.30 2.00 1.76 1.56 1.39 1.25 1.13 1.02 0.93 0.85 0.78 0.72 0.67
y direction 2.22 1.68 1.30 1.02 0.82 0.67 0.55 0.46 0.39 0.33 0.28 0.25 0.21 0.19 0.16 0.15 0.13
y direction 1.48 1.12 0.87 0.68 0.55 0.45 0.37 0.31 0.26 0.22 0.19 0.16 0.14 0.12 0.11 0.10 0.09
y direction 1.11 0.84 0.65 0.51 0.41 0.34 0.28 0.23 0.19 0.17 0.14 0.12 0.11 0.09 0.08 0.07 0.06
Two spans
L (m) = 2.50 2.75 3.00 3.25 3.50 3.75 4.00 4.25 4.50 4.75 5.00 5.25 5.50 5.75 6.00 6.25 6.50
Breaking point
x direction 26.58 24.17 22.15 20.45 18.27 15.92 13.99 12.39 11.06 9.92 8.95 8.12 7.40 6.77 6.22 5.73 5.30
y direction 4.51 3.73 3.13 2.67 2.30 2.00 1.76 1.56 1.39 1.25 1.13 1.02 0.93 0.85 0.78 0.72 0.67
y direction 5.16 3.92 3.04 2.41 1.94 1.58 1.31 1.09 0.92 0.79 0.67 0.58 0.51 0.45 0.39 0.35 0.31
y direction 3.44 2.61 2.03 1.60 1.29 1.05 0.87 0.73 0.61 0.52 0.45 0.39 0.34 0.30 0.26 0.23 0.21
y direction 2.58 1.96 1.52 1.20 0.97 0.79 0.65 0.55 0.46 0.39 0.34 0.29 0.25 0.22 0.20 0.17 0.15
Three spans
L (m) = 2.50 2.75 3.00 3.25 3.50 3.75 4.00 4.25 4.50 4.75 5.00 5.25 5.50 5.75 6.00 6.25 6.50
Breaking point
x direction 27.69 25.17 23.08 21.30 19.78 18.46 17.31 15.49 13.82 12.40 11.19 10.15 9.25 8.46 7.77 7.16 6.62
y direction 5.64 4.66 3.91 3.33 2.88 2.50 2.20 1.95 1.74 1.56 1.41 1.28 1.16 1.07 0.98 0.90 0.83
y direction 4.12 3.12 2.42 1.91 1.54 1.25 1.03 0.86 0.73 0.62 0.53 0.46 0.40 0.35 0.31 0.27 0.24
y direction 2.75 2.08 1.61 1.27 1.02 0.84 0.69 0.58 0.49 0.41 0.36 0.31 0.27 0.23 0.21 0.18 0.16
y direction 2.06 1.56 1.21 0.96 0.77 0.63 0.52 0.43 0.36 0.31 0.27 0.23 0.20 0.18 0.15 0.14 0.12


Lk in m in kN
2.00 435.1
2.25 427.8
2.50 420.1
2.75 411.8
3.00 403.1
3.25 394.0
3.50 384.7
3.75 375.1
4.00 365.5
4.25 355.7
4.50 345.9
4.75 336.1
5.00 326.3
5.25 316.6
5.50 307.1
5.75 297.7 Geometry
6.00 288.5 H 360 mm
6.25 279.5 B 108 mm
6.50 270.7 T1 15 mm
6.75 262.1 T2 10 mm
7.00 253.8 R 15 mm
7.25 245.7
7.75 230.2 A 6 637 mm2
8.00 222.8 Ixx 128 942 713 mm4
Wxx 716 348 mm3
Iyy 7 126 982 mm4
Wyy 90 265 mm3
0.50 431.5
0.70 403.9 E0° 28 000 MPa
0.80 388.3 fc, 0° 240 Mpa
0.90 372.1
1.10 338.8 γm,E 1,3
1.20 322.3
γm,f 1.3
1.30 306.0
1.40 290.2
1.50 274.9
1225.2 kN
1.60 260.3
1.70 246.3
1.90 220.5 11.947 kg/m
2.00 208.6
2.20 187.0
2.30 177.2
2.40 167.9
2.50 159.3
2.60 151.2
2.70 143.6
2.80 136.5 Lk = L 0.7L 0.5L 2L
3.00 123.6

One span
L (m) = 3.00 3.25 3.50 3.75 4.00 4.25 4.50 4.75 5.00 5.25 5.50 5.75 6.00 6.25 6.50 6.75 7.00
Breaking point
x direction 41.54 37.98 32.75 28.53 25.07 22.21 19.81 17.78 16.05 14.55 13.26 12.13 11.14 10.27 9.49 8.80 8.19
y direction 5.62 4.79 4.13 3.59 3.16 2.80 2.50 2.24 2.02 1.83 1.67 1.53 1.40 1.29 1.20 1.11 1.03
y direction 2.77 2.18 1.75 1.43 1.18 0.99 0.83 0.71 0.61 0.53 0.46 0.40 0.35 0.31 0.28 0.25 0.22
y direction 1.84 1.46 1.17 0.96 0.79 0.66 0.56 0.47 0.41 0.35 0.31 0.27 0.24 0.21 0.19 0.17 0.15
y direction 1.38 1.09 0.88 0.72 0.59 0.49 0.42 0.36 0.30 0.26 0.23 0.20 0.18 0.16 0.14 0.12 0.11
Two spans
L (m) = 3.00 3.25 3.50 3.75 4.00 4.25 4.50 4.75 5.00 5.25 5.50 5.75 6.00 6.25 6.50 6.75 7.00
Breaking point
x direction 33.23 30.67 28.48 26.58 24.92 22.21 19.81 17.78 16.05 14.55 13.26 12.13 11.14 10.27 9.49 8.80 8.19
y direction 5.62 4.79 4.13 3.59 3.16 2.80 2.50 2.24 2.02 1.83 1.67 1.53 1.40 1.29 1.20 1.11 1.03
y direction 6.42 5.09 4.11 3.36 2.78 2.33 1.97 1.68 1.44 1.25 1.09 0.95 0.84 0.74 0.66 0.59 0.53
y direction 4.28 3.40 2.74 2.24 1.85 1.55 1.31 1.12 0.96 0.83 0.72 0.63 0.56 0.50 0.44 0.39 0.35
y direction 3.21 2.55 2.05 1.68 1.39 1.16 0.98 0.84 0.72 0.62 0.54 0.48 0.42 0.37 0.33 0.30 0.27
Tre fag
L (m) = 3,00 3,25 3,50 3,75 4,00 4,25 4,50 4,75 5,00 5,25 5,50 5,75 6,00 6,25 6,50 6,75 7,00
Brudgrænsetilstand
x-retning 34,62 31,95 29,67 27,69 25,96 24,43 23,08 21,86 20,06 18,19 16,58 15,17 13,93 12,84 11,87 11,01 10,23
y-retning 7,02 5,98 5,16 4,49 3,95 3,50 3,12 2,80 2,53 2,29 2,09 1,91 1,76 1,62 1,50 1,39 1,29
Anvendelsesgrænsetilstand
δmax < L / 200 x-retning 55,54 46,64 39,46 33,62 28,84 24,88 21,60 18,85 16,53 14,57 12,89 11,46 10,23 9,16 8,24 7,43 6,72
y-retning 5,12 4,06 3,27 2,67 2,21 1,84 1,56 1,33 1,14 0,99 0,86 0,75 0,66 0,59 0,52 0,47 0,42
δmax < L / 300 x-retning 37,02 31,09 26,31 22,41 19,22 16,59 14,40 12,56 11,02 9,71 8,60 7,64 6,82 6,11 5,49 4,95 4,48
y-retning 3,41 2,70 2,18 1,78 1,47 1,23 1,04 0,88 0,76 0,66 0,57 0,50 0,44 0,39 0,35 0,31 0,28
δmax < L / 400 x-retning 27,77 23,32 19,73 16,81 14,42 12,44 10,80 9,42 8,26 7,28 6,45 5,73 5,11 4,58 4,12 3,72 3,36
y-retning 2,56 2,03 1,63 1,33 1,10 0,92 0,78 0,66 0,57 0,49 0,43 0,38 0,33 0,29 0,26 0,23 0,21

Axial load-bearing capacity in kN - Square tube50 x 50 x 5 - A

Lk in m in kN
0.50 94.1
0.75 60.9
1.00 40.7
1.25 28.6
1.50 21.0
1.75 15.9
2.00 12.5
2.25 10.0
2.50 8.2
2.75 6.8
3.00 5.8
3.25 5.0
3.50 4.3
3.75 3.7
4.00 3.3
4.25 2.9 Geometry
4.50 2.6 H 50 mm
4.75 2.4 B 50 mm
5.00 2.1 T1 5 mm
5.25 1.9 T2 5 mm
5.50 1.8 R 2 mm
5.75 1.6
6.25 1.4 A 903 mm2
6.50 1.3 Ixx 308 813 mm4
Wxx 12 353 mm3
Iyy
Wyy
Lk in m in kN
0.75 60.9 E0° 23 000 MPa
1.00 40.7 fc, 0° 240 Mpa
1.25 28.6
1.75 15.9 γm,E 1.3
2.00 12.5 γm,f 1.3
2.25 10.0
2.75 6.8
166.8 kN
3.00 5.8
3.25 5.0
Dead weight
3.50 4.3
1.63 kg/m
3.75 3.7
4.00 3.3
Buckling length
4.25 2.9
4.50 2.6
4.75 2.4
5.00 2.1
5.25 1.9
5.50 1.8
5.75 1.6
6.00 1.5
Lk = L 0.7L 0.5L 2L
6.25 1.4
6.50 1.3

Load-bearing capacity in kN/m - Square tube 50 x 50 x 5 - B
One span
L (m) = 1.00 1.25 1.50 1.75 2.00 2.25 2.50 2.75 3.00 3.25 3.50 3.75 4.00 4.25 4.50 4.75 5.00
Breaking point
x/y direction 17.31 11.68 8.11 5.96 4.56 3.60 2.92 2.41 2.03 1.73 1.49 1.30 1.14 1.01 0.90 0.81 0.73
δmax < L / 200 x/y direction 2.60 1.35 0.79 0.50 0.34 0.24 0.17 0.13 0.10 0.08 0.06 0.05 0.04 0.04 0.03 0.03 0.02
Two spans
L (m) = 1.00 1.25 1.50 1.75 2.00 2.25 2.50 2.75 3.00 3.25 3.50 3.75 4.00 4.25 4.50 4.75 5.00
Breaking point
x/y direction 13.85 11.08 8.11 5.96 4.56 3.60 2.92 2.41 2.03 1.73 1.49 1.30 1.14 1.01 0.90 0.81 0.73
Three spans
L (m) = 1.00 1.25 1.50 1.75 2.00 2.25 2.50 2.75 3.00 3.25 3.50 3.75 4.00 4.25 4.50 4.75 5.00
Breaking point
x/y direction 14.42 11.54 9.62 7.45 5.70 4.50 3.65 3.02 2.53 2.16 1.86 1.62 1.43 1.26 1.13 1.01 0.91

Axial load-bearing capacity in kN - Square tube 60 x 60 x 5 - A

Lk in m in kN
0.50 135.4
0.75 94.8
1.00 66.8
1.25 48.4
1.50 36.3
1.75 27.9
2.00 22.1
2.25 17.9
2.50 14.7
2.75 12.3
3.00 10.4
3.25 9.0
3.50 7.8
3.75 6.8
4.00 6.0
4.25 5.3 Geometry
4.50 4.8 H 60 mm
4.75 4.3 B 60 mm
5.00 3.9 T1 5 mm
5.25 3.5 T2 5 mm
5.50 3.2 R 4 mm
5.75 3.0
6.25 2.5 A 1 114 mm2
6.50 2.3 Ixx 567 156 mm4
Wxx 18 905 mm3
Iyy
Wyy
Lk in m in kN
0.75 94.8 E0° 23 000 MPa
1.00 66.8 fc, 0° 240 Mpa
1.25 48.4
1.75 27.9 γm,E 1.3
2.00 22.1 γm,f 1.3
2.25 17.9
2.75 12.3
205.6 kN
3.00 10.4
3.25 9.0
Dead weight
3.50 7.8
2.00 kg/m
3.75 6.8
4.00 6.0
Buckling length
4.25 5.3
4.50 4.8
4.75 4.3
5.00 3.9
5.25 3.5
5.50 3.2
5.75 3.0
6.00 2.7 Lk = L 0.7L 0.5L 2L
6.25 2.5
6.50 2.3

One span
L (m) = 1.00 1.25 1.50 1.75 2.00 2.25 2.50 2.75 3.00 3.25 3.50 3.75 4.00 4.25 4.50 4.75 5.00
Breaking point
x/y direction 20.77 16.62 12.41 9.12 6.98 5.52 4.47 3.69 3.10 2.64 2.28 1.99 1.75 1.55 1.38 1.24 1.12
Two spans
L (m) = 1.00 1.25 1.50 1.75 2.00 2.25 2.50 2.75 3.00 3.25 3.50 3.75 4.00 4.25 4.50 4.75 5.00
Breaking point
x/y direction 16.62 13.29 11.08 9.12 6.98 5.52 4.47 3.69 3.10 2.64 2.28 1.99 1.75 1.55 1.38 1.24 1.12
Three spans
L (m) = 1.00 1.25 1.50 1.75 2.00 2.25 2.50 2.75 3.00 3.25 3.50 3.75 4.00 4.25 4.50 4.75 5.00
Breaking point
x/y direction 17.31 13.85 11.54 9.89 8.65 6.89 5.58 4.62 3.88 3.30 2.85 2.48 2.18 1.93 1.72 1.55 1.40


Lk in m in kN
2.00 41.5
2.25 34.0
2.50 28.3
2.75 23.9
3.00 20.4
3.25 17.6
3.50 15.3
3.75 13.5
4.00 11.9
4.25 10.6
4.50 9.5
4.75 8.6
5.00 7.8
5.25 7.1
5.50 6.4
5.75 5.9 Geometry
6.00 5.4 H 80 mm
6.25 5.0 B 60 mm
6.50 4.6 T1 5 mm
6.75 4.3 T2 5 mm
7.00 4.0 R 4 mm
7.25 3.8
7.75 3.3 A 1 314 mm2
8.00 3.1 Ixx 1 146 818 mm4
Wxx 28 670 mm3
Iyy
Wyy
Lk in m in kN
2.25 22.5 E0° 23 000 MPa
2.50 18.5 fc, 0° 240 Mpa
2.75 15.5
3.25 11.3 γm,E 1.3
3.50 9.8 γm,f 1.3
3.75 8.6
4.25 6.8
242.5 kN
4.50 6.0
4.75 5.4
Dead weight
5.00 4.9
2.36 kg/m
5.25 4.5
5.50 4.1
Buckling length
5.75 3.7
6.00 3.4
6.25 3.2
6.50 2.9
6.75 2.7
7.00 2.5
7.25 2.4
7.50 2.2 Lk = L 0.7L 0.5L 2L
7.75 2.1
8.00 1.9

One span
L (m) = 1.00 1.25 1.50 1.75 2.00 2.25 2.50 2.75 3.00 3.25 3.50 3.75 4.00 4.25 4.50 4.75 5.00
Breaking point
x direction 27.69 22.15 18.46 13.83 10.59 8.36 6.78 5.60 4.70 4.01 3.46 3.01 2.65 2.34 2.09 1.88 1.69
y direction 20.77 16.62 13.85 11.56 8.85 6.99 5.66 4.68 3.93 3.35 2.89 2.52 2.21 1.96 1.75 1.57 1.42
y direction 5.78 3.06 1.80 1.15 0.77 0.55 0.40 0.30 0.23 0.18 0.15 0.12 0.10 0.08 0.07 0.06 0.05
y direction 3.85 2.06 1.22 0.78 0.52 0.37 0.27 0.20 0.16 0.12 0.10 0.08 0.07 0.06 0.05 0.04 0.03
y direction 2.89 1.55 0.91 0.58 0.39 0.28 0.20 0.15 0.12 0.09 0.07 0.06 0.05 0.04 0.03 0.03 0.03
Two spans
L (m) = 1.00 1.25 1.50 1.75 2.00 2.25 2.50 2.75 3.00 3.25 3.50 3.75 4.00 4.25 4.50 4.75 2.00
Breaking point
x direction 22.15 17.72 14.77 12.66 10.59 8.36 6.78 5.60 4.70 4.01 3.46 3.01 2.65 2.34 2.09 1.88 10.59
y direction 16.62 13.29 11.08 9.49 8.31 6.99 5.66 4.68 3.93 3.35 2.89 2.52 2.21 1.96 1.75 1.57 8.31
y direction 12.35 6.79 4.09 2.64 1.80 1.28 0.94 0.71 0.55 0.43 0.35 0.28 0.23 0.20 0.17 0.14 0.12
y direction 8.23 4.52 2.73 1.76 1.20 0.85 0.63 0.47 0.37 0.29 0.23 0.19 0.16 0.13 0.11 0.09 0.08
y direction 6.17 3.39 2.05 1.32 0.90 0.64 0.47 0.36 0.28 0.22 0.17 0.14 0.12 0.10 0.08 0.07 0.06
Three spans
L (m) = 1.00 1.25 1.50 1.75 2.00 2.25 2.50 2.75 3.00 3.25 3.50 3.75 4.00 4.25 4.50 4.75 5.00
Breaking point
x direction 23.08 18.46 15.38 13.19 11.54 10.26 8.47 7.00 5.88 5.01 4.32 3.76 3.31 2.93 2.61 2.35 2.12
y direction 17.31 13.85 11.54 9.89 8.65 7.69 6.92 5.85 4.92 4.19 3.61 3.15 2.76 2.45 2.18 1.96 1.77
y direction 10.14 5.50 3.29 2.11 1.44 1.02 0.75 0.56 0.44 0.34 0.28 0.22 0.19 0.15 0.13 0.11 0.10
y direction 6.76 3.67 2.19 1.41 0.96 0.68 0.50 0.38 0.29 0.23 0.18 0.15 0.12 0.10 0.09 0.07 0.06
y direction 5.07 2.75 1.64 1.06 0.72 0.51 0.37 0.28 0.22 0.17 0.14 0.11 0.09 0.08 0.07 0.06 0.05


Lk in m in kN
2.00 108.7
2.25 90.8
2.50 76.7
2.75 65.5
3.00 56.4
3.25 49.1
3.50 43.0
3.75 38.0
4.00 33.7
4.25 30.2
4.50 27.1
4.75 24.5
5.00 22.2
5.25 20.3
5.50 18.5
5.75 17.0 Geometry
6.00 15.7 H 100 mm
6.25 14.5 B 100 mm
6.50 13.4 T1 6 mm
6.75 12.5 T2 6 mm
7.00 11.6 R 4 mm
7.25 10.9
7.75 9.5 A 2 270 mm2
8.00 9.0 Ixx 3 361 401 mm4
Wxx 67 228 mm3
load-bearing capacity 3 361 401 mm4
Iyy
Wyy
Lk in m in kN
2.25 90.8 E0° 23 000 MPa
2.50 76.7 fc, 0° 240 Mpa
2.75 65.5
3.25 49.1 γm,E 1.3
3.50 43.0 γm,f 1.3
3.75 38.0
4.25 30.2
419.0 kN
4.50 27.1
4.75 24.5
Dead weight
5.00 22.2
4.09 kg/m
5.25 20.3
5.50 18.5
Buckling length
5.75 17.0
6.00 15.7
6.25 14.5
6.50 13.4
6.75 12.5
7.00 11.6
7.25 10.9
7.50 10.2 Lk = L 0.7L 0.5L 2L
7.75 9.5
8.00 9.0

One span
L (m) = 1.00 1.25 1.50 1.75 2.00 2.25 2.50 2.75 3.00 3.25 3.50 3.75 4.00 4.25 4.50 4.75 5.00
Breaking point
x direction 41.54 33.23 27.69 23.74 20.77 18.46 15.89 13.13 11.03 9.40 8.11 7.06 6.21 5.50 4.90 4.40 3.97
y direction 41.54 33.23 27.69 23.74 20.77 18.46 15.89 13.13 11.03 9.40 8.11 7.06 6.21 5.50 4.90 4.40 3.97
y direction 24.15 13.26 7.98 5.15 3.51 2.49 1.83 1.39 1.07 0.85 0.68 0.55 0.46 0.38 0.32 0.27 0.24
y direction 16.10 8.84 5.32 3.44 2.34 1.66 1.22 0.92 0.71 0.56 0.45 0.37 0.30 0.25 0.21 0.18 0.16
y direction 12.08 6.63 3.99 2.58 1.75 1.25 0.92 0.69 0.54 0.42 0.34 0.28 0.23 0.19 0.16 0.14 0.12
Two spans
L (m) = 1.00 1.25 1.50 1.75 2.00 2.25 2.50 2.75 3.00 3.25 3.50 3.75 4.00 4.25 4.50 4.75 2.00
Breaking point
x direction 33.23 26.58 22.15 18.99 16.62 14.77 13.29 12.08 11.03 9.40 8.11 7.06 6.21 5.50 4.90 4.40 3.97
y direction 33.23 26.58 22.15 18.99 16.62 14.77 13.29 12.08 11.03 9.40 8.11 7.06 6.21 5.50 4.90 4.40 3.97
y direction 46.00 27.01 16.98 11.28 7.84 5.65 4.20 3.20 2.49 1.97 1.59 1.30 1.08 0.90 0.76 0.65 0.56
y direction 30.67 18.00 11.32 7.52 5.22 3.76 2.80 2.13 1.66 1.32 1.06 0.87 0.72 0.60 0.51 0.43 0.37
y direction 23.00 13.50 8.49 5.64 3.92 2.82 2.10 1.60 1.24 0.99 0.80 0.65 0.54 0.45 0.38 0.32 0.28
Three spans
L (m) = 1.00 1.25 1.50 1.75 2.00 2.25 2.50 2.75 3.00 3.25 3.50 3.75 4.00 4.25 4.50 4.75 5.00
Breaking point
x direction 34.62 27.69 23.08 19.78 17.31 15.38 13.85 12.59 11.54 10.65 9.89 8.83 7.76 6.87 6.13 5.50 4.96
y direction 34.62 27.69 23.08 19.78 17.31 15.38 13.85 12.59 11.54 10.65 9.89 8.83 7.76 6.87 6.13 5.50 4.96
y direction 39.19 22.52 13.96 9.18 6.34 4.54 3.36 2.56 1.99 1.57 1.27 1.03 0.85 0.71 0.60 0.51 0.44
y direction 26.13 15.01 9.31 6.12 4.22 3.03 2.24 1.70 1.32 1.05 0.84 0.69 0.57 0.48 0.40 0.34 0.29
y direction 19.60 11.26 6.98 4.59 3.17 2.27 1.68 1.28 0.99 0.79 0.63 0.52 0.43 0.36 0.30 0.26 0.22


Lk in m in kN
2.00 96.4
2.25 79.9
2.50 67.1
2.75 57.0
3.00 49.0
3.25 42.4
3.50 37.1
3.75 32.7
4.00 29.0
4.25 25.9
4.50 23.2
4.75 21.0
5.00 19.0
5.25 17.3
5.50 15.8
5.75 14.5 Geometry
6.00 13.4 H 100 mm
6.25 12.4 B 60 mm
6.50 11.5 T1 8 mm
6.75 10.7 T2 8 mm
7.00 9.9 R 4 mm
7.25 9.3
7.75 8.1 A 2 320 mm2
8.00 7.6 Ixx 2 850 000 mm4
Wxx 57 000 mm3
Iyy
Wyy
Lk in m in kN
2.25 38.0 E0° 23 000 MPa
2.50 31.3 fc, 0° 240 Mpa
2.75 26.2
3.25 19.1 γm,E 1.3
3.50 16.6 γm,f 1.3
3.75 14.5
4.25 11.4
242.5 kN
4.50 10.2
4.75 9.2
Dead weight
5.00 8.3
2.36 kg/m
5.25 7.5
5.50 6.9
Buckling length
5.75 6.3
6.00 5.8
6.25 5.3
6.50 4.9
6.75 4.6
7.00 4.3
7.25 4.0
7.50 3.7 Lk = L 0.7L 0.5L 2L
7.75 3.5
8.00 3.3

BLoad-bearing capacity in kN/m - Square tube 100 x 60 x 8 - B
One span
L (m) = 1.00 1.25 1.50 1.75 2.00 2.25 2.50 2.75 3.00 3.25 3.50 3.75 4.00 4.25 4.50 4.75 5.00
Breaking point
x direction 55.38 44.31 36.92 27.49 21.05 16.63 13.47 11.13 9.35 7.97 6.87 5.99 5.26 4.66 4.16 3.73 3.37
y direction 33.23 26.58 22.15 18.99 14.89 11.77 9.53 7.88 6.62 5.64 4.86 4.24 3.72 3.30 2.94 2.64 2.38
y direction 9.69 5.13 3.03 1.93 1.30 0.92 0.67 0.51 0.39 0.31 0.25 0.20 0.17 0.14 0.12 0.10 0.09
y direction 6.46 3.42 2.02 1.29 0.87 0.61 0.45 0.34 0.26 0.21 0.16 0.13 0.11 0.09 0.08 0.07 0.06
y direction 4.84 2.57 1.51 0.96 0.65 0.46 0.34 0.25 0.20 0.15 0.12 0.10 0.08 0.07 0.06 0.05 0.04
Two spans
L (m) = 1.00 1.25 1.50 1.75 2.00 2.25 2.50 2.75 3.00 3.25 3.50 3.75 4.00 4.25 4.50 4.75 2.00
Breaking point
x direction 44.31 35.45 29.54 25.32 21.05 16.63 13.47 11.13 9.35 7.97 6.87 5.99 5.26 4.66 4.16 3.73 3.37
y direction 26.58 21.27 17.72 15.19 13.29 11.77 9.53 7.88 6.62 5.64 4.86 4.24 3.72 3.30 2.94 2.64 2.38
y direction 20.58 11.35 6.85 4.43 3.02 2.15 1.58 1.20 0.93 0.73 0.59 0.48 0.39 0.33 0.28 0.24 0.20
y direction 13.72 7.56 4.57 2.95 2.01 1.43 1.05 0.80 0.62 0.49 0.39 0.32 0.26 0.22 0.19 0.16 0.14
y direction 10.29 5.67 3.43 2.22 1.51 1.07 0.79 0.60 0.46 0.37 0.29 0.24 0.20 0.16 0.14 0.12 0.10
Three spans
L (m) = 1.00 1.25 1.50 1.75 2.00 2.25 2.50 2.75 3.00 3.25 3.50 3.75 4.00 4.25 4.50 4.75 5.00
Breaking point
x direction 46.15 36.92 30.77 26.37 23.08 20.51 16.84 13.91 11.69 9.96 8.59 7.48 6.58 5.83 5.20 4.66 4.21
y direction 27.69 22.15 18.46 15.82 13.85 12.31 11.08 9.84 8.27 7.05 6.08 5.29 4.65 4.12 3.68 3.30 2.98
y direction 16.92 9.20 5.51 3.55 2.41 1.71 1.26 0.95 0.73 0.58 0.46 0.38 0.31 0.26 0.22 0.19 0.16
y direction 11.28 6.14 3.68 2.36 1.61 1.14 0.84 0.63 0.49 0.39 0.31 0.25 0.21 0.17 0.15 0.12 0.11
y direction 8.46 4.60 2.76 1.77 1.21 0.85 0.63 0.47 0.37 0.29 0.23 0.19 0.16 0.13 0.11 0.09 0.08


Lk in m in kN
2.00 158.6
2.25 133.5
2.50 113.4
2.75 97.2
3.00 84.1
3.25 73.3
3.50 64.4
3.75 57.0
4.00 50.7
4.25 45.4
4.50 40.9
4.75 37.0
5.00 33.6
5.25 30.6
5.50 28.0
5.75 25.8 Geometry
6.00 23.8 H 100 mm
6.25 22.0 B 100 mm
6.50 20.4 T1 8 mm
6.75 18.9 T2 8 mm
7.00 17.7 R 4 mm
7.25 16.5
7.75 14.5 A 2 958 mm2
8.00 13.6 Ixx 4 207 621 mm4
Wxx 84 152 mm3
Iyy
Wyy
Lk in m in kN
2.25 133.5 E0° 23 000 MPa
2.50 113.4 fc, 0° 240 Mpa
2.75 97.2
3.25 73.3 γm,E 1.3
3.50 64.4 γm,f 1.3
3.75 57.0
4.25 45.4
546.0 kN
4.50 40.9
4.75 37.0
Dead weight
5.00 33.6
5.32 kg/m
5.25 30.6
5.50 28.0
Buckling length
5.75 25.8
6.00 23.8
6.25 22.0
6.50 20.4
6.75 18.9
7.00 17.7
7.25 16.5
7.50 15.5 Lk = L 0.7L 0.5L 2L
7.75 14.5
8.00 13.6

One span
L (m) = 1.00 1.25 1.50 1.75 2.00 2.25 2.50 2.75 3.00 3.25 3.50 3.75 4.00 4.25 4.50 4.75 5.00
Breaking point
x/y direction 55.38 44.31 36.92 31.65 27.69 24.55 19.89 16.43 13.81 11.77 10.15 8.84 7.77 6.88 6.14 5.51 4.97
Two spans
L (m) = 1.00 1.25 1.50 1.75 2.00 2.25 2.50 2.75 3.00 3.25 3.50 3.75 4.00 4.25 4.50 4.75 5.00
Breaking point
x/y direction 44.31 35.45 29.54 25.32 22.15 19.69 17.72 16.11 13.81 11.77 10.15 8.84 7.77 6.88 6.14 5.51 4.97
Three spans
L (m) = 1.00 1.25 1.50 1.75 2.00 2.25 2.50 2.75 3.00 3.25 3.50 3.75 4.00 4.25 4.50 4.75 5.00
Breaking point
x/y direction 46.15 36.92 30.77 26.37 23.08 20.51 18.46 16.78 15.38 14.20 12.68 11.05 9.71 8.60 7.67 6.89 6.21


Lk in m in kN
2.00 172.4
2.25 146.7
2.50 125.7
2.75 108.6
3.00 94.5
3.25 82.8
3.50 73.0
3.75 64.8
4.00 57.8
4.25 51.9
4.50 46.8
4.75 42.4
5.00 38.6
5.25 35.3
5.50 32.3
5.75 29.7 Geometry
6.00 27.4 H 120 mm
6.25 25.4 B 120 mm
6.50 23.6 T1 6 mm
6.75 21.9 T2 6 mm
7.00 20.5 R 4 mm
7.25 19.1
7.75 16.8 A 2 750 mm2
8.00 15.8 Ixx 5 981 335 mm4
Wxx 99 689 mm3
Iyy
Wyy
Lk in m in kN
2.25 146.7 E0° 23 000 MPa
2.50 125.7 fc, 0° 240 Mpa
2.75 108.6
3.25 82.8 γm,E 1.3
3.50 73.0 γm,f 1.3
3.75 64.8
4.25 51.9
507.6 kN
4.50 46.8
4.75 42.4
Dead weight
5.00 38.6
4.95 kg/m
5.25 35.3
5.50 32.3
Buckling length
5.75 29.7
6.00 27.4
6.25 25.4
6.50 23.6
6.75 21.9
7.00 20.5
7.25 19.1
7.50 17.9
Lk = L 0.7L 0.5L 2L
7.75 16.8
8.00 15.8

One span
L (m) = 1.00 1.25 1.50 1.75 2.00 2.25 2.50 2.75 3.00 3.25 3.50 3.75 4.00 4.25 4.50 4.75 5.00
Breaking point
x/y direction 49.85 39.88 33.23 28.48 24.92 22.15 19.94 18.13 16.36 13.94 12.02 10.47 9.20 8.15 7.27 6.53 5.89
Two spans
L (m) = 1.00 1.25 1.50 1.75 2.00 2.25 2.50 2.75 3.00 3.25 3.50 3.75 4.00 4.25 4.50 4.75 5.00
Breaking point
x/y direction 39.88 31.90 26.58 22.79 19.94 17.72 15.95 14.50 13.29 12.27 11.39 10.47 9.20 8.15 7.27 6.53 5.89
Three spans
L (m) = 1.00 1.25 1.50 1.75 2.00 2.25 2.50 2.75 3.00 3.25 3.50 3.75 4.00 4.25 4.50 4.75 5.00
Breaking point
x/y direction 41.54 33.23 27.69 23.74 20.77 18.46 16.62 15.10 13.85 12.78 11.87 11.08 10.38 9.77 9.09 8.16 7.36


Lk in m in kN
2.00 220.6
2.25 187.4
2.50 160.4
2.75 138.3
3.00 120.2
3.25 105.3
3.50 92.8
3.75 82.3
4.00 73.5
4.25 65.9
4.50 59.4
4.75 53.8
5.00 49.0
5.25 44.7
5.50 41.0
5.75 37.7 Geometry
6.00 34.8 H 120 mm
6.25 32.2 B 120 mm
6.50 29.9 T1 8 mm
6.75 27.8 T2 8 mm
7.00 25.9 R 4 mm
7.25 24.2
7.75 21.3 A 3 598 mm2
8.00 20.0 Ixx 7 567 059 mm4
Wxx 126 118 mm3
Iyy
Wyy
Lk in m in kN
2.25 187.4 E0° 23 000 MPa
2.50 160.4 fc, 0° 240 Mpa
2.75 138.3
3.25 105.3 γm,E 1.3
3.50 92.8 γm,f 1.3
3.75 82.3
4.25 65.9
664.2 kN
4.50 59.4
4.75 53.8
Dead weight
5.00 49.0
6.48 kg/m
5.25 44.7
5.50 41.0
Buckling length
5.75 37.7
6.00 34.8
6.25 32.2
6.50 29.9
6.75 27.8
7.00 25.9
7.25 24.2
7.50 22.7 Lk = L 0.7L 0.5L 2L
7.75 21.3
8.00 20.0

One span
L (m) = 1.00 1.25 1.50 1.75 2.00 2.25 2.50 2.75 3.00 3.25 3.50 3.75 4.00 4.25 4.50 4.75 5.00
Breaking point
x/y direction 66.46 53.17 44.31 37.98 33.23 29.54 26.58 24.17 20.70 17.63 15.21 13.25 11.64 10.31 9.20 8.26 7.45
Two spans
L (m) = 1.00 1.25 1.50 1.75 2.00 2.25 2.50 2.75 3.00 3.25 3.50 3.75 4.00 4.25 4.50 4.75 5.00
Breaking point
x/y direction 53.17 42.54 35.45 30.38 26.58 23.63 21.27 19.33 17.72 16.36 15.19 13.25 11.64 10.31 9.20 8.26 7.45
Three spans
L (m) = 1.00 1.25 1.50 1.75 2.00 2.25 2.50 2.75 3.00 3.25 3.50 3.75 4.00 4.25 4.50 4.75 5.00
Breaking point
x/y direction 55.38 44.31 36.92 31.65 27.69 24.62 22.15 20.14 18.46 17.04 15.82 14.77 13.85 12.89 11.50 10.32 9.31


Lk in m in kN
2.00 478.7
2.25 425.3
2.50 378.2
2.75 336.9
3.00 300.9
3.25 269.6
3.50 242.4
3.75 218.7
4.00 198.0
4.25 179.8
4.50 163.9
4.75 149.9
5.00 137.5
5.25 126.5
5.50 116.7
5.75 107.9 Geometry
6.00 100.1 H 160 mm
6.25 93.1 B 160 mm
6.50 86.7 T1 8 mm
6.75 81.0 T2 8 mm
7.00 75.8 R 8 mm
7.25 71.0
7.75 62.8 A 4 919 mm2
8.00 59.2 Ixx 19 052 487 mm4
Wxx 238 156 mm3
Iyy
Wyy
Lk in m in kN
2.25 425.3 E0° 23 000 MPa
2.50 378.2 fc, 0° 240 Mpa
2.75 336.9
3.25 269.6 γm,E 1.3
3.50 242.4 γm,f 1.3
3.75 218.7
4.25 179.8
908.1 kN
4.50 163.9
4.75 149.9
Dead weight
5.00 137.5
8.85 kg/m
5.25 126.5
5.50 116.7
Buckling length
5.75 107.9
6.00 100.1
6.25 93.1
6.50 86.7
6.75 81.0
7.00 75.8
7.25 71.0
7.50 66.7
Lk = L 0.7L 0.5L 2L
7.75 62.8
8.00 59.2

One span
L (m) = 2.00 2.25 2.50 2.75 3.00 3.25 3.50 3.75 4.00 4.25 4.50 4.75 5.00 5.25 5.50 5.75 6.00
Breaking point
x/y direction 44.31 39.38 35.45 32.22 29.54 27.27 25.32 23.63 21.98 19.47 17.37 15.59 14.07 12.76 11.63 10.64 9.77
Two spans
L (m) = 2.00 2.25 2.50 2.75 3.00 3.25 3.50 3.75 4.00 4.25 4.50 4.75 5.00 5.25 5.50 5.75 6.00
Breaking point
x/y direction 35.45 31.51 28.36 25.78 23.63 21.81 20.25 18.90 17.72 16.68 15.75 14.92 14.07 12.76 11.63 10.64 9.77
Three spans
L (m) = 2.00 2.25 2.50 2.75 3.00 3.25 3.50 3.75 4.00 4.25 4.50 4.75 5.00 5.25 5.50 5.75 6.00
Breaking point
x/y direction 36.92 32.82 29.54 26.85 24.62 22.72 21.10 19.69 18.46 17.38 16.41 15.55 14.77 14.07 13.43 12.84 12.21


Lk in m in kN
3.00 619.2
3.25 564.0
3.50 514.5
3.75 470.2
4.00 430.5
4.25 395.0
4.50 363.3
4.75 334.8
5.00 309.3
5.25 286.3
5.50 265.7
5.75 247.0
6.00 230.1
6.25 214.8
6.50 200.9
6.75 188.2 Geometry
7.00 176.7 H 200 mm
7.25 166.1 B 200 mm
7.50 156.4 T1 10 mm
7.75 147.5 T2 10 mm
8.00 139.3 R 10 mm
8.25 131.8
8.75 118.4 A 7 686 mm2
9.00 112.4 Ixx 46 514 860 mm4
Wxx 465 149 mm3
Iyy
Wyy
Lk in m in kN
3.25 564.0 E0° 23 000 MPa
3.50 514.5 fc, 0° 240 Mpa
3.75 470.2
4.25 395.0 γm,E 1.3
4.50 363.3 γm,f 1.3
4.75 334.8
5.25 286.3
1418.9 kN
5.50 265.7
5.75 247.0
Dead weight
6.00 230.1
13.84 kg/m
6.25 214.8
6.50 200.9
Buckling length
6.75 188.2
7.00 176.7
7.25 166.1
7.50 156.4
7.75 147.5
8.00 139.3
8.25 131.8
8.50 124.8 Lk = L 0.7L 0.5L 2L
8.75 118.4
9.00 112.4

One span
L (m) = 2.00 2.25 2.50 2.75 3.00 3.25 3.50 3.75 4.00 4.25 4.50 4.75 5.00 5.25 5.50 5.75 6.00
Breaking point
x/y direction 69.23 61.54 55.38 50.35 46.15 42.60 39.56 36.92 34.62 32.58 30.77 29.15 27.48 24.92 22.71 20.78 19.08
Two spans
L (m) = 2.00 2.25 2.50 2.75 3.00 3.25 3.50 3.75 4.00 4.25 4.50 4.75 5.00 5.25 5.50 5.75 6.00
Breaking point
x/y direction 55.38 49.23 44.31 40.28 36.92 34.08 31.65 29.54 27.69 26.06 24.62 23.32 22.15 21.10 20.14 19.26 18.46
Three spans
L (m) = 2.00 2.25 2.50 2.75 3.00 3.25 3.50 3.75 4.00 4.25 4.50 4.75 5.00 5.25 5.50 5.75 6.00
Breaking point
x/y direction 57.69 51.28 46.15 41.96 38.46 35.50 32.97 30.77 28.85 27.15 25.64 24.29 23.08 21.98 20.98 20.07 19.23


Lk in m in kN
4.00 787.5
4.25 729.7
4.50 677.0
4.75 629.0
5.00 585.2
5.25 545.3
5.50 509.0
5.75 475.8
6.00 445.4
6.25 417.6
6.50 392.2
6.75 368.8
7.00 347.3
7.25 327.5
7.50 309.3
7.75 292.5 Geometry
8.00 276.9 H 240 mm
8.25 262.5 B 240 mm
8.50 249.2 T1 12 mm
8.75 236.8 T2 12 mm
9.00 225.2 R 12 mm
9.25 214.5
9.75 195.1 A 11 068 mm2
10.00 186.3 Ixx 96 453 214 mm4
Wxx 803 777 mm3
Iyy
Wyy
Lk in m in kN
4.25 729.7 E0° 23 000 MPa
4.50 677.0 fc, 0° 240 Mpa
4.75 629.0
5.25 545.3 γm,E 1.3
5.50 509.0 γm,f 1.3
5.75 475.8
6.25 417.6
2043.3 kN
6.50 392.2
6.75 368.8
Dead weight
7.00 347.3
19.92 kg/m
7.25 327.5
7.50 309.3
Buckling length
7.75 292.5
8.00 276.9
8.25 262.5
8.50 249.2
8.75 236.8
9.00 225.2
9.25 214.5
9.50 204.5
Lk = L 0.7L 0.5L 2L
9.75 195.1
10.00 186.3

One span
L (m) = 2.50 2.75 3.00 3.25 3.50 3.75 4.00 4.25 4.50 4.75 5.00 5.25 5.50 5.75 6.00 6.25 6.50
Breaking point
x/y direction 79.75 72.50 66.46 61.35 56.97 53.17 49.85 46.91 44.31 41.98 39.88 37.98 36.25 34.68 32.98 30.39 28.10
Two spans
L (m) = 2.50 2.75 3.00 3.25 3.50 3.75 4.00 4.25 4.50 4.75 5.00 5.25 5.50 5.75 6.00 6.25 6.50
Breaking point
x/y direction 63.80 58.00 53.17 49.08 45.57 42.54 39.88 37.53 35.45 33.58 31.90 30.38 29.00 27.74 26.58 25.52 24.54
Three spans
L (m) = 2.50 2.75 3.00 3.25 3.50 3.75 4.00 4.25 4.50 4.75 5.00 5.25 5.50 5.75 6.00 6.25 6.50
Breaking point
x/y direction 66.46 60.42 55.38 51.12 47.47 44.31 41.54 39.10 36.92 34.98 33.23 31.65 30.21 28.90 27.69 26.58 25.56

Axial load-bearing capacity in kN - Tube profile Ø75/65 - A

Buckling
Lk in m in kN
0.50 142.0
0.60 125.4
0.70 110.2
0.80 96.7
0.90 84.9
1.00 74.7
1.10 65.9
1.20 58.4
1.30 52.0
1.40 46.5
1.50 41.7
1.60 37.6
1.70 34.0
1.80 30.9
1.90 28.2
Geometry
2.00 25.8
D1 75 mm
2.10 23.7
D2 65 mm
2.20 21.8
T1 5 mm
2.30 20.1
2.40 18.6
2.50 17.3
A 1 100 mm2
2.60 16.1
Ixx 676 915 mm4
2.70 15.0
Wxx 18 051 mm3
2.80 14.0
3.00 12.3 Ak,y 550 mm2
Material properties
E0° 23 000 MPa
fc, 0° 240 Mpa
Partial coefficients
γm,E 1.3
γm,f 1.3

203.0 kN
Dead weight
1.98 kg/m
Buckling length
Lk = L 0.7L 0.5L 2L

Load-bearing capacity in kN/m - Tube profile Ø75/65 - B
One span
L (m) = 0.50 0.60 0.70 0.80 0.90 1.00 1.10 1.20 1.30 1.40 1.50 1.75 2.00 2.25 2.50 2.75 3.00
Breaking point
x/y direction 42.29 35.24 30.21 26.43 23.49 21.15 19.22 17.62 15.78 13.60 11.85 8.71 6.67 5.27 4.27 3.53 2.96
Two spans
L (m) = 0.50 0.60 0.70 0.80 0.90 1.00 1.10 1.20 1.30 1.40 1.50 1.75 2.00 2.25 2.50 2.75 3.00
Breaking point
x/y direction 33.83 28.19 24.17 21.15 18.80 16.92 15.38 14.10 13.01 12.08 11.28 8.71 6.67 5.27 4.27 3.53 2.96
Three spans
L (m) = 0.50 0.60 0.70 0.80 0.90 1.00 1.10 1.20 1.30 1.40 1.50 1.75 2.00 2.25 2.50 2.75 3.00
Breaking point
x/y direction 35.24 29.37 25.17 22.03 19.58 17.62 16.02 14.68 13.55 12.59 11.75 10.07 8.33 6.58 5.33 4.41 3.70

Axial load-bearing capacity in kN - Tube profile Ø90/80 - A

Buckling
Lk in m in kN
0.50 190.8
0.60 173.6
0.70 156.8
0.80 141.1
0.90 126.7
1.00 113.8
1.10 102.2
1.20 92.0
1.30 82.9
1.40 75.0
1.50 68.0
1.60 61.8
1.70 56.4
1.80 51.6
1.90 47.3 Geometry
2.00 43.5 90 mm
D1
2.25 35.7
D2 80 mm
2.50 29.7
T1 5 mm
2.75 25.1
3.25 18.5 A 1 335 mm2
3.50 16.1
Ixx 1 210 004 mm4
3.75 14.2
Wxx 26 889 mm3
4.00 12.5
Ak,y 668 mm2
5.00 8.2
Material properties
E0° 23 000 MPa
fc, 0° 240 Mpa
γm,E 1.3
γm,f 1.3

246.5 kN
Dead weight
2.40 kg/m
Buckling length
Lk = L 0.7L 0.5L 2L

Load-bearing capacity in kN/m - Tube profile Ø90/80 - B
One span
L (m) = 1.00 1.10 1.20 1.30 1.40 1.50 1.60 1.70 1.80 1.90 2.00 2.20 2.40 2.60 2.80 3.00 3.50
Breaking point
x/y direction 25.68 23.34 21.40 19.75 18.34 17.12 15.51 13.74 12.26 11.00 9.93 8.21 6.89 5.87 5.07 4.41 3.24
Two spans
L (m) = 1.00 1.10 1.20 1.30 1.40 1.50 1.60 1.70 1.80 1.90 2.00 2.20 2.40 2.60 2.80 3.00 3.50
Breaking point
x/y direction 20.54 18.67 17.12 15.80 14.67 13.69 12.84 12.08 11.41 10.81 9.93 8.21 6.89 5.87 5.07 4.41 3.24
εmax < L / 200 x/y direction 19.44 15.25 12.15 9.82 8.04 6.66 5.57 4.70 4.01 3.44 2.97 2.26 1.76 1.39 1.12 0.92 0.58
Three spans
L (m) = 1.00 1.10 1.20 1.30 1.40 1.50 1.60 1.70 1.80 1.90 2.00 2.20 2.40 2.60 2.80 3.00 3.50
Breaking point
x/y direction 21.40 19.45 17.83 16.46 15.28 14.26 13.37 12.59 11.89 11.26 10.70 9.73 8.62 7.34 6.33 5.52 4.05

Axial load-bearing capacity in kN - T 60 x 60 x 6 x 6 - A

Lk in m in kN
0.70 51.0
0.80 43.0
0.90 36.5
1.00 31.2
1.10 26.9
1.20 23.4
1.30 20.5
1.40 18.0
1.50 16.0
1.60 14.3
1.70 12.8
1.80 11.6
1.90 10.5
2.00 9.5
2.10 8.7
2.20 8.0 Geometry
2.30 7.3 H 60 mm
2.40 6.8 B 60 mm
2.50 6.3 T1 6 mm
2.60 5.8 T2 6 mm
2.70 5.4 R 7 mm
2.80 5.0
3.00 4.4 A 705 mm2
3.50 3.3 Ixx 235 221 mm4
Wxx 5 460 mm3
e1 43 mm2
Iyy 109 446 mm4
Lk in m in kN 288 mm2
Ak,x
0.50 48.2
0.70 30.0 E0° 23 000 MPa
0.80 24.3 fc, 0° 240 Mpa
0.90 20.0
1.10 14.1 γm,E 1.3
1.20 12.0
γm,f 1.3
1.30 10.4
1.40 9.1
1.50 8.0
130.2 kN
1.60 7.1
1.70 6.3
1.90 5.1 1.27 kg/m
2.00 4.6
2.20 3.8
2.30 3.5
2.40 3.2
2.50 3.0
2.60 2.8
2.70 2.6
2.80 2.4 Lk = L 0.7L 0.5L 2L
3.00 2.1

Load-bearing capacity in kN/m - T 60 x 60 x 6 x 6 - B
One span
L (m) = 1.00 1.20 1.40 1.60 1.80 2.00 2.20 2.40 2.60 2.80 3.00 3.20 3.40 3.60 3.80 4.00 4.20
Breaking point
x direction 8.06 5.60 4.11 3.15 2.49 2.02 1.67 1.40 1.19 1.03 0.90 0.79 0.70 0.62 0.56 0.50 0.46
y direction 5.39 3.74 2.75 2.10 1.66 1.35 1.11 0.94 0.80 0.69 0.60 0.53 0.47 0.42 0.37 0.34 0.31
y direction 0.94 0.55 0.35 0.23 0.16 0.12 0.09 0.07 0.05 0.04 0.04 0.03 0.02 0.02 0.02 0.02 0.01
y direction 0.63 0.37 0.23 0.16 0.11 0.08 0.06 0.05 0.04 0.03 0.02 0.02 0.02 0.01 0.01 0.01 0.01
y direction 0.47 0.28 0.17 0.12 0.08 0.06 0.05 0.03 0.03 0.02 0.02 0.01 0.01 0.01 0.01 0.01 0.01
Two spans
L (m) = 1.00 1.20 1.40 1.60 1.80 2.00 2.20 2.40 2.60 2.80 3.00 3.20 3.40 3.60 3.80 4.00 4.20
Breaking point
x direction 8.06 5.60 4.11 3.15 2.49 2.02 1.67 1.40 1.19 1.03 0.90 0.79 0.70 0.62 0.56 0.50 0.46
y direction 5.39 3.74 2.75 2.10 1.66 1.35 1.11 0.94 0.80 0.69 0.60 0.53 0.47 0.42 0.37 0.34 0.31
y direction 2.18 1.28 0.82 0.55 0.39 0.29 0.22 0.17 0.13 0.10 0.09 0.07 0.06 0.05 0.04 0.04 0.03
y direction 1.45 0.86 0.55 0.37 0.26 0.19 0.14 0.11 0.09 0.07 0.06 0.05 0.04 0.03 0.03 0.02 0.02
y direction 1.09 0.64 0.41 0.28 0.20 0.14 0.11 0.08 0.07 0.05 0.04 0.04 0.03 0.02 0.02 0.02 0.02
Three spans
L (m) = 1.00 1.20 1.40 1.60 1.80 2.00 2.20 2.40 2.60 2.80 3.00 3.20 3.40 3.60 3.80 4.00 4.20
Breaking point
x direction 10.08 7.00 5.14 3.94 3.11 2.52 2.08 1.75 1.49 1.29 1.12 0.98 0.87 0.78 0.70 0.63 0.57
y direction 6.74 4.68 3.44 2.63 2.08 1.68 1.39 1.17 1.00 0.86 0.75 0.66 0.58 0.52 0.47 0.42 0.38
y direction 1.74 1.02 0.65 0.44 0.31 0.23 0.17 0.13 0.10 0.08 0.07 0.06 0.05 0.04 0.03 0.03 0.02
y direction 1.16 0.68 0.43 0.29 0.21 0.15 0.11 0.09 0.07 0.06 0.04 0.04 0.03 0.03 0.02 0.02 0.02
y direction 0.87 0.51 0.32 0.22 0.15 0.11 0.08 0.07 0.05 0.04 0.03 0.03 0.02 0.02 0.02 0.01 0.01

Axial load-bearing capacity in kN - T 90 x 72 x 11 x 10 - A

Lk in m in kN
1.00 128.2
1.10 114.4
1.20 102.4
1.30 91.9
1.40 82.8
1.50 74.8
1.60 67.8
1.70 61.6
1.80 56.2
1.90 51.4
2.00 47.2
2.10 43.5
2.20 40.1
2.30 37.1
2.40 34.4
2.50 32.0 Geometry
2.60 29.9 H 90 mm
2.70 27.9 B 72 mm
2.80 26.1 T1 11 mm
2.90 24.5 T2 10 mm
3.00 23.0 R 7 mm
3.10 21.6
3.30 19.3 A 1 621 mm2
3.50 17.2 Ixx 1 284 135 mm4
Wxx 21 230 mm3
e1 60,5 mm2
Iyy 320 999 mm4
Lk in m in kN 576 mm2
Ak,x
0.50 128.2
0.70 82.8 E0° 23 000 MPa
0.80 67.8 fc, 0° 240 Mpa
0.90 56.2
1.10 40.1 γm,E 1.3
1.20 34.4
γm,f 1.3
1.30 29.9
1.40 26.1
1.50 23.0
299.3 kN
1.60 20.4
1.70 18.2
1.90 14.8 2.92 kg/m
2.00 13.4
2.20 11.1
2.30 10.2
2.40 9.4
2.50 8.7
2.60 8.1
2.70 7.5
2.80 7.0 Lk = L 0.7L 0.5L 2L
3.00 6.1

Load-bearing capacity in kN/m - T 90 x 72 x 11 x 10 - B
One span
L (m) = 1.00 1.20 1.40 1.60 1.80 2.00 2.20 2.40 2.60 2.80 3.00 3.20 3.40 3.60 3.80 4.00 4.20
Breaking point
x direction 31.36 21.77 16.00 12.25 9.68 7.84 6.48 5.44 4.64 4.00 3.48 3.06 2.71 2.42 2.17 1.96 1.78
y direction 13.17 9.15 6.72 5.14 4.06 3.29 2.72 2.29 1.95 1.68 1.46 1.29 1.14 1.02 0.91 0.82 0.75
y direction 2.72 1.60 1.01 0.68 0.48 0.35 0.26 0.20 0.16 0.13 0.10 0.09 0.07 0.06 0.05 0.04 0.04
y direction 1.82 1.07 0.68 0.46 0.32 0.24 0.18 0.14 0.11 0.09 0.07 0.06 0.05 0.04 0.03 0.03 0.03
y direction 1.36 0.80 0.51 0.34 0.24 0.18 0.13 0.10 0.08 0.06 0.05 0.04 0.04 0.03 0.03 0.02 0.02
Two spans
L (m) = 1.00 1.20 1.40 1.60 1.80 2.00 2.20 2.40 2.60 2.80 3.00 3.20 3.40 3.60 3.80 4.00 4.20
Breaking point
x direction 28.94 21.77 16.00 12.25 9.68 7.84 6.48 5.44 4.64 4.00 3.48 3.06 2.71 2.42 2.17 1.96 1.78
y direction 13.17 9.15 6.72 5.14 4.06 3.29 2.72 2.29 1.95 1.68 1.46 1.29 1.14 1.02 0.91 0.82 0.75
y direction 6.20 3.69 2.36 1.60 1.13 0.83 0.63 0.48 0.38 0.31 0.25 0.21 0.17 0.14 0.12 0.11 0.09
y direction 4.13 2.46 1.58 1.07 0.76 0.55 0.42 0.32 0.25 0.20 0.17 0.14 0.11 0.10 0.08 0.07 0.06
y direction 3.10 1.84 1.18 0.80 0.57 0.42 0.31 0.24 0.19 0.15 0.12 0.10 0.09 0.07 0.06 0.05 0.05
Three spans
L (m) = 1.00 1.20 1.40 1.60 1.80 2.00 2.20 2.40 2.60 2.80 3.00 3.20 3.40 3.60 3.80 4.00 4.20
Breaking point
x direction 30.14 25.12 20.00 15.31 12.10 9.80 8.10 6.80 5.80 5.00 4.35 3.83 3.39 3.02 2.71 2.45 2.22
y direction 16.46 11.43 8.40 6.43 5.08 4.12 3.40 2.86 2.44 2.10 1.83 1.61 1.42 1.27 1.14 1.03 0.93
y direction 4.98 2.95 1.88 1.27 0.90 0.66 0.50 0.38 0.30 0.24 0.20 0.16 0.14 0.11 0.10 0.08 0.07
y direction 3.32 1.96 1.25 0.85 0.60 0.44 0.33 0.26 0.20 0.16 0.13 0.11 0.09 0.08 0.06 0.06 0.05
y direction 2.49 1.47 0.94 0.64 0.45 0.33 0.25 0.19 0.15 0.12 0.10 0.08 0.07 0.06 0.05 0.04 0.04

Axial load-bearing capacity in kN - L 50 x 50 x 6 - A

Lk in m in kN
0.50 49.3
0.75 29.5
1.00 18.9
1.25 12.9
1.50 9.3
1.75 7.0
2.00 5.5
2.25 4.4
2.50 3.6
3.00 2.5
Geometry
Design value for compressive H 50 mm
load-bearing capacity B 50 mm
Buckling in x direction T1 6 mm
Buckling length Load-bearing capacity T2 6 mm
Lk in m in kN R 7 mm
0.50 49.3 e1 14.6 mm
0.75 29.5 e2 14.6 mm
o
1.00 18.9 v -45.0
1.25 12.9
1.75 7.0 A 575 mm2
2.00 5.5 Ixx 131 802 mm4
2.25 4.4 Wxx 3 720 mm3
2.50 3.6 Ak,y 270 mm2
3.00 2.5 Iyy 131 802 mm4
Wyy 3 720 mm3
Design value for compressive 270 mm2
Ak,x
Izz 206 972 mm4
Buckling in e direction
Iee 56 632 mm4
Lk in m in kN Material properties
0.50 61.2 E0° 23 000 MPa
0.75 40.0 240 Mpa
fc, 0°
1.00 27.0
1.50 13.9 γm,E 1.3
1.75 10.6
γm,f 1.3
2.00 8.3
2.25 6.7
2.50 5.5
106.1 kN
3.00 3.9
Design value for compressive Max. compressive load-bearing capacity with

load-bearing capacity unbraced flanges
Buckling in z direction 62.9 kN

Dead weight
Lk in m in kN
1.03 kg/m
0.20 74.2
0.40 39.1
Buckling length
0.60 21.8
0.80 13.5
1.00 9.0
1.20 6.4
1.40 4.8
1.60 3.7
1.80 3.0
Lk = L 0.7L 0.5L 2L
2.00 2.4

Load-bearing capacity in kN/m - L 50 x 50 x 6 - B
One span
L (m) = 0.30 0.40 0.50 0.60 0.70 0.80 0.90 1.00 1.10 1.20 1.30 1.40 1.50 1.60 1.70 1.80 2.00
Breaking point
Design value for load-bearing capacity 34.62 25.96 20.77 15.26 11.21 8.59 6.78 5.49 4.54 3.82 3.25 2.80 2.44 2.15 1.90 1.70 1.37
δmax < L / 200 30.81 14.85 8.14 4.90 3.16 2.15 1.53 1.12 0.85 0.66 0.52 0.42 0.34 0.28 0.23 0.20 0.14
δmax < L / 300 20.54 9.90 5.43 3.27 2.11 1.44 1.02 0.75 0.57 0.44 0.35 0.28 0.23 0.19 0.16 0.13 0.10
δmax < L / 400 15.41 7.43 4.07 2.45 1.58 1.08 0.76 0.56 0.42 0.33 0.26 0.21 0.17 0.14 0.12 0.10 0.07
Two spans
L (m) = 0.30 0.40 0.50 0.60 0.70 0.80 0.90 1.00 1.10 1.20 1.30 1.40 1.50 1.60 1.70 1.80 2.00
Breaking point
δmax < L / 200 52.87 28.38 16.63 10.44 6.93 4.81 3.47 2.57 1.96 1.53 1.21 0.98 0.80 0.66 0.55 0.47 0.34
δmax < L / 300 35.25 18.92 11.09 6.96 4.62 3.21 2.31 1.72 1.31 1.02 0.81 0.65 0.53 0.44 0.37 0.31 0.23
δmax < L / 400 26.44 14.19 8.32 5.22 3.47 2.41 1.73 1.29 0.98 0.76 0.61 0.49 0.40 0.33 0.28 0.23 0.17
Three spans
L (m) = 0.30 0.40 0.50 0.60 0.70 0.80 0.90 1.00 1.10 1.20 1.30 1.40 1.50 1.60 1.70 1.80 2.00
Breaking point
δmax < L / 200 46.48 24.16 13.86 8.58 5.64 3.89 2.79 2.06 1.57 1.22 0.96 0.78 0.63 0.52 0.44 0.37 0.27
δmax < L / 300 30.99 16.10 9.24 5.72 3.76 2.59 1.86 1.38 1.04 0.81 0.64 0.52 0.42 0.35 0.29 0.25 0.18
δmax < L / 400 23.24 12.08 6.93 4.29 2.82 1.94 1.39 1.03 0.78 0.61 0.48 0.39 0.32 0.26 0.22 0.18 0.14


Lk in m in kN
0.50 63.0
0.75 37.5 v
1.00 24.0
1.25 16.4
1.50 11.8
1.75 8.9
2.00 6.9
2.25 5.5
2.50 4.5
3.00 3.1
Geometry
0.50 63.0 e1 15.3 mm
0.75 37.5 e2 15.3 mm
o
1.00 24.0 v -45.0
1.25 16.4
1.75 8.9 A 747 mm2
2.00 6.9 Ixx 166 029 mm4
2.25 5.5 Wxx 4 789 mm3
2.50 4.5 Ak,y 360 mm2
3.00 3.1 Iyy 166 029 mm4
Wyy 4 789 mm3
load-bearing capacity Ak,x 360 mm2
Buckling in e direction Izz 260 755 mm4
Iee 71 303 mm4
Lk in m in kN
Material properties
0.50 78.5 23 000 MPa
E0°
0.75 51.0
fc, 0° 240 Mpa
1.00 34.2
1.25 24.1
1.50 17.6
1.75 13.4 λm,E 1.3
2.00 10.5 λm,f 1.3
2.25 8.4
3.00 4.9 137.8 kN

Lk in m in kN Dead weight
0.20 95.5 1.34 kg/m
0.40 49.7
0.80 17.0
1.00 11.4
1.20 8.1
1.40 6.1
1.60 4.7
1.80 3.7
2.00 3.0 Lk = L 0.7L 0.5L 2L

One span
L (m) = 0.30 0.40 0.50 0.60 0.70 0.80 0.90 1.00 1.10 1.20 1.30 1.40 1.50 1.60 1.70 1.80 2.00
Breaking point
δmax < L / 200 39.44 18.90 10.33 6.20 4.00 2.72 1.93 1.42 1.07 0.83 0.65 0.53 0.43 0.35 0.30 0.25 0.18
δmax < L / 300 26.29 12.60 6.89 4.14 2.67 1.81 1.29 0.95 0.71 0.55 0.44 0.35 0.29 0.24 0.20 0.17 0.12
δmax < L / 400 19.72 9.45 5.16 3.10 2.00 1.36 0.97 0.71 0.54 0.41 0.33 0.26 0.21 0.18 0.15 0.12 0.09
Two spans
L (m) = 0.30 0.40 0.50 0.60 0.70 0.80 0.90 1.00 1.10 1.20 1.30 1.40 1.50 1.60 1.70 1.80 2.00
Breaking point
δmax < L / 200 68.45 36.46 21.25 13.30 8.81 6.10 4.39 3.26 2.48 1.93 1.53 1.23 1.01 0.83 0.70 0.59 0.43
δmax < L / 300 45.63 24.31 14.17 8.86 5.87 4.07 2.93 2.17 1.65 1.29 1.02 0.82 0.67 0.56 0.46 0.39 0.29
δmax < L / 400 34.23 18.23 10.63 6.65 4.40 3.05 2.20 1.63 1.24 0.96 0.76 0.62 0.50 0.42 0.35 0.29 0.22


Lk in m in kN
1.50 29.8
1.75 23.0 v
2.00 18.2
2.25 14.8
2.50 12.2
2.75 10.2
3.00 8.6
3.50 6.4
4.00 5.0
4.50 4.0
Geometry
B 75 mm
1.50 29.8 e1 20.8 mm
1.75 23.0 e2 20.8 mm
o
2.00 18.2 v -45.0
2.25 14.8
2.75 10.2 A 875 mm2
3.00 8.6 Ixx 470 712 mm4
3.50 6.4 Wxx 8 686 mm3
4.00 5.0 Ak,y 405 mm2
4.50 4.0 Iyy 470 712 mm4
Wyy 8 686 mm3
Ak,x 405 mm2
Izz 738 918 mm4
Iee 202 506 mm4
Lk in m in kN
Material properties
1.50 42.3 E0° 23 000 MPa
1.75 33.4
fc, 0° 240 Mpa
2.00 26.9
2.50 18.3
3.00 13.2 γm,E 1.3
3.50 9.9
γm,f 1.3
4.00 7.7
4.50 6.1
5.00 5.0
161.4 kN
5.50 4.2

1.57 kg/m
0.50 75.4
0.80 41.2
Buckling length
1.00 29.0
1.20 21.3
1.40 16.2
1.60 12.7
1.80 10.2
2.00 8.4
2.50 5.5
Lk = L 0.7L 0.5L 2L
3.00 3.8

One span
L (m) = 0.50 0.60 0.70 0.80 0.90 1.00 1.10 1.20 1.30 1.40 1.50 1.60 1.70 1.80 1.90 2.00 2.50
Breaking point
δmax < L / 200 24.78 15.55 10.32 7.16 5.16 3.83 2.92 2.27 1.80 1.45 1.19 0.98 0.82 0.69 0.59 0.51 0.26
δmax < L / 300 16.52 10.37 6.88 4.77 3.44 2.55 1.94 1.51 1.20 0.97 0.79 0.65 0.55 0.46 0.39 0.34 0.17
δmax < L / 400 12.39 7.78 5.16 3.58 2.58 1.91 1.46 1.14 0.90 0.73 0.59 0.49 0.41 0.35 0.30 0.25 0.13
Two spans
L (m) = 0.50 0.60 0.70 0.80 0.90 1.00 1.10 1.20 1.30 1.40 1.50 1.60 1.70 1.80 1.90 2.00 2.50
Breaking point
δmax < L / 200 43.85 29.44 20.51 14.77 10.93 8.28 6.41 5.06 4.05 3.29 2.71 2.26 1.90 1.61 1.38 1.19 0.62
δmax < L / 300 29.23 19.62 13.68 9.84 7.29 5.52 4.28 3.37 2.70 2.20 1.81 1.50 1.27 1.07 0.92 0.79 0.41
δmax < L / 400 21.93 14.72 10.26 7.38 5.46 4.14 3.21 2.53 2.03 1.65 1.36 1.13 0.95 0.81 0.69 0.59 0.31


Lk in m in kN
1.50 38.3
1.75 29.6
v
2.00 23.4
2.25 18.9
2.50 15.6
2.75 13.1
3.00 11.1
3.50 8.3
4.00 6.4
4.50 5.1
Geometry
H 75 mm
B 75 mm
1.50 38.3 e1 21.6 mm
1.75 29.6 e2 21.6 mm
2.00 23.4 o
v -45.0
2.25 18.9
2.75 13.1 A 1 147 mm2
3.00 11.1 Ixx 603 367 mm4
3.50 8.3 Wxx 11 295 mm3
4.00 6.4 540 mm2
Ak,y
4.50 5.1
Iyy 603 367 mm4
Design value for compressive Wyy 11 295 mm3
Buckling in e direction Izz 950 502 mm4
Buckling length Load-bearing capacity Iee 256 232 mm4
Lk in m in kN
Material properties
1.50 54.7
E0° 23 000 MPa
1.75 43.1
2.00 34.7 fc, 0° 240 Mpa
2.50 23.6
3.50 12.7 γm,E 1.3
4.00 9.9 γm,f 1.3
4.50 7.9
5.50 5.3 211.7 kN

unbraced flanges
Buckling in z direction
99.2 kN
0.50 97.0 2.06 kg/m
0.80 52.6
1.20 27.1
1.40 20.6
1.60 16.1
1.80 13.0
2.00 10.6
2.50 6.9
3.00 4.9 Lk = L 0.7L 0.5L 2L

One span
L (m) = 0.50 0.60 0.70 0.80 0.90 1.00 1.10 1.20 1.30 1.40 1.50 1.60 1.70 1.80 1.90 2.00 2.50
Breaking point
δmax < L / 200 32.08 20.08 13.30 9.22 6.64 4.92 3.75 2.92 2.31 1.86 1.52 1.26 1.05 0.89 0.76 0.65 0.34
δmax < L / 300 21.39 13.39 8.87 6.15 4.42 3.28 2.50 1.94 1.54 1.24 1.02 0.84 0.70 0.59 0.51 0.44 0.22
δmax < L / 400 16.04 10.04 6.65 4.61 3.32 2.46 1.87 1.46 1.16 0.93 0.76 0.63 0.53 0.45 0.38 0.33 0.17
Two spans
L (m) = 0.50 0.60 0.70 0.80 0.90 1.00 1.10 1.20 1.30 1.40 1.50 1.60 1.70 1.80 1.90 2.00 2.50
Breaking point
δmax < L / 200 57.21 38.27 26.60 19.11 14.12 10.69 8.27 6.51 5.22 4.24 3.49 2.90 2.44 2.07 1.77 1.52 0.79
δmax < L / 300 38.14 25.51 17.73 12.74 9.41 7.13 5.51 4.34 3.48 2.83 2.32 1.93 1.63 1.38 1.18 1.02 0.53
δmax < L / 400 28.60 19.13 13.30 9.55 7.06 5.35 4.13 3.26 2.61 2.12 1.74 1.45 1.22 1.03 0.88 0.76 0.40


Lk in m in kN
1.50 45.8
1.75 35.5
v
2.00 28.2
2.25 22.9
2.50 18.9
2.75 15.9
3.00 13.5
3.50 10.1
4.00 7.8
4.50 6.2
Geometry
H 80 mm
B 80 mm
1.50 45.8 e1 22.8 mm
1.75 35.5 e2 22.8 mm
2.00 28.2 o
v -45.0
2.25 22.9
2.75 15.9 A 1 227 mm2
3.00 13.5 Ixx 739 184 mm4
3.50 10.1 Wxx 12 930 mm3
4.00 7.8 Ak,y 576 mm2
4.50 6.2 Iyy 739 184 mm4
Wyy 12 930 mm3
Buckling in e direction Izz 1 164 930 mm4
Iee 313 437 mm4
Lk in m in kN
Material properties
1.50 64.6 23 000 MPa
E0°
1.75 51.4
fc, 0° 240 Mpa
2.00 41.5
2.50 28.5
3.00 20.6
γm,E 1.3
3.50 15.5
γm,f 1.3
4.00 12.0
4.50 9.6
5.00 7.9
5.50 6.5 226.4 kN

0.50 111.3
2.21 kg/m
0.80 62.1
1.00 44.1
Buckling length
1.20 32.5
1.40 24.9
1.60 19.5
1.80 15.7
2.00 12.9
2.50 8.4
Lk = L 0.7L 0.5L 2L
3.00 5.9

One span
L (m) = 1.00 1.10 1.20 1.30 1.40 1.50 1.60 1.70 1.80 1.90 2.00 2.20 2.40 2.60 2.80 3.00 4.00
Breaking point
δmax < L / 200 5.97 4.55 3.55 2.81 2.27 1.86 1.54 1.29 1.09 0.93 0.80 0.60 0.46 0.37 0.29 0.24 0.10
δmax < L / 300 3.98 3.03 2.36 1.88 1.51 1.24 1.02 0.86 0.73 0.62 0.53 0.40 0.31 0.24 0.20 0.16 0.07
δmax < L / 400 2.98 2.27 1.77 1.41 1.13 0.93 0.77 0.64 0.54 0.46 0.40 0.30 0.23 0.18 0.15 0.12 0.05
Two spans
L (m) = 1.00 1.10 1.20 1.30 1.40 1.50 1.60 1.70 1.80 1.90 2.00 2.20 2.40 2.60 2.80 3.00 4.00
Breaking point
δmax < L / 200 12.78 9.92 7.84 6.29 5.12 4.22 3.52 2.96 2.51 2.15 1.86 1.41 1.09 0.86 0.69 0.57 0.24
δmax < L / 300 8.52 6.62 5.23 4.20 3.42 2.81 2.34 1.97 1.68 1.43 1.24 0.94 0.73 0.58 0.46 0.38 0.16
δmax < L / 400 6.39 4.96 3.92 3.15 2.56 2.11 1.76 1.48 1.26 1.08 0.93 0.70 0.55 0.43 0.35 0.28 0.12


Lk i m in kN
1.50 82.1
1.75 65.3
v
2.00 52.8
2.25 43.4
2.50 36.2
2.75 30.6
3.00 26.2
3.50 19.7
4.00 15.3
4.50 12.3
Geometry
B 100 mm
1.50 82.1 e1 27.8 mm
1.75 65.3 e2 27.8 Mm
o
2.00 52.8 v -45.0
2.25 43.4
2.75 30.6 A 1 547 mm2
3.00 26.2 Ixx 1 485 277 mm4
3.50 19.7 Wxx 20 581 mm3
4.00 15.3 Ak,y 720 mm2
4.50 12.3 Iyy 1 485 277 mm4
Wyy 20 581 mm3
Iee 626 319 mm4
Lk in m in kN
Material properties
1.50 111.1 E0° 23 000 MPa
1.75 91.0
fc, 0° 240 Mpa
2.00 75.3
2.50 53.3
3.00 39.2
γm,E 1.3
3.50 29.9
γm,f 1.3
4.00 23.5
4.50 18.9
5.00 15.5
5.50 12.9 285.5 kN

2.78 kg/m
0.50 172.8
0.80 106.9
Buckling length
1.00 79.1
1.20 60.0
1.40 46.7
1.60 37.2
1.80 30.2
2.00 25.0
2.50 16.5
Lk = L 0.7L 0.5L 2L
3.00 11.7

One span
L (m) = 1.00 1.10 1.20 1.30 1.40 1.50 1.60 1.70 1.80 1.90 2.00 2.20 2.40 2.60 2.80 3.00 4.00
Breaking point
δmax < L / 200 11.39 8.76 6.87 5.48 4.44 3.64 3.02 2.54 2.15 1.84 1.58 1.19 0.92 0.73 0.59 0.48 0.20
δmax < L / 300 7.59 5.84 4.58 3.65 2.96 2.43 2.02 1.69 1.43 1.22 1.05 0.80 0.62 0.49 0.39 0.32 0.14
δmax < L / 400 5.69 4.38 3.43 2.74 2.22 1.82 1.51 1.27 1.07 0.92 0.79 0.60 0.46 0.36 0.29 0.24 0.10
Two spans
L (m) = 1.00 1.10 1.20 1.30 1.40 1.50 1.60 1.70 1.80 1.90 2.00 2.20 2.40 2.60 2.80 3.00 4.00
Breaking point
δmax < L / 200 23.09 18.19 14.55 11.80 9.68 8.03 6.73 5.70 4.86 4.17 3.61 2.75 2.14 1.70 1.37 1.12 0.48
δmax < L / 300 15.39 12.13 9.70 7.87 6.46 5.36 4.49 3.80 3.24 2.78 2.41 1.83 1.43 1.13 0.91 0.75 0.32
δmax < L / 400 11.55 9.10 7.28 5.90 4.84 4.02 3.37 2.85 2.43 2.09 1.81 1.38 1.07 0.85 0.69 0.56 0.24


Lk in m in kN
1.50 100.2
1.75 79.6 v
2.00 64.4
2.25 52.9
2.50 44.1
2.75 37.2
3.00 31.8
3.50 24.0
4.00 18.6
4.50 14.9
Geometry
B 100 mm
1.50 100.2 e1 28.6 mm
1.75 79.6 e2 28.6 mm
o
2.00 64.4 v -45.0
2.25 52.9
2.75 37.2 A 1 911 mm2
3.00 31.8 Ixx 1 803 127 mm4
3.50 24.0 Wxx 25 250 mm3
4.00 18.6 Ak,y 900 mm2
4.50 14.9 Iyy 1 803 127 mm4
Wyy 25 250 mm3
Iee 756 672 mm4
Lk in m in kN
Material properties
1.50 135.9 23 000 MPa
E0°
1.75 111.2
fc, 0° 240 Mpa
2.00 92.0
2.50 65.0
3.00 47.8
γm,E 1.3
3.50 36.4
γm,f 1.3
4.00 28.6
4.50 23.0
5.50 15.7 352.7 kN

0.50 211.5 3.44 kg/m
0.80 130.2
1.20 72.8
1.40 56.6
1.60 45.0
1.80 36.6
2.00 30.2
2.50 19.9
3.00 14.1 Lk = L 0.7L 0.5L 2L

One span
L (m) = 1.00 1.10 1.20 1.30 1.40 1.50 1.60 1.70 1.80 1.90 2.00 2.20 2.40 2.60 2.80 3.00 4.00
Breaking point
δmax < L / 200 13.88 10.67 8.36 6.67 5.40 4.43 3.68 3.08 2.61 2.23 1.92 1.45 1.12 0.89 0.71 0.58 0.25
δmax < L / 300 9.25 7.11 5.57 4.44 3.60 2.95 2.45 2.06 1.74 1.49 1.28 0.97 0.75 0.59 0.47 0.39 0.16
δmax < L / 400 6.94 5.33 4.18 3.33 2.70 2.21 1.84 1.54 1.31 1.12 0.96 0.73 0.56 0.44 0.36 0.29 0.12
Two spans
L (m) = 1.00 1.10 1.20 1.30 1.40 1.50 1.60 1.70 1.80 1.90 2.00 2.20 2.40 2.60 2.80 3.00 4.00
Breaking point
δmax < L / 200 28.25 22.23 17.77 14.40 11.81 9.79 8.21 6.94 5.91 5.08 4.39 3.35 2.61 2.07 1.67 1.36 0.58
δmax < L / 300 18.83 14.82 11.85 9.60 7.87 6.53 5.47 4.62 3.94 3.39 2.93 2.23 1.74 1.38 1.11 0.91 0.39
δmax < L / 400 14.13 11.12 8.88 7.20 5.90 4.90 4.10 3.47 2.96 2.54 2.20 1.67 1.30 1.03 0.83 0.68 0.29


Lk in m in kN
1.50 117.4
1.75 93.2
v
2.00 75.3
2.25 61.8
2.50 51.5
2.75 43.5
3.00 37.2
3.50 28.0
4.00 21.8
4.50 17.4
Geometry
B 100 mm
1.50 117.4 e1 29.3 mm
1.75 93.2 e2 29.3 mm
o
2.00 75.3 v -45.0
2.25 61.8
2.75 43.5 A 2 267 mm2
3.00 37.2 Ixx 2 102 772 mm4
3.50 28.0 Wxx 29 755 mm3
4.00 21.8 Ak,y 1080 mm2
4.50 17.4 Iyy 2 102 772 mm4
Wyy 29 755 mm3
Ak,x 1080 mm2
Izz 3 322 322 mm4
Iee 883 222 mm4
Lk in m in kN
Material properties
1.50 159.5 E0° 23 000 MPa
1.75 130.4
fc, 0° 240 Mpa
2.00 107.7
2.50 76.0
3.00 55.9 γm,E 1.3
3.50 42.5
γm,f 1.3
4.00 33.4
4.50 26.8
5.00 22.0
418.4 kN
5.50 18.3

4.08 kg/m
0.50 249.3
0.80 152.9
Buckling length
1.00 112.7
1.20 85.3
1.40 66.2
1.60 52.7
1.80 42.7
2.00 35.3
2.50 23.3
Lk = L 0.7L 0.5L 2L
3.00 16.5

One span
L (m) = 1.00 1.10 1.20 1.30 1.40 1.50 1.60 1.70 1.80 1.90 2.00 2.20 2.40 2.60 2.80 3.00 4.00
Breaking point
δmax < L / 200 16.24 9.77 9.77 7.79 6.31 5.17 4.29 3.60 3.05 2.60 2.24 1.69 1.31 1.03 0.83 0.68 0.29
δmax < L / 300 10.83 6.52 6.52 5.19 4.20 3.45 2.86 2.40 2.03 1.74 1.49 1.13 0.87 0.69 0.55 0.45 0.19
δmax < L / 400 8.12 4.89 4.89 3.90 3.15 2.59 2.15 1.80 1.52 1.30 1.12 0.85 0.66 0.52 0.42 0.34 0.14
Two spans
L (m) = 1.00 1.10 1.20 1.30 1.40 1.50 1.60 1.70 1.80 1.90 2.00 2.20 2.40 2.60 2.80 3.00 4.00
Breaking point
δmax < L / 200 33.19 20.84 20.84 16.87 13.83 11.47 9.60 8.11 6.92 5.94 5.14 3.91 3.05 2.42 1.95 1.59 0.68
δmax < L / 300 22.13 13.89 13.89 11.25 9.22 7.64 6.40 5.41 4.61 3.96 3.42 2.61 2.03 1.61 1.30 1.06 0.45
δmax < L / 400 16.60 10.42 10.42 8.44 6.92 5.73 4.80 4.06 3.46 2.97 2.57 1.96 1.52 1.21 0.97 0.80 0.34


Lk in m in kN
2.00 149.1
2.50 108.9
3.00 81.9
v
3.50 63.4
4.00 50.2
4.50 40.7
5.00 33.6
5.50 28.1
6.00 23.9
7.00 17.8
Geometry
2.00 149.1 e1 40.3 mm
2.50 108.9 e2 40.3 mm
o
3.00 81.9 v -45.0
3.50 63.4
4.50 40.7 A 2 347 mm2
5.00 33.6 Ixx 5 207 812 mm4
5.50 28.1 Wxx 47 488 mm3
6.00 23.9 Ak,y 1080 mm2
7.00 17.8 Iyy 5 207 812 mm4
Wyy 47 488 mm3
Ak,x 1080 mm2
Izz 8 243 662 mm4
Iee 2 171 963 mm4
2.00 196.6 E0° 23 000 MPa
2.50 150.4 240 Mpa
fc, 0°
3.00 116.8
4.00 74.5
λm,E 1.3
4.50 61.1
5.00 50.8
λm,f 1.3
5.50 42.9
6.00 36.6
7.00 27.5 433.2 kN

1.00 202.2
4.22 kg/m
1.50 121.3
2.00 77.8
Buckling length
2.50 53.2
3.00 38.4
3.50 28.9
4.00 22.5
4.50 18.0
5.00 14.7
Lk = L 0.7L 0.5L 2L
6.00 10.3

One span
L (m) = 1.00 1.20 1.40 1.60 1.80 2.00 2.20 2.40 2.60 2.80 3.00 3.20 3.40 3.60 3.80 4.00 5.00
Breaking point
δmax < L / 200 33.95 21.35 14.19 9.86 7.11 5.28 4.02 3.13 2.49 2.00 1.64 1.36 1.14 0.96 0.82 0.70 0.36
δmax < L / 300 22.63 14.24 9.46 6.57 4.74 3.52 2.68 2.09 1.66 1.34 1.09 0.90 0.76 0.64 0.55 0.47 0.24
δmax < L / 400 16.97 10.68 7.10 4.93 3.55 2.64 2.01 1.57 1.24 1.00 0.82 0.68 0.57 0.48 0.41 0.35 0.18
Two spans
L (m) = 1.00 1.20 1.40 1.60 1.80 2.00 2.20 2.40 2.60 2.80 3.00 3.20 3.40 3.60 3.80 4.00 5.00
Breaking point
δmax < L / 200 59.64 40.16 28.06 20.24 15.00 11.39 8.82 6.96 5.58 4.54 3.74 3.11 2.62 2.22 1.90 1.64 0.85
δmax < L / 300 39.76 26.78 18.71 13.49 10.00 7.59 5.88 4.64 3.72 3.03 2.49 2.08 1.75 1.48 1.27 1.09 0.57
δmax < L / 400 29.82 20.08 14.03 10.12 7.50 5.69 4.41 3.48 2.79 2.27 1.87 1.56 1.31 1.11 0.95 0.82 0.43


Lk in m in kN
2.00 183.5
2.50 133.9
v
3.00 100.6
3.50 77.8
4.00 61.7
4.50 49.9
5.00 41.2
5.50 34.5
6.00 29.3
7.00 21.8
Geometry
2.00 183.5 e1 41.1 mm
2.50 133.9 e2 41.1 Mm
o
3.00 100.6 v -45.0
3.50 77.8
4.50 49.9 A 2 911 mm2
5.00 41.2 Ixx 6 381 667 mm4
5.50 34.5 Wxx 58 601 mm3
6.00 29.3 Ak,y 1350 mm2
7.00 21.8 Iyy 6 381 667 mm4
Wyy 58 601 mm3
Design value for compressive 1350 mm2
Ak,x
Izz 10 117 830 mm4
Iee 2 645 505 mm4
2.00 242.4 E0° 23 000 MPa
2.50 185.2 240 Mpa
fc, 0°
3.00 143.8
4.00 91.6
λm,E 1.3
4.50 75.1
λm,f 1.3
5.00 62.5
5.50 52.7
6.00 45.0
7.00 33.8 537.3 kN

5.24 kg/m
1.00 248.4
1.50 148.5
Buckling length
2.00 95.1
2.50 65.0
3.00 46.9
3.50 35.2
4.00 27.4
4.50 21.9
5.00 17.9
Lk = L 0.7L 0.5L 2L
6.00 12.5

One span
L (m) = 1.00 1.20 1.40 1.60 1.80 2.00 2.20 2.40 2.60 2.80 3.00 3.20 3.40 3.60 3.80 4.00 5.00
Breaking point
δmax < L / 200 41.81 26.27 17.44 12.11 8.73 6.48 4.94 3.84 3.05 2.46 2.01 1.66 1.39 1.18 1.00 0.86 0.44
δmax < L / 300 27.88 17.51 11.63 8.08 5.82 4.32 3.29 2.56 2.03 1.64 1.34 1.11 0.93 0.78 0.67 0.57 0.30
δmax < L / 400 20.91 13.14 8.72 6.06 4.36 3.24 2.47 1.92 1.52 1.23 1.00 0.83 0.70 0.59 0.50 0.43 0.22
Two spans
L (m) = 1.00 1.20 1.40 1.60 1.80 2.00 2.20 2.40 2.60 2.80 3.00 3.20 3.40 3.60 3.80 4.00 5.00
Breaking point
δmax < L / 200 73.76 49.58 34.59 24.92 18.46 14.00 10.84 8.55 6.86 5.57 4.59 3.82 3.21 2.73 2.33 2.01 1.05
δmax < L / 300 49.17 33.05 23.06 16.61 12.30 9.33 7.23 5.70 4.57 3.72 3.06 2.55 2.14 1.82 1.56 1.34 0.70
δmax < L / 400 36.88 24.79 17.30 12.46 9.23 7.00 5.42 4.28 3.43 2.79 2.29 1.91 1.61 1.36 1.17 1.01 0.52


Lk in m in kN
2.00 216.8
2.50 158.0 v
3.00 118.7
3.50 91.7
4.00 72.7
4.50 58.8
5.00 48.5
5.50 40.6
6.00 34.5
7.00 25.7
Geometry
2.00 216.8 e1 41.9 mm
2.50 158.0 e2 41.9 Mm
o
3.00 118.7 v -45.0
3.50 91.7
4.50 58.8 A 3 467 mm2
5.00 48.5 Ixx 7 509 693 mm4
5.50 40.6 Wxx 69 439 mm3
6.00 34.5 Ak,y 1620 mm2
7.00 25.7 Iyy 7 509 693 mm4
Wyy 69 439 mm3
Iee 3 105 968 mm4
Lk in m in kN
Material properties
2.00 286.9 23 000 MPa
E0°
2.50 219.0
fc, 0° 240 Mpa
3.00 169.8
3.50 134.2
4.00 108.1
γm,E 1.3
4.50 88.5
γm,f 1.3
5.00 73.6
5.50 62.1
7.00 39.8 640.0 kN

1.00 293.6 6.24 kg/m
1.50 175.1
2.50 76.4
3.00 55.1
3.50 41.4
4.00 32.2
4.50 25.7
5.00 21.0
6.00 14.7
Lk = L 0.7L 0.5L 2L

One span
L (m) = 1.00 1.20 1.40 1.60 1.80 2.00 2.20 2.40 2.60 2.80 3.00 3.20 3.40 3.60 3.80 4.00 5.00
Breaking point
δmax < L / 200 49.45 31.03 20.59 14.29 10.29 7.64 5.82 4.53 3.59 2.90 2.37 1.96 1.64 1.39 1.18 1.01 0.52
δmax < L / 300 32.97 20.69 13.72 9.53 6.86 5.09 3.88 3.02 2.39 1.93 1.58 1.31 1.09 0.92 0.79 0.68 0.35
δmax < L / 400 24.73 15.52 10.29 7.14 5.14 3.82 2.91 2.26 1.80 1.45 1.18 0.98 0.82 0.69 0.59 0.51 0.26
Two spans
L (m) = 1.00 1.20 1.40 1.60 1.80 2.00 2.20 2.40 2.60 2.80 3.00 3.20 3.40 3.60 3.80 4.00 5.00
Breaking point
δmax < L / 200 87.57 58.76 40.95 29.47 21.81 16.53 12.80 10.09 8.09 6.57 5.41 4.50 3.79 3.21 2.75 2.37 1.23
δmax < L / 300 58.38 39.17 27.30 19.64 14.54 11.02 8.53 6.73 5.39 4.38 3.61 3.00 2.52 2.14 1.83 1.58 0.82
δmax < L / 400 43.78 29.38 20.47 14.73 10.90 8.27 6.40 5.05 4.04 3.29 2.70 2.25 1.89 1.61 1.37 1.18 0.62


Lk in m in kN
2.00 128.3
2.50 94.2
3.00 71.1
3.50 55.1
v
4.00 43.8
4.50 35.5
5.00 29.3
5.50 24.6
6.00 20.9
7.00 15.6
Geometry
1.00 160.9 e1 47.8 mm
1.50 95.2 e2 22.9 Mm
o
2.00 60.5 v -23.8
2.50 41.3
3.50 22.3 A 1 947 mm2
4.00 17.3 Ixx 4 569 097 mm4
4.50 13.8 Wxx 44 708 mm3
5.00 11.3 Ak,y 1080 mm2
5.50 9.4 Iyy 1 667 930 mm4
Wyy 21 643 mm3
Ak,x 720 mm2
Izz 5 266 449 mm4
Iee 970 578 mm4
Lk in m in kN
Material properties
2.00 140.2 E0° 23 000 MPa
2.50 104.4
fc, 0° 240 Mpa
3.00 79.6
3.50 62.1
4.00 49.6
λm,E 1.3
4.50 40.3
5.00 33.4 λm,f 1.3
5.50 28.0
7.00 17.8 359.4 kN

0.75 163.9 3.50 kg/m
1.00 115.2
1.50 62.3
2.00 37.9
2.50 25.2
3.00 17.9
3.50 13.3
4.00 10.3
4.50 8.2 Lk = L 0.7L 0.5L 2L

One span
L (m) = 1.00 1.20 1.40 1.60 1.80 2.00 2.20 2.40 2.60 2.80 3.00 3.20 3.40 3.60 3.80 4.00 5.00
Breaking point
x direction 41.54 34.62 29.67 25.79 20.38 16.51 13.64 11.46 9.77 8.42 7.34 6.45 5.71 5.09 4.57 4.13 2.64
y direction 27.69 22.20 16.31 12.49 9.87 7.99 6.60 5.55 4.73 4.08 3.55 3.12 2.77 2.47 2.21 2.00 1.28
y direction 12.59 7.62 4.94 3.37 2.40 1.77 1.34 1.03 0.82 0.66 0.54 0.44 0.37 0.31 0.27 0.23 0.12
y direction 8.39 5.17 3.37 2.30 1.64 1.20 0.91 0.70 0.55 0.44 0.36 0.30 0.25 0.21 0.18 0.15 0.08
y direction 6.29 3.88 2.53 1.73 1.23 0.90 0.68 0.53 0.42 0.33 0.27 0.22 0.19 0.16 0.13 0.11 0.06
Two spans
L (m) = 1.00 1.20 1.40 1.60 1.80 2.00 2.20 2.40 2.60 2.80 3.00 3.20 3.40 3.60 3.80 4.00 5.00
Breaking point
x direction 33.23 27.69 23.74 20.77 18.46 16.51 13.64 11.46 9.77 8.42 7.34 6.45 5.71 5.09 4.57 4.13 2.64
y direction 22.15 18.46 15.82 12.49 9.87 7.99 6.60 5.55 4.73 4.08 3.55 3.12 2.77 2.47 2.21 2.00 1.28
y direction 25.11 15.94 10.67 7.45 5.39 4.01 3.06 2.39 1.90 1.53 1.25 1.04 0.87 0.74 0.63 0.54 0.28
y direction 16.74 10.63 7.11 4.97 3.59 2.68 2.04 1.59 1.27 1.02 0.84 0.69 0.58 0.49 0.42 0.36 0.19
y direction 12.55 7.97 5.33 3.72 2.69 2.01 1.53 1.20 0.95 0.77 0.63 0.52 0.43 0.37 0.31 0.27 0.14


Lk in m in kN
2.00 157.6
2.50 115.6
3.00 87.2
3.50 67.6
4.00 53.7 v
4.50 43.5
5.00 35.9
5.50 30.1
6.00 25.6
7.00 19.1

Geometry
load-bearing capacity H 150 mm
B 100 mm
T1 10 mm
Lk in m in kN
R 7 mm
1.00 197.2 e1 48.6 mm
1.50 116.3 e2 23.7 mm
2.00 73.8 v -23.7 o
2.50 50.3
3.50 27.1 A 2 411 mm2
4.00 21.1 Ixx 5 590 746 mm4
4.50 16.8 Wxx 55 129 mm3
5.00 13.7 1350 mm2
Ak,y
5.50 11.4
Iyy 2 027 823 mm4
Design value for compressive Wyy 26 576 mm3
Iee 1 176 649 mm4
Lk in m in kN
Material properties
2.00 172.3
E0° 23 000 MPa
2.50 128.2
fc, 0° 240 Mpa
3.00 97.6
3.50 76.1
4.00 60.7
γm,E 1.3
4.50 49.4
5.00 40.9 γm,f 1.3
5.50 34.3
6.00 29.2
7.00 21.8 445.0 kN

0.75 200.6 4.34 kg/m
1.00 140.6
1.50 75.8
2.00 46.1
2.50 30.6
3.00 21.7
3.50 16.2
4.00 12.5
4.50 9.9 Lk = L 0.7L 0.5L 2L

One span
L (m) = 1.00 1.20 1.40 1.60 1.80 2.00 2.20 2.40 2.60 2.80 3.00 3.20 3.40 3.60 3.80 4.00 5.00
Breaking point
x direction 51.92 43.27 37.09 31.81 25.13 20.36 16.82 14.14 12.04 10.39 9.05 7.95 7.04 6.28 5.64 5.09 3.26
y direction 34.62 27.26 20.03 15.33 12.11 9.81 8.11 6.81 5.81 5.01 4.36 3.83 3.40 3.03 2.72 2.45 1.57
y direction 15.36 9.29 6.02 4.11 2.92 2.15 1.63 1.26 0.99 0.80 0.65 0.54 0.45 0.38 0.32 0.28 0.14
y direction 10.24 6.30 4.10 2.80 1.99 1.46 1.10 0.85 0.67 0.54 0.44 0.36 0.30 0.26 0.22 0.19 0.10
y direction 7.68 4.73 3.08 2.10 1.49 1.10 0.83 0.64 0.50 0.40 0.33 0.27 0.23 0.19 0.16 0.14 0.07
Two spans
L (m) = 1.00 1.20 1.40 1.60 1.80 2.00 2.20 2.40 2.60 2.80 3.00 3.20 3.40 3.60 3.80 4.00 5.00
Breaking point
x direction 41.54 34.62 29.67 25.96 23.08 20.36 16.82 14.14 12.04 10.39 9.05 7.95 7.04 6.28 5.64 5.09 3.26
y direction 27.69 23.08 19.78 15.33 12.11 9.81 8.11 6.81 5.81 5.01 4.36 3.83 3.40 3.03 2.72 2.45 1.57
y direction 30.77 19.50 13.03 9.09 6.57 4.89 3.73 2.91 2.31 1.87 1.53 1.26 1.06 0.89 0.76 0.66 0.34
y direction 20.51 13.00 8.69 6.06 4.38 3.26 2.49 1.94 1.54 1.24 1.02 0.84 0.71 0.60 0.51 0.44 0.23
y direction 15.38 9.75 6.52 4.54 3.28 2.45 1.87 1.46 1.16 0.93 0.76 0.63 0.53 0.45 0.38 0.33 0.17


Lk in m in kN
2.00 186.0
2.50 136.3
3.00 102.7
3.50 79.6
4.00 63.1 v
4.50 51.2
5.00 42.2
5.50 35.4
6.00 30.1
7.00 22.4
Design value for compressive Geometry

load-bearing capacity H 150 mm
B 100 mm
T1 12 mm
Lk in m in kN
R 7 mm
1.00 232.1 e1 49.4 mm
1.50 136.4 e2 24.4 Mm
2.00 86.5 v -23.6 o
2.50 58.8
3.50 31.7 A 2 867 mm2
4.00 24.6 Ixx 6 569 876 mm4
4.50 19.7 Wxx 65 278 mm3
5.00 16.0 Ak,y 1620 mm2
5.50 13.3 2 368 206 mm4
Iyy
Wyy 31 345 mm3
Iee 1 375 728 mm4
Lk in m in kN
Material properties
2.00 203.3 23 000 MPa
E0°
2.50 151.0
fc, 0° 240 Mpa
3.00 114.9
4.00 71.4 γm,E 1.3
4.50 58.1
γm,f 1.3
5.00 48.0
5.50 40.3
6.00 34.3
529.2 kN
7.00 25.6
Max. compressive load-bearing capacity with

Buckling length Load-bearing capacity Dead weight

Lk in m in kN
4.34 kg/m
0.75 236.3
1.25 119.1
1.50 88.8
2.00 53.9
2.50 35.8
3.00 25.4
3.50 18.9
4.00 14.6 Lk = L 0.7L 0.5L 2L
4.50 11.6

One span
L (m) = 1.00 1.20 1.40 1.60 1.80 2.00 2.20 2.40 2.60 2.80 3.00 3.20 3.40 3.60 3.80 4.00 5.00
Breaking point
x direction 62.31 51.92 44.51 37.66 29.76 24.10 19.92 16.74 14.26 12.30 10.71 9.42 8.34 7.44 6.68 6.03 3.86
y direction 41.54 32.15 23.62 18.08 14.29 11.57 9.56 8.04 6.85 5.90 5.14 4.52 4.00 3.57 3.21 2.89 1.85
y direction 18.01 10.88 7.04 4.80 3.42 2.51 1.90 1.47 1.16 0.93 0.76 0.63 0.52 0.44 0.38 0.32 0.17
y direction 12.01 7.38 4.80 3.28 2.33 1.71 1.29 1.00 0.79 0.63 0.51 0.42 0.35 0.30 0.25 0.22 0.11
y direction 9.00 5.54 3.60 2.46 1.74 1.28 0.97 0.75 0.59 0.47 0.39 0.32 0.26 0.22 0.19 0.16 0.08
Two spans
L (m) = 1.00 1.20 1.40 1.60 1.80 2.00 2.20 2.40 2.60 2.80 3.00 3.20 3.40 3.60 3.80 4.00 5.00
Breaking point
x direction 49.85 41.54 35.60 31.15 27.69 24.10 19.92 16.74 14.26 12.30 10.71 9.42 8.34 7.44 6.68 6.03 3.86
y direction 33.23 27.69 23.62 18.08 14.29 11.57 9.56 8.04 6.85 5.90 5.14 4.52 4.00 3.57 3.21 2.89 1.85
y direction 36.21 22.91 15.29 10.65 7.70 5.73 4.37 3.41 2.70 2.18 1.78 1.48 1.24 1.05 0.89 0.77 0.40
y direction 24.14 15.27 10.19 7.10 5.13 3.82 2.91 2.27 1.80 1.45 1.19 0.99 0.82 0.70 0.59 0.51 0.26
y direction 18.10 11.46 7.64 5.33 3.85 2.86 2.18 1.70 1.35 1.09 0.89 0.74 0.62 0.52 0.45 0.38 0.20

Axial load-bearing capacity in kN - Handrail 180 x 120 x 10 - A

Lk in m in kN
1.00 376.0
1.10 344.4
1.20 315.4
1.30 289.0
1.40 265.0
1.50 243.3
1.60 223.7
1.70 206.1
1.80 190.2
1.90 175.8
2.00 162.9
2.10 151.1
2.20 140.5
2.30 130.9
2.40 122.2
Geometry
2.50 114.3
H 120 mm
2.60 107.0
B1 180 mm
2.70 100.4
B2 100 mm
2.80 94.4
2.90 88.8 T1 8 mm
3.00 83.7 R 6 mm
3.10 79.1
3.30 70.7 A 3 613 mm2
3.50 63.6 Ixx 4 935 568 mm4
Wxx 85 833 mm3
load-bearing capacity 57.5 mm
C1
Iyy
0.50 617.6
0.70 576.6 E0° 23 000 MPa
0.80 553.7 fc, 0° 240 Mpa
0.90 529.8
1.10 480.9 γm,E 1.3
1.20 456.7 γm,f 1.3
1.30 433.0
1.40 410.0
Max. compressive load-bearing capacity with
1.50 387.9 unbraced flanges
1.60 366.8
488.6 kN
1.70 346.7
1.80 327.6
Dead weight
1.90 309.6
6.50 kg/m
2.00 292.7
2.10 276.7
Buckling length
2.20 261.8
2.30 247.8
2.40 234.7
2.50 222.4
2.60 211.0
2.70 200.2
2.80 190.2
3.00 172.0 Lk = L 0.7L 0.5L 2L

Load-bearing capacity in kN/m - Handrail 180 x 120 x 10 - B
One span
L (m) = 1.00 1.20 1.40 1.60 1.80 2.00 2.20 2.40 2.60 2.80 3.00 3.20 3.40 3.60 3.80 4.00 5.00
Breaking point
x direction 62.31 51.92 44.51 37.66 29.76 24.10 19.92 16.74 14.26 12.30 10.71 9.42 8.34 7.44 6.68 6.03 3.86
y direction 41.54 32.15 23.62 18.08 14.29 11.57 9.56 8.04 6.85 5.90 5.14 4.52 4.00 3.57 3.21 2.89 1.85
y direction 18.01 10.88 7.04 4.80 3.42 2.51 1.90 1.47 1.16 0.93 0.76 0.63 0.52 0.44 0.38 0.32 0.17
y direction 12.01 7.38 4.80 3.28 2.33 1.71 1.29 1.00 0.79 0.63 0.51 0.42 0.35 0.30 0.25 0.22 0.11
y direction 9.00 5.54 3.60 2.46 1.74 1.28 0.97 0.75 0.59 0.47 0.39 0.32 0.26 0.22 0.19 0.16 0.08
Two spans
L (m) = 1.00 1.20 1.40 1.60 1.80 2.00 2.20 2.40 2.60 2.80 3.00 3.20 3.40 3.60 3.80 4.00 5.00
Breaking point
x direction 49.85 41.54 35.60 31.15 27.69 24.10 19.92 16.74 14.26 12.30 10.71 9.42 8.34 7.44 6.68 6.03 3.86
y direction 33.23 27.69 23.62 18.08 14.29 11.57 9.56 8.04 6.85 5.90 5.14 4.52 4.00 3.57 3.21 2.89 1.85
y direction 36.21 22.91 15.29 10.65 7.70 5.73 4.37 3.41 2.70 2.18 1.78 1.48 1.24 1.05 0.89 0.77 0.40
y direction 24.14 15.27 10.19 7.10 5.13 3.82 2.91 2.27 1.80 1.45 1.19 0.99 0.82 0.70 0.59 0.51 0.26
y direction 18.10 11.46 7.64 5.33 3.85 2.86 2.18 1.70 1.35 1.09 0.89 0.74 0.62 0.52 0.45 0.38 0.20
Three spans
L (m) = 1.00 1.20 1.40 1.60 1.80 2.00 2.20 2.40 2.60 2.80 3.00 3.20 3.40 3.60 3.80 4.00 5.00
Breaking point
x direction 51.92 43.27 37.09 32.45 28.85 25.96 23.60 20.92 17.83 15.37 13.39 11.77 10.43 9.30 8.35 7.53 4.82
y direction 34.62 28.85 24.73 21.63 17.86 14.47 11.96 10.05 8.56 7.38 6.43 5.65 5.01 4.47 4.01 3.62 2.31
y direction 30.32 18.90 12.48 8.63 6.20 4.60 3.50 2.72 2.15 1.74 1.42 1.17 0.98 0.83 0.71 0.61 0.31
y direction 20.22 12.60 8.32 5.76 4.14 3.06 2.33 1.81 1.44 1.16 0.95 0.78 0.65 0.55 0.47 0.40 0.21
y direction 15.16 9.45 6.24 4.32 3.10 2.30 1.75 1.36 1.08 0.87 0.71 0.59 0.49 0.41 0.35 0.30 0.16

CHAPTER 2: CONSTRUCTION
Section 1 Planks, pultruded gratings and moulded gratings
Product programme and load-bearing capacities ................................................................ 2.1.03
Load-bearing capacity in kN/m2 - planks ............................................................................. 2.1.05
Load-bearing capacity in kN/m2 - pultruded gratings ........................................................... 2.1.06
Load-bearing capacity in kN/m2 - moulded gratings ............................................................ 2.1.09
Moulded gratings with point load .......................................................................................... 2.1.13
Example 5.1: Uniformly distributed load on planks .............................................................. 2.1.15
Example 5.2: Point load on moulded gratings ....................................................................... 2.1.17
Machining gratings ................................................................................................................ 2.1.20
Section 2 Railings
Product programme and load-bearing capacity ................................................................... 2.2.02
Design of railings .................................................................................................................. 2.2.03
Railing stanchions - load-bearing capacity in kN/m .............................................................. 2.2.04
Detail 3.1 .............................................................................................................................. 2.2.07
Detail 3.2 .............................................................................................................................. 2.2.08
Example of railing construction ............................................................................................. 2.2.09
Section 3 Stairs
Concept ............................................................................................................................... 2.3.03
Bases for construction .......................................................................................................... 2.3.04
Load-bearing capacity of strings in kN/m ............................................................................. 2.3.06
Detail 4.1 .............................................................................................................................. 2.3.08
Detail 4.2 .............................................................................................................................. 2.3.10
Detail 4.3 .............................................................................................................................. 2.3.11
Detail 4.4 .............................................................................................................................. 2.3.12
Detail 4.5 .............................................................................................................................. 2.3.13
Example of stair construction ............................................................................................... 2.3.14
Fiberline Composites A/S - Design Manual - Chapter 2 - Revised 2002

CHAPTER 2
Section 1: Planks, pultruded gratings and moulded gratings

Product programme and load-bearing capacities ................................................................ 2.1.03
Load-bearing capacity in kN/m2 - planks ............................................................................. 2.1.05
Load-bearing capacity in kN/m2 - pultruded gratings ........................................................... 2.1.06
Load-bearing capacity in kN/m2 - moulded gratings ............................................................ 2.1.09
Moulded gratings with point load .......................................................................................... 2.1.13
Example 5.1: Uniformly distributed load on planks .............................................................. 2.1.15
Example 5.2: Point load on moulded gratings ....................................................................... 2.1.17
Machining gratings ................................................................................................................ 2.1.20

I
Product range and load-bearing capacity
Load-bearing capacities of the various types of decks are listed in the tables on pages 2.1.5-2.1.11.
Plank Shear area Moment of Section

A(τ)in inertia modulus
Height Width Area
Type mm mm A in mm2/m
mm2/m Ix in mm4/m Wx in
mm3/m
HD 40 500 9.568 3.265 2.148.000 86.646
MD 40 500 7.308 2.016 1.397.042 48.994
LD 40 500 6.358 2.016 1.337.000 47.784
Pultruded grating Profile Moment of Section

Shear area modulus
dimension Area inertia
A(τ)in mm2/m
mm* A in mm2/m Ix in mm4/m Wx in mm3/m
25 x 20 4.957 2.660 380.319 30.426
30 x 30 5.193 2.632 618.263 41.491
40 x 30 7.456 4.211 1.542.018 77.105
Tabel 5.1. * Standardafstand mellem profiler er 27 mm.Cross-section

For andre afstande se Tabel 5.2-5.4.
constants
Moulded grating Moment of Section

Shear area modulus
Height Area inertia
A(τ)in mm2/m
mm A in mm2/m Ix in mm4/m Wx in mm3/m
25 3.469 3.469 180.663 14.453
30 4.163 4.163 312.188 20.813
38 5.273 5.273 634.458 33.393
50 6.938 6.938 1.445.313 57.813
Table 5.1. * The standard distance between profiles is 27 mm. For other distances see Table 5.2-5.4.

Pultruded gratings
Pultruded gratings are supplied with standard profile distances of 27 mm. The values listed in the tables on
pages 2.1.8-2.1.10 are valid for this distance.
With other profile distances, the figures must be divided by the following distance factors.
Profile distance in m m Distance factor

16 0.79
21 0.88
27 1.00
35 1.16
Table 5.2 Profile type 20 mm x 25 mm
Profile distance in mm Distance factor

16 0,82
21 0,90
27 1,00
35 1,13
Profile distance in mm Distance factor

16 0.82
21 0.90
27 1.00
35 1.13
Example
Determination of load-bearing capacity for a pultruded grating with a distance of 16 mm between the profiles:
Profile 20 x 25 mm, L = 1.0 m, one span

L
Maximum deflection
200
Load-bearing capacity, read in table on page 2.1.6 3.32 kN / m2 (serviceability limit state)
Desired profile distance 16 mm
Distance factor, read in table 5.2 0.79
Result:
Load-bearing capacity 3,32 = 4.20 kN/m2

0,79

Planks HD (H = 40 mm) - Load-bearing capacity in kN/m2
One span
L (m) = 0.25 0.50 0.75 1.00 1.25 1.50 1.75 2.00 2.25 2.50 2.75 3.00

- 261.2 174.2 128 81.89 56.87 41.78 31.99 25.28 20.47 16.92 14.22
δmax < L / 200 - 128 41.53 18.13 9.43 5.51 3.49 2.34 1.65 1.21 0.91 0.70
δmax < L / 400 - 63.97 20.77 9.06 4.72 2.75 1.74 1.17 0.83 0.60 0.45 0.35
T w o sp a n s
L (m) = 0.25 0.50 0.75 1.00 1.25 1.50 1.75 2.00 2.25 2.50 2.75 3.00

- - - 48.37 37.23 29.70 24.29 20.23 17.10 14.62 12.64 11.01
δmax < L / 200 - - - 45.75 23.42 13.55 8.54 5.72 4.02 2.93 2.20 1.69
δmax < L / 400 - - - 22.87 11.71 6.78 4.27 2.86 2.01 1.46 1.10 0.85
T h re e sp a n s
L (m) = 0.25 0.50 0.75 1.00 1.25 1.50 1.75 2.00 2.25 2.50 2.75 3.00

- - - 55.66 43.08 34.58 28.45 23.83 20.25 17.41 15.11 13.22
δmax < L / 200 - - - 35.96 18.41 10.65 6.71 4.49 3.16 2.30 1.73 1.33
δmax < L / 400 - - - 17.98 9.20 5.33 3.35 2.25 1.58 1.15 0.86 0.67
The data used in the table are theoretically calculated values.

Planks MD (H = 40 mm) - Load-bearing capacity in kN/m2
O n e sp a n
L (m) = 0.25 0.50 0.75 1.00 1.25 1.50 1.75 2.00 2.25 2.50 2.75 3.00

- 155.1 103.4 72.35 46.31 32.16 23.63 18.09 14.29 11.58 9.57 8.04
δmax < L / 200 - 81.98 26.82 11.74 6.12 3.57 2.26 1.52 1.07 0.78 0.59 0.45
δmax < L / 400 - 40.99 13.41 5.87 3.06 1.79 1.13 0.76 0.54 0.39 0.29 0.23
T w o sp a n s
L (m) = 0.25 0.50 0.75 1.00 1.25 1.50 1.75 2.00 2.25 2.50 2.75 3.00

- - - - 21.87 17.39 14.18 11.77 9.92 8.46 7.30 6.35
δmax < L / 200 - - - - 15.23 8.82 5.55 3.72 2.61 1.90 1.43 1.10
δmax < L / 400 - - - - 7.62 4.41 2.78 1.86 1.31 0.95 0.72 0.55
T h re e sp a n s
L (m) = 0.25 0.50 0.75 1.00 1.25 1.50 1.75 2.00 2.25 2.50 2.75 3.00

- - - 32.84 25.35 20.28 16.64 13.90 11.78 10.10 8.74 7.64
δmax < L / 200 - - - 23.39 11.97 6.93 4.36 2.92 2.05 1.50 1.12 0.87
δmax < L / 400 - - - 11.69 5.99 3.46 2.18 1.46 1.03 0.75 0.56 0.43

Planks LD (H = 40 mm) - Load-bearing capacity in kN/m2
One span
L (m) = 0.25 0.50 0.75 1.00 1.25 1.50 1.75 2.00 2.25 2.50 2.75 3.00

- 155.1 103.4 70.57 45.16 31.36 23.04 17.64 13.94 11.29 9.33 7.84
δmax < L / 200 - 79.04 25.76 11.26 5.86 3.42 2.17 1.46 1.03 0.75 0.56 0.43
δmax < L / 400 - 39.52 12.88 5.63 2.93 1.71 1.08 0.73 0.51 0.37 0.28 0.22
T w o sp a n s
L (m) = 0.25 0.50 0.75 1.00 1.25 1.50 1.75 2.00 2.25 2.50 2.75 3.00

- - - - 21.75 17.26 14.05 11.65 9.80 8.35 7.19 6.25
δmax < L / 200 - - - - 14.58 8.44 5.31 3.56 2.50 1.82 1.37 1.05
δmax < L / 400 - - - - 7.29 4.22 2.66 1.78 1.25 0.91 0.68 0.53
T h re e sp a n s
L (m) = 0.25 0.50 0.75 1.00 1.25 1.50 1.75 2.00 2.25 2.50 2.75 3.00

- - - 32.73 25.22 20.15 16.50 13.77 11.65 9.97 8.63 7.53
δmax < L / 200 - - - 22.38 11.46 6.63 4.18 2.80 1.96 1.43 1.08 0.83
δmax < L / 400 - - - 11.19 5.73 3.32 2.09 1.40 0.98 0.72 0.54 0.41

Pultruded grating(20 x 25 mm) - Load-bearing capacity in kN/m2
O n e sp a n
L (m) = 0.25 0.50 0.75 1.00 1.25 1.50 1.75 2.00 2.25 2.50 2.75 3.00

409 180 79.9 44.9 28.8 20.0 14.7 11.2 8.88 7.19 5.94 4.99
δmax < L / 200 184 25.8 7.82 3.32 1.71 0.99 0.62 - - - - -
δmax < L / 400 92.0 12.9 3.91 1.66 0.85 0.50 - - - - - -
T w o sp a n s
L (m) = 0.25 0.50 0.75 1.00 1.25 1.50 1.75 2.00 2.25 2.50 2.75 3.00

- 164 79.9 44.9 28.8 20.0 14.7 11.2 8.88 7.19 5.94 4.99
δmax < L / 200 - 58.6 18.3 7.87 4.07 2.36 1.49 1.00 0.70 0.51 - -
δmax < L / 400 - 29.3 9.15 3.94 2.03 1.18 0.75 0.50 - - - -
T h re e sp a n s
L (m) = 0.25 0.50 0.75 1.00 1.25 1.50 1.75 2.00 2.25 2.50 2.75 3.00

341 171 99.9 56.2 36.0 25.0 18.3 14.0 11.1 8.99 7.43 6.24
δmax < L / 200 308 47.1 14.6 6.23 3.21 1.87 1.18 0.79 0.56 0.41 0.30 0.23
δmax < L / 400 154 23.6 7.28 3.12 1.61 0.93 0.59 0.40 0.28 0.20 0.15 0.12

O n e sp a n
L (m) = 0.25 0.50 0.75 1.00 1.25 1.50 1.75 2.00 2.25 2.50 2.75 3.00

405 202 109 61.3 39.2 27.2 20.0 15.3 12.1 9.80 8.10 6.81
δmax < L / 200 274 40.9 12.6 5.37 2.77 1.61 1.01 0.68 - - - -
δmax < L / 400 137 20.4 6.28 2.68 1.38 0.80 0.51 - - - - -
T w o sp a n s
L (m) = 0.25 0.50 0.75 1.00 1.25 1.50 1.75 2.00 2.25 2.50 2.75 3.00

- 162 108 61.3 39.2 27.2 20.0 15.3 12.1 9.80 8.10 6.81
δmax < L / 200 - 90.0 29.0 12.6 6.54 3.82 2.41 1.62 1.14 0.83 0.63 -
δmax < L / 400 - 45.0 14.5 6.30 3.27 1.91 1.21 0.81 0.57 - - -
T h re e sp a n s
L (m) = 0.25 0.50 0.75 1.00 1.25 1.50 1.75 2.00 2.25 2.50 2.75 3.00

- 169 112 76.6 49.0 34.0 25.0 19.2 15.1 12.3 10.1 8.51
δmax < L / 200 - 73.1 23.2 10.0 5.18 3.02 1.91 1.28 0.90 0.66 0.49 0.38
δmax < L / 400 - 36.6 11.6 5.00 2.59 1.51 0.95 0.64 0.45 0.33 0.25 0.19

O n e sp a n
L (m) = 0.25 0.50 0.75 1.00 1.25 1.50 1.75 2.00 2.25 2.50 2.75 3.00

648 324 202 114 72.9 50.6 37.2 28.5 22.5 18.2 15.1 12.7
δmax < L / 200 609 98.4 30.8 13.3 6.85 3.99 2.52 1.69 1.19 0.87 0.65 0.50
δmax < L / 400 305 49.2 15.4 6.63 3.43 1.99 1.26 0.85 0.59 - - -
T w o sp a n s
L (m) = 0.25 0.50 0.75 1.00 1.25 1.50 1.75 2.00 2.25 2.50 2.75 3.00

- 259 173 114 72.9 50.6 37.2 28.5 22.5 18.2 15.1 12.7
δmax < L / 200 - 208 69.6 30.7 16.1 9.42 5.98 4.02 2.84 2.07 1.56 1.20
δmax < L / 400 - 104 34.8 15.4 8.04 4.71 2.99 2.01 1.42 1.04 0.78 0.60
T h re e sp a n s
L (m) = 0.25 0.50 0.75 1.00 1.25 1.50 1.75 2.00 2.25 2.50 2.75 3.00

- 270 180 135 91.1 63.3 46.5 35.6 28.1 22.8 18.8 15.8
δmax < L / 200 - 171 56.0 24.5 12.8 7.47 4.73 3.18 2.24 1.64 1.23 0.95
δmax < L / 400 - 85.6 28.0 12.3 6.39 3.73 2.37 1.59 1.12 0.82 0.62 0.47

Moulded grating(H = 25 mm) - Load-bearing capacity in kN/m2
O n e sp a n
L (m) = 0.25 0.50 0.75 1.00 1.25 1.50 1.75 2.00 2.25 2.50 2.75 3.00

342 85.4 38.0 21.3 13.7 9.49 6.97 5.34 4.22 3.42 2.82 2.37
δmax < L / 200 61.7 8.16 2.44 1.04 0.53 - - - - - - -
δmax < L / 400 30.8 4.08 1.22 0.52 - - - - - - - -
T w o sp a n s
L (m) = 0.25 0.50 0.75 1.00 1.25 1.50 1.75 2.00 2.25 2.50 2.75 3.00

342 85.4 38.0 21.3 13.7 9.49 6.97 5.34 4.22 3.42 2.82 2.37
δmax < L / 200 134 19.1 5.80 2.47 1.27 0.74 - - - - - -
δmax < L / 400 67.1 9.54 2.90 1.24 0.64 - - - - - - -
T h re e sp a n s
L (m) = 0.25 0.50 0.75 1.00 1.25 1.50 1.75 2.00 2.25 2.50 2.75 3.00

427 107 47.4 26.7 17.1 11.9 8.71 6.67 5.27 4.27 3.53 2.96
δmax < L / 200 109 15.2 4.59 1.95 1.00 0.58 - - - - - -
δmax < L / 400 54.7 7.59 2.30 0.98 0.50 - - - - - - -

O n e sp a n
L (m) = 0.25 0.50 0.75 1.00 1.25 1.50 1.75 2.00 2.25 2.50 2.75 3.00

492 123 54.6 30.7 19. 7 13.7 10.0 7.68 6.07 4.92 4.06 3.42
δmax < L / 200 103.2 14.0 4.21 1.79 0.92 0.53 - - - - - -
δmax < L / 400 51.6 6.99 2.10 0.89 - - - - - - - -
T w o sp a n s
L (m) = 0.25 0.50 0.75 1.00 1.25 1.50 1.75 2.00 2.25 2.50 2.75 3.00

492 123 54.6 30.7 19.7 13.7 10.0 7.68 6.07 4.92 4.06 3.42
δmax < L / 200 217 32.3 9.93 4.25 2.19 1.27 0.80 0.54 - - - -
δmax < L / 400 108 16.2 4.97 2.12 1.09 0.64 - - - - - -
T h re e sp a n s
L (m) = 0.25 0.50 0.75 1.00 1.25 1.50 1.75 2.00 2.25 2.50 2.75 3.00

534 154 68.3 38.4 24.6 17.1 12.6 9.61 7.59 6.15 5.08 4.27
δmax < L / 200 179 25.8 7.88 3.36 1.73 1.00 0.63 - - - - -
δmax < L / 400 89.4 12.9 3.94 1.68 0.86 0.50 - - - - - -

O n e sp a n
L (m) = 0.25 0.50 0.75 1.00 1.25 1.50 1.75 2.00 2.25 2.50 2.75 3.00

789 197 87.7 49.3 31.6 21.9 16.1 12.3 9.74 7.89 6.52 5.48
δmax < L / 200 197 27.9 8.49 3.61 1.86 1.08 0.68 - - - - -
δmax < L / 400 98.7 14.0 4.24 1.81 0.93 0.54 - - - - - -
T w o sp a n s
L (m) = 0.25 0.50 0.75 1.00 1.25 1.50 1.75 2.00 2.25 2.50 2.75 3.00

649 197 87. 7 49.3 31.6 21.9 16.1 12.3 9.74 7.89 6.52 5.48
δmax < L / 200 389 63.2 19.8 8.54 4.42 2.57 1.62 1.09 0.77 0.56 - -
δmax < L / 400 195 31.6 9.92 4.27 2.21 1.28 0.81 0.54 - - - -
T h re e sp a n s
L (m) = 0.25 0.50 0.75 1.00 1.25 1.50 1.75 2.00 2.25 2.50 2.75 3.00

676 247 110 61.6 39.5 27.4 20.1 15.4 12.2 9.86 8.15 6.85
δmax < L / 200 328 50.9 15.8 6.77 3.49 2.03 1.28 0.86 0.60 - - -
δmax < L / 400 164 25.4 7.89 3.38 1.75 1.01 0.64 - - - - -

O n e sp a n
L (m) = 0.25 0.50 0.75 1.00 1.25 1.50 1.75 2.00 2.25 2.50 2.75 3.00

1067 342 152 85.4 54.6 38.0 27.9 21.3 16.9 13.7 11.3 9.49
δmax < L / 200 404 61.7 19.1 8.16 4.21 2.44 1.54 1.04 0.73 0.53 - -
δmax < L / 400 202 30.8 9.53 4.08 2.10 1.22 0.77 0.52 - - - -
T w o sp a n s
L (m) = 0.25 0.50 0.75 1.00 1.25 1.50 1.75 2.00 2.25 2.50 2.75 3.00

854 341 152 85.4 54.6 37.9 27.9 21.3 16.9 13.7 11.3 9.49
δmax < L / 200 724 134 43.7 19.1 9.93 5.80 3.67 2.47 1.74 1.27 0.96 0.74
δmax < L / 400 362 67.1 21.8 9.54 4.97 2.90 1.84 1.24 0.87 0.64 - -
T h re e sp a n s
L (m) = 0.25 0.50 0.75 1.00 1.25 1.50 1.75 2.00 2.25 2.50 2.75 3.00

889 427 190 107 68.3 47.4 34.9 26.7 21.1 17.1 14.1 11.9
δmax < L / 200 628 109 35.0 15.2 7.88 4.59 2.90 1.95 1.37 1.00 0.75 0.58
δmax < L / 400 314 54.7 17.5 7.59 3.94 2.30 1.45 0.98 0.69 0.50 - -

Moulded gratings with point load
γ mf : Partial coefficient
B : The width of the span equals the distribution of load
l : Distance between the ribs
Ak : Area of a rib
h : Height of the ribs
δ : is the deflection in mm
k : is an empirical safety factor which provides results on the "safe side"
Qd : is the design value point load indicated in kN
Qk : is the characteristic point load indicated in kN
B : is the span indicated in m
For moulded gratings supported along two rims and loaded with a point load as shown in Figure 5.5, the
calculations below can be made with the following prerequisites:
• point load distributed on 200 x 200 mm

• all joints are perpendicular to the support lines
• the joints in the gratings can transfer the full shear force.
Support lines
Support lines
Gratings Point load
Qd
PLAN SECTION
Figure 5.5.
Shear
0,5 · Qd fτ
Rim: <
B ·A γ mf
k
l
Qd fτ
Punching: <
4 · 200 · A γ mf
k
l

Moment
1
4 · Qd · B
< fb,0°
1 · B · t · h2
6 l
Serviceability limit state:
1
δ = · Q · B2
k
Max δ 1
<
L α
In which: α is typically selected between 200 and 400

k is an empirical factor which provides results on the "safe side".
k = 0.13 for h = 25 mm
k = 0.22 for h = 30 mm
k = 0.46 for h = 38 mm
k = 1.05 for h = 50 mm

Example 5.1: Uniformly distributed load on walkway plank
Fiberline walkway planks are to be used to cover a walkway at an industrial site. The distance between the
side beams is 1000 mm, and the walkway is not to be considered a stabilizing element.
The walkway planks must absorb the following loads:
Imposed load:
P(characteristic) = 3.0 kN/m2 ⇒ P(design value) = 1.5 · 3.0 kN/m2 = 4.5 kN/m2
P(characteristic) = 3.0 kN distributed on 300 mm x 300 mm. ⇒
P(design value) = 1.3 · 3.0 kN = 3.90 kN distributed on 300 mm x 300 mm.
Deformation requirements:
L
Maximum deflection
400
Static system:
in which L = 1000 mm.
Evidence
Not taking the dead weight into account, the following information is listed in the table on page 2.1.5 in the
section for 1.00 m:
Ultimate limit state: Pdesign value : 128 kN/m2 > 4.5 kN/m2 (OK!)
Serviceability limit state: Pcharacteristic : 9.06 kN/m > 3.00 kN/m2 (OK!)
Checking for punching shear:
P > Pdesign value
P = AShear area · fτpermissible
P= · = 25.4 kN
300 mm 25MPa
50 mm 1,3
25.4 kN > 3.0 kN. (OK!)

Figure 5.6
Plan bolt and washer Kickplate in the form of F-support

for top assembly of
4 walk sections
Assembly bolt
SECTION A-A
Walkway plank
Assembly of two sections
Plan

Example 5.2: Point load on moulded grating
Fiberline moulded gratings of h = 50 mm across are to be used at an industrial site to cover a pipe, so utility
vehicles can drive across it. See Figure 5.6. The distance between the support points is 750 mm. The moulded
gratings must absorb the following loads:
Dead weight: (Dead weight of moulded grating has not been taken into account)
Qd = 1.35 · 5.0 kN = 6.75 kN distributed on 200 mm x 200 mm.
Imposed load:
Passenger load: Qk = 1.5 kN/m2 ⇒ p(design value) = 1.5 · 1.5 kN/m2 = 2.25kN/m2
Utility vehicle load: Qk = 5.0 kN in wheel compression distributed on 200 mm x 200 mm ⇒
Qd = 1.5 · 5.0 kN = 7.50 kN distributed on 200 mm x 200 mm.
In the following example γ is = 0.0 as passenger load and utility vehicle load cannot take place
simultaneously.
Combined load:
This results in the following total load:
Passenger load: Qd = 0.0 · 1.0 · 1.5kN/m2 = 0.00 kN/m2
Utility vehicle load: Q d,total = 6.75kN + 7.50kN = 14.25kN
Deformation requirements:
Deflection may not exceed 1/200 · L.
This example considers the consequences of only one wheel compression at a time. For larger spans of moulded
gratings or short distances between wheels, the consequences of the double-load area between the two wheels
must always be taken into consideration.

Support lines
Support lines
Gratings Point load
Qd
PLAN SECTION
Figure 5.6. Span B = 750 mm. This example is valid for wheel distances of more than 750 mm.
Evidence
Shear.
Rim: fτ,akt < fτ,permissible
γ · 0.5 · Q active
fτ,akt =
B
l ·A shear
0.5 · 14.25 kN
= = 1.3 N/mm2
750 · 50 · 5.55mm
38
1.3 N/mm2 < 19.23 N/mm2 ( 25 N/mm2/1.3 ) (OK!)

Punching:
fτ,active < fτ,permissible
γ · Q active
fτ,active = 4 · 200 mm · A shear

I
14.25 kN
=
4 · 200 mm
· 50mm · 5.55mm
38
= 2.44 N/mm2
2.44 N/mm2 < 19.23 N/mm2 (25 N/mm2/1.3) (OK !)
Moment:
fb,0°,active < fb,0°,permissible
γ · ¼ · Q active · B
fb,0°,active =
1 · B · t · h2
6 I
¼ · 14.25kN · 0.75m
=
1 · 750mm · 5.55 · (50mm)2
6 38mm
= 58.5 N/mm2
58.5 N/mm2 < 184.6 N/mm2 (240 N/mm2 / 1.3) (OK!)
Uactive < upermissible

1
Uactive = · Q · B2
k
In cases in which only one variable load is calculated at a time, use 5.0 kN.
1
Uactive = · 5.0 kN · (0.75m)2 = 2.67 mm
1.05
2.67 mm < 3.75 mm (1/200 · 750 mm) (OK!)

Machining gratings
Different types of gratings are used as walkways on platforms and structures. Depending upon the purpose,
plank gratings, moulded gratings or pultruded gratings can be used. All three types must be sawn to adjust them
in size for use. Sawing is best done with diamond tools. Straight cutting should be done with a circular saw, and
curved cutting with a bandsaw or a compass saw.
Round holes of up to approximately Ø20 mm can be bored. Large holes should be bored with a spoon bit or
bored with a compass saw. It is possible that cutting large holes in pultruded gratings will remove a piece of a
rod that strengthens the grating. If this is a problem, the grating should be strengthened with a flat profile prior to
cutting.
Various fittings and clips for bolts are available for use in mounting the gratings.
A coat of thin lacquer is used to protect cut surfaces and make them water-repellent.
Mounting reinforcement
prior to cutting
Cutting a hole using a Cutting moulded gratings

compass saw with a with a circular saw
diamond blade
Flashing with sand paper Cutting moulded gratings

with a compass saw
Coating of cut surfaces Coating cut surfaces

CHAPTER 2
Section 2: Railings
Product range and load-bearing capacity ................................................................................... 2.2.02
Design of railing ........................................................................................................................... 2.2.03
Railing stanchions - Load-bearing capacity in kN/m .................................................................... 2.2.04
Detail 3.1 ..................................................................................................................................... 2.2.07
Detail 3.2 ..................................................................................................................................... 2.2.08
Example of railing construction .................................................................................................... 2.2.09

I
Product range and load-bearing capacity
Fiberline has developed a railing concept with the following three types of stanchion:
- Square tube 50 x 50 x 5 mm
The following tables are presented on the basis that the stanchions are being partially fixed to the structure.
Stanchions can only be fully fixed when mounted on concrete, or on very rigid steel or fibreglass beams. Other
situations should be considered as partial fixing, in which the rigidity of the handrail, the edge profile and the
transverse beam govern the degree to which stanchions can be fixed.
Figure 3.1 illustrates an example in which the stanchions are partially fixed, and in which the total rigidity
depends on the stiffness of the individual components.
In designing railings, evidence must normally be obtained for the following points:
- Strength and stiffness of knee and handrails.

Documentation is not necessary when using standard Fiberline handrails, nor in situations of
normal railing load, normal stiffness requirements and distances between stanchions of less
than 1.2 m.
- Strength and stiffness of stanchions
- Strength and stiffness of the edge beam on which the stanchions are mounted
- Strength and stiffness of possible transverse beam which helps to provide rigidity for the
edge beam
- Strength of detail for fixing stanchions

Example of ladder construction
g
ilin
ra
d
an
H
g
ilin
ra
ee
Kn
d
ar
bo
ng
Stanchion
rti
i
Sk
am
be
se
Ba
e
bl
ria
Va
Crossbeam L100x100x10
1000
Figure 3.1, in which stanchions are partially fixed to the structure
A railing is needed along a walkway on an industrial site. The height of the railing is to be 1000 mm. The
stanchions are to be mounted on the outside of a U-200 profile, therefore there is load only on the handrail:
q = 0,5 kN/m.
Stanchions are selected in 60 x 60 x 5 mm square tube, enabling the Fiberline railing to be be used directly.
Deflection may not exceed L / 200.
The following can be read in Table 3.6:
Pd = 4,0 kN/m
4,0 kN/m > 0,5 kN/m(OK!)
P = 0,47 kN/m ≈ 0,5 kN/m (OK!)
The distance between stanchions is limited to 0.75 m based on the above loading.

Railing stanchion - Load-bearing capacity in kN/m for safety class: normal
50 x 50 x 5 mm Square tube
One span H (mm) = 1000 1200

L (mm) = 750 1000 1250 750 1000 1250
Ultimate limit state 2.93 2.20 1.76 2.47 1.85 1.48
δmax < L / 100 0.57 0.43 0.34 0.39 0.30 0.24
δmax < L / 200 0.29 0.22 0.17 0.20 0.15 0.12
Table 3.1
Two spans H (mm) = 1000 1200
L (mm) = 750 1000 1250 750 1000 1250
δmax < L / 100 0.46 0.34 0.27 0.31 0.24 0.19
δmax < L / 200 0.23 0.17 0.14 0.16 0.12 0.10
Table 3.2
Three spans H (mm) = 1000 1200
L (mm) = 750 1000 1250 750 1000 1250
δmax < L / 100 0.52 0.39 0.31 0.35 0.27 0.22
δmax < L / 200 0.26 0.20 0.15 0.18 0.14 0.11
Table 3.3
One span H (mm) = 1000 1200
L (mm) = 750 1000 1250 750 1000 1250
δmax < L / 100 1.04 0.78 0.62 1.15 0.54 0.43
δmax < L / 200 0.52 0.39 0.31 0.58 0.27 0.22
Table 3.4
Two spans H (mm) = 1000 1200
L (mm) = 750 1000 1250 750 1000 1250
δmax < L / 100 0.83 0.62 0.50 0.92 0.43 0.35
δmax < L / 200 0.42 0.31 0.25 0.46 0.22 0.17
Table 3.5
L (mm) = 750 1000 1250 750 1000 1250
δmax < L / 100 0.95 0.71 0.56 1.05 0.49 0.39
δmax < L / 200 0.47 0.35 0.28 0.52 0.25 0.20
Table 3.6

Railing stanchion - Load-bearing capacity in kN/m for safety class: normal
One span H (mm) = 1000 1200
L (mm) = 750 1000 1250 750 1000 1250
δmax < L / 100 2.12 1.59 1.27 1.47 1.10 0.88
δmax < L / 200 1.06 0.80 0.64 0.74 0.55 0.44
Table 3.7
Two spans H (mm) = 1000 1200
L (mm) = 750 1000 1250 750 1000 1250
δmax < L / 100 1.70 1.27 1.02 1.18 0.88 0.70
δmax < L / 200 0.85 0.64 0.51 0.59 0.44 0.35
Table 3.8
L (mm) = 750 1000 1250 750 1000 1250
δmax < L / 100 1.93 1.45 1.15 1.34 1.00 0.80
δmax < L / 200 0.96 0.72 0.58 0.67 0.50 0.40
Table 3.9

Fig. 3.1
Hand railing
Square tube
Footrail
Section A-A
SOLID

Fig. 3.2
Hand railing
Square Tupe
Foot rail
Section A-A Stanchion in stainless steel
Walkway plank

Example of railing construction
In most cases, a railing consists of vertical square tubes which form stanchions, a handrail at the top,
an Ø40 mm tube as the kneerail in the middle, and a footrail at the bottom. If a railing cannot be
bolted to the side of a structure or stairs, it can be mounted on stainless steel feet for horizontal or
vertical mounting.
Stanchions are shortened to the correct length and bevel, and are prebored for bolts and kneerails.
Stanchions are positioned on the kneerail with the correct distance between them, and are secured
with two pop rivets in each stanchion, one from each side.
The handrail is pressed down over the stanchions and secured with two pop rivets on each side when
the stanchion is in the correct position.
The footrail is positioned and secured with two pop rivets in each stanchion.
Materials for use in

constructing railings
The handrail is mounted on

the stanchion with pop
rivets
The kneerail runs through

the stanchion and is
secured with pop rivets
The footrail is mounted with The stanchion is mounted

pop rivets. on the foot of the railing.

CHAPTER 2
Section 3: Stairs
Concept ............................................................................................................................... 2.3.03
Bases for construction .......................................................................................................... 2.3.04
Load-bearing capacity of strings in kN/m ............................................................................. 2.3.06
Detail 4.1 .............................................................................................................................. 2.3.08
Detail 4.2 .............................................................................................................................. 2.3.10
Detail 4.3 .............................................................................................................................. 2.3.11
Detail 4.4 .............................................................................................................................. 2.3.12
Detail 4.5 .............................................................................................................................. 2.3.13
Example of stair construction ............................................................................................... 2.3.14

I
Stairs
Fiberline has developed stairs with the following two (2) types of string:
− U 240 x 72 x 8 mm
− U 240 x 72 x 12 mm
In designing stairs, it is necessary to ensure that
− the individual steps have sufficient strength and rigidity to transfer the load to the strings; see
Table 5.2. In order for a stairs to be comfortable to use, it must fulfil rules for slope, as well as
rules for the rise and tread. See the following page.
- the stair string has sufficient strength and rigidity to transfer horizontal and perpendicular forces to
the supports.
− the stair string has sufficient torsional strength and rigidity to transfer possible torsional moment to
the supports.
The following tables are calculated with three (3) different slopes, 35º, 40º and 45º, as well as a horizontal load of
5% of the vertical load, corresponding to a stairs without a railing; and a horizontal load of 0.5 kN/ m, effective 0.9
m above floor level, corresponding to a stairs with a railing.
The values in the table on page 2.3.6 indicate the vertical load on a string, in which the step and the string are
partially fixed. The values indicated can be increased provided:
− the support conditions for the stairs are adjusted
− the stair string is calculated as being fully fixed to the supporting structure
− that sideways cross-bracing is used.
The improvements listed above require thorough calculation. If you need to increase the load capacity of a
stairs, you are welcome to contact the technical staff at Fiberline.

Bases for construction
Step rises and widths

In order for a stairs to function well, there must be a relatively constant ratio between the tread and the rise.
Tread
H
= Rise
No. of steps
Figure 5.0
The general rules are:
a. 2 rises + 1 tread = 63 cm
b. 1 rise + 1 tread = 42 cm
Rise in cm 16 16,5 17 17,5 18 18,5 19 19,5 20 20,5 21

a.
Tread in cm 31 30 29 28 27 26 25 24 23 22 21
Rise in cm 16 16,5 17 17,5 18 18,5 19 19,5 20 20,5 21

b.
Tread in cm 26 25,5 25 24,5 24 23,5 23 22,5 22 21,5 21
Table 5.1, in which the tread is the depth of the individual step and the rise is the difference in height between
two steps. The rise is always identical between the steps of an entire staircase.
Normally a rise of 17 to 20 cm is selected, and a tread of 23 to 29 cm. The slope of the stair string is normally
between 35º and 45º. However, in designing stairs, the stipulations laid down by the authorities should always
be consulted.

Maximum step widths
Table 5.2 indicates maximum step widths for various types of deck as steps. Fiberline technical staff should be
contacted if values other than those listed are to be used. The conditions for the values listed are:
− that the steps can absorb a concentrated load of 2 kN positioned at the middle of the step
− that the steps can absorb a uniformly distributed load of 3.0 kN/m2
− maximum deflection of 1/ 200 x the width of the stairs.
The maximum stair widths listed in the table fulfil both the strength and the rigidity requirements for the individual
step.
Designation Maximum recommended step w idth
Walkway plank, h = 40 mm 1200 mm
Pultruded grating, h = 25 mm 600 mm
Moulded grating, h = 25 mm 500 mm
Table 5.2. Recommended step widths under the conditions listed above.

Load-bearing capacity of string in kN/m - Horizontal load corresponding to 5% of the vertical load
U240 x 72 x 8
Slope of stairs a / Length L / Height H / Breaking point f d / Application limit point Maximum def lection < L/200 and Maximum def lection < L/400
α 35 40 45
L (m) 1.50 2.00 2.50 3.00 3.50 4.00 1.50 2.00 2.50 3.00 3.50 4.00 1.50 2.00 2.50 3.00 3.50 4.00
H (m) 1.05 1.40 1.75 2.10 2.45 2.80 1.26 1.68 2.10 2.52 2.94 3.36 1.50 2.00 2.50 3.00 3.50 4.00
fd 17.00 13.00 10.00 8.00 7.00 2.00 17 13.00 10.00 8.00 7.00 2.00 17.00 13.00 10.00 8.00 7.00 2.00
L / 200 12.10 6.70 4.60 3.30 2.00 1.30 10.50 5.80 4.10 2.90 1.70 1.10 9.00 5.00 3.50 2.50 1.50 1.00
L / 400 6.05 3.35 2.30 1.65 1.00 0.65 5.25 2.90 2.05 1.45 0.85 0.55 4.50 2.50 1.75 1.25 0.75 0.50
U240 x 72 x 12
Slope of stairs a / Length L / Height H / Breaking point f d / Application limit point Maximum def lection < L/200 and Maximum def lection < L/400
α 35 40 45
L (m) 2.00 2.50 3.00 3.50 4.00 4.50 2.00 2.50 3.00 3.50 4.00 4.50 2.00 2.50 3.00 3.50 4.00 4.50
H (m) 1.40 1.75 2.10 2.45 2.80 3.15 1.68 2.10 2.52 2.94 3.36 3.78 2.00 2.50 3.00 3.50 4.00 4.50
fd 19.50 15.50 13.00 11.00 9.50 8.50 19.50 15.50 13.00 11.00 9.50 8.50 19.50 15.50 13.00 11.00 9.50 8.50
L / 200 16.6 9.40 6.30 4.60 2.60 1.80 14.60 8.20 5.40 4.00 2.20 1.60 12.50 7.00 4.80 3.50 2.00 1.30
L / 400 8.4 4.70 3.15 2.30 1.30 0.90 7.30 4.10 2.70 2.00 1.10 0.80 6.25 3.35 2.40 1.75 1.00 0.65

Load-bearing capacity of string in kN/m - 0.5 kN/m horizontal load calculated 0.9 m above floor level
U240 x 72 x 8
Slope of stairs a / Length L / Height H / Breaking point fd / Application limit point Maximum deflection < L/200 and Maximum deflection < L/400
α 35 40 45
L (m) 1.50 2.00 2.50 3.00 3.50 4.00 1.50 2.00 2.50 3.00 3.50 4.00 1.50 2.00 2.50 3.00 3.50 4.00
H (m) 1.05 1.40 1.75 2.10 2.45 2.80 1.26 1.68 2.10 2.52 2.94 3.36 1.50 2.00 2.50 3.00 3.50 4.00
fd 17.00 13.00 10.00 8.00 7.00 6.50 17.00 13.00 10.00 8.00 7.00 6.50 17.00 13.00 10.00 8.00 7.00 6.50
L / 200 36.80 10.70 1.34 - - - 32.20 9.36 1.17 - - - 27.50 8.00 1.00 - - -
L / 400 18.4 5.35 0.67 - - - 16.1 4.68 0.59 - - - 13.75 4.00 0.50 - - -
U240 x 72 x 12
Slope of stairs a / Length L / Height H / Breaking point fd / Application limit point Maximum deflection < L/200 and Maximum deflection < L/400
α 35 40 45
L (m) 2.00 2.50 3.00 3.50 4.00 4.50 2.00 2.50 3.00 3.50 4.00 4.50 2.00 2.50 3.00 3.50 4.00 4.50
H (m) 1.40 1.75 2.10 2.45 2.80 3.15 1.68 2.10 2.52 2.94 3.36 3.78 2.00 2.50 3.00 3.50 4.00 4.50
fd 19.50 15.50 13.00 11.00 9.50 8.50 19.50 15.50 13.00 11.00 9.50 8.50 19.50 15.50 13.00 11.00 9.50 8.50
L / 200 20.00 5.36 - - - - 14.60 4.68 - - - - 12.50 4.00 - - - -
L / 400 10.00 2.68 - - - - 7.30 2.34 - - - - 6.25 2.00 - - - -

Design of stairs
A stairs is needed at an industrial site with the following primary dimensions:
Width 1.0 m, height 2.0 m with a slope of 45°.
The stanchions of the handrail are to be mounted on the outside of a U - 240x72x8 profile which is supported in
accordance with Figure 4.1.
The stairs is to be designed for a uniformly distributed load of 3.0 kN/ m2, and the railing is to be calculated as
a horizontal load of 0.5 kN/ m.
Requirements for deformation of the string are maximum 1/ 400 x L.
The following information is listed on page 2.3.7, as it is a condition that it is possible to calculate the steps as
partially fixed in the strings.
qd = 1,5 · 3.0 kN/m2 · 0.5 m = 2.25 kN/m
qd < 13.00 kN/m. (OK)
qk = 1.0 · 3.0 kN/m2 · 0.5 m = 1.50 kN/m
qk < 4.00 kN/m. (OK)
Thus, a U240x72x8 mm string can be selected, and no further calculations are necessary, since the calculations
follow the conditions laid down in the tables.

Construction detail 4.5
Figure. 4.1

Stairs foot
Flange is cut 100 mm above the bottom step
Section A-A
Adhesive base

Section A-A
Pultruded grating
planks or
moulded grating

Fixing of stanchions
Inside solid
vv
Section A-A
Inside solid
vv

Stairs top
Section A-A

Example of construction of stairs
A typical stairs consists of two strings made of u-profiles and steps consisting of
planks, pultruded grating or moulded grating. The railing of the stairs will typically
be constructed as a standard Fiberline railing, secured on the side of the strings by
bolts. See the section on railings on page 2.2.02. The strings are cut off at the ends
to fit against the underlying layer at the floor and at the top.
The steps are secured to the strings using angle profiles which are mounted on the
inner side of the strings with M8 plank bolts. The steps are also secured to the
angle profiles with M8 plank bolts. If necessary, an intermediate layer can be used
to avoid damaging the steps when tightening the bolts.
A stairs is normally secured to the underlying layer by bolts. As the steps are the
only connection between the strings, it can be necessary to mount another form of
connection in some cases; for example, threaded rods to connect the strings.
The railing consists of stanchions of square tube which are secured on the side of
the strings. The distances between stanchions are adjusted so stanchions are
positioned at the ends of steps. Stanchions are mounted with two (2) M8 plank
bolts which also secure the angle profile that provides support under the step.
The handrail fits down onto the stanchions, and is secured by four (4) pop rivets.
A round pipe is used for the kneerail. It passes through a Ø41 mm hole that is bored
through the stanchions parallel to the strings. The kneerail is secured in each stanchion
by two (2) pop rivets.
The footrail can be mounted approximately 10 mm above the string by two (2) pop
rivets in each stanchion.
Materials for use in Fiberline planks mounted

constructing stairs on an angle profile
The step mounted on the Bolts are positioned as

string shown to secure
stanchions and steps

CHAPTER 3: BRACKETS FOR ASSEMBLY
The products and how to use them ...................................................................................................... 3.1.03
Example 8.1………………………………………………………………. ............................................ 3.1.04
Example 8.2 ................................................................................................................................ 3.1.07
Example 8.3 ................................................................................................................................ 3.1.09
Example 8.4 ................................................................................................................................ 3.1.12

The products and how to use them
Brackets for assembling Fiberline structural profiles have been developed in stainless steel. The objective is to
ease mounting and reduce the need for preadjustment of pultruded profiles.
The brackets are normally formed to follow part of the surface of the pultruded profile; for example, on the inside
of a U-profile or on the outside of a square profile.
Stainless steel bolts ensure transfer of forces between brackets and profile. In addition, they ensure that the
brackets remain in position during operation.
The brackets are cut by laser beam and are CNC bent to their finished geometry. In situations which require
brackets that are not available in the standard range, the Fiberline technical department will normally be able to
help in manufacturing special brackets.
On the following pages, there are a number of examples of designing joints in which stainless steel fittings are
used. In these examples, the most important criteria for determining the load-bearing capacity of the joints are
included. Below each example, the supplementary investigations are listed which are necessary for investigating
all the conditions that are relevant to the static load-bearing capacity.
There are examples of brackets for assembly in the photograph below.
Brackets for efficient assembly of profile Example of joint with a Fiberline bracket.
structures. EP patent No. 0819200

Example 8.1
90° joint between two I-profiles 160 x 80 x 8
The assembly brackets follow the body and the inside
of the flanges on the through-going and adjacent profile.
The bracket is made of stainless steel with a yield stress
of 220 MPa.
Vertical shear load:

Figure 3.2.1 illustrates the forces in the joint.
The load is transferred as contact compression
between the bracket and the bottom side of the top
flange of the adjacent profile.
The force is transferred through the stainless steel
bracket to the through-going bottom flange of the
profile.
As the through-going profile has relatively little
torsional rigidity, the static model must ensure that
the shear from the adjacent profile can be transferred
to the body of the through-going profile by the joint.
Therefore, there are secondary forces to ensure
balance. The eccentricity moment causes contact
compression between the top flanges of the two
profiles, and tension in the bolts perpendicular to the
through-going body of the profile.
Shear in the top flange of the adjacent profile
Contact compression between the profile and the

Figure 3.2.1
bracket is concentrated near the end section of the
profile.
The capacity of the two flanges is evaluated as
Q1 = ΔL · tf · ftd · 2
= 40 mm · 8 mm · = 12 307 N
25 MPa
Shear in the stainless steel bracket1,3
The dimension of the plate area that is affected by shear is calculated as 96 mm x 140 mm.
The load-bearing capacity of the bracket in shear is evaluated according to EC 3 (ENV 1993-1-1). The designations
below are in accordance with EC3.
kt = 5,34 = 15.4
2
( 140
96
)
lw = =
d · 37,4 · √kt 140 · 37,4 · √15,4
tw · ε 1,0 · 1,03
= 0.93

Section A-A
Brackets in stainless steel
T= 1 mm
Plan
Figure 3.1.2

As lw is greater than 0.8, the load-bearing capacity of the bracket in shear is reduced due to the stability.
τba = (1 - 0.625 x (λw - 0.8)) · ty = 0.92 · 127 MPa = 117 MPa
The maximum shear that can be transferred through the two brackets is
140 mm · 1,0 mm · 220 MPa
Q2 = d · tw · tba · 2 = = 27 357 N
√3 / 1,3 x 2
The shear fracture in the bottom flange of the through-going profile.
The load width of the bottom flange of the through-going profile is evaluated as an effective value of 100 mm.
The capacity of the flange is evaluated as
Q3 = ΔL · tf · ft
25 MPa
= 100 mm · 8 mm · = 15 384 N
1,3
The capacity of the joint with regard to vertical shear force is
Qmax = min { Q1, Q2, Q3 } = 12.3 kN
Supplementary calculations not contained in the example:
− normal pressure force (NF) between the top flanges of the adjacent and through-going profiles
− bolt strength (PB) perpendicular to the body of the through-going profile
− shear between brackets and the body of the adjacent profile
Normal force in the adjacent profile
With normal pressure force in the adjacent profile, there will be a moment due to deflection in the bracket at the
bolts in the through-going profile.
The capacity with regard to normal tensile force in the adjacent profile is
1
2 · 124 mm · 6 · (1,0 mm)2 · 220 MPa
N = = 227 N
40 mm
If the load-bearing capacity is not sufficient for the purpose, a steel plate can be placed between the bracket
and the nuts on the bolts through the body of the through-going profile.
Supplementary calculations not contained in this example:
− normal pressure force (NF) between the top flanges in the adjacent and through-going profiles
− bolt strength (PB) perpendicular to the body of the through-going profile
− shear between brackets and the body of the adjacent profile.

Example 8.2
90° joint between I-profiles 300 x 150 x 15 and I 200 x 100 x 10
The joint transfers the shear from the adjacent profile to the through-going profile by way of two (2) types of
bracket:
an angle bracket that is pressed in between the flanges of the adjacent profile so it connects with the body of the
profile, and an angle bracket that connects with the body of the through-going profile and the inside of the
flanges. The shear is transferred by bolts.
Shear
For calculation purposes, the joint has a vertical, downward shear force which must be transferred from the
profile being connected to the through-going profile.
Bolts between brackets:

Pin-bearing strength of bolt in sheet1.5 mm:
3,2 · 16 mm · 1,5 mm · 220 MPa
M16 :3.2 · d · t · fy = = 13.0 kN
1,3
Bolt strengths must be statically equivalent to the shear force (Q) positioned in the centre line of the body of the
through-going profile.
Bolt strengths, vertical:

Q
ΔNB1 =
2
Bolt strengths, horizontal
ΔNB2 = Q · 30 mm = 0.375 Q
80 mm
The total bolt strength is thus
NB = 0.625 Q.
The capacity of the joint with regard to the pin-bearing strength of the bolts is determined by
0,625
Q = = 20.8 kN
13,0
Bolts in the through-going profile
Load-bearing capacity of bolts M16 in the body of I 300 x 150 x 15
M16 : d · t · fc1 = 16 mm · 15 mm · 240 MPa = 44.3 kN

1,3
The pin-bearing strength of M12 bolt in sheet 1.5 mm is
3,2 · 12 mm · 1,5 mm · 220 MPa
M12 :3.2 · d · t · fy = = 9.7 kN
1,3
The total capacity of the four M12 bolts is thus 4 · 9.7 kN = 38.8 kN
Shear in the top flange of the adjacent profile

The contact compression between profile and bracket is concentrated near the end section of the profile.
Q1 = ΔL · tf · fτ,d · 2
= 50 mm · 10 mm · 2 · 25 MPa = 19.2 kN
1,3
Load-bearing capacity of joint
The total vertical shear force which can be transferred from the profile being connected to the through-going
profile is thus 19.2 kN.

Figure 3.2.2

Example 8.3
Butt joint between two I-profiles 200 x 100 x 10
The joint is typically used in joining two profile sections, the length of which exceeds the lengths normally
supplied. The bracket is made of stainless steel sheet with a thickness of 1.0 mm.
Normal force in I 200 x 100 x 10
Capacity of bolts in pultruded profile:

20 mm · 10 mm · 240 MPa
M20:d · t · fc0°,d = = 36.9 kN
1,3
M12:d · t · fc0°,d = 12 mm · 10 mm · 240 MPa = 22.2 kN
1,3
The maximum normal force which can be transferred from bolt to profile is the sum total of the capacity of the
individual bolts.
N1 = 4 · 36.9 kN + 4 · 22.2 kN = 236.4 kN
Capacity of bolts in brackets:

3,2 · 20 mm · 1,0 mm · 220 MPa
M20:3.2 · d · t · fyd = = 10,8 kN
1,3
3,2 · 12 mm · 1,0 mm · 220 MPa
M12:3.2 · d · t · fyd = = 6.5 kN
1,3
The maximum normal force that can be transferred from bolts to brackets is the sum total of the capacity of the
individual bolts.
N1 = 8 · 10.8 kN + 4 · 6.5 kN = 112.4 kN
The capacity of the joint with regard to normal

tensile force is thus determined by the bracket. The
capacity is 112.4 kN, corresponding to axial tension
in I 200 x 100 x 10 of 29 MPa.
Moment in I 200 x 100 x 10

The figure illustrates force sequence in the joint.
The moment in I 200 x 100 x 10 causes a normal

pressure force between the two top flanges of the
profiles.
The bottom part of the bracket transfers the tension

between the bottom bolts in the joint. The maximum
compressive force that can be transferred between
the top flanges is
Figure 3.3.1
N1 = b · t · fc0°d
= 100mm · 10 mm · 240 MPa

1,3
= 184.6 kN

Plan
Tensile strength can be increased considerably by these 4x12 M12 bolts
Brackets in stainless steel

T= 1,0 mm
Section A-A
Figure 3.3.2

The maximum shear that can be transferred from profile to bracket by means of bolts according to
page 3.1.10 is
M 20 10.8 kN / cut
M12 6.5 kN / cut
M12 in the bottom flange and the bottom row M20 is considered as contributing to absorption of the stress.
The capacity of the joint with regard to moment is thus
Mmax = 4 · 10.8 kN · 145 mm + 4 · 6.5 kN · 185 mm

= 6.3 kNm + 4.8 kNm
= 11.1 kNm
A moment of 14.4 kNm in I 200 x 100 x 10

corresponds to an edge stress of 47 MPa.
Shear in I 200 x 100 x 10
The figure illustrates the force sequence in the joint.

The shear in I 200 x 100 x 10 results in contact
compression between the flanges of the profile and
the bracket, corresponding to the contact
compression which is illustrated in Example 8.1.
The shear in the top flange of the profile that is

connected, the contact compression between profile
and bracket, is concentrated near the end section of Figure 3.3.3
the profile.
Q1 = ΔL · tf · fτd · 2 = 50 mm · 10 mm · 2 · 25 MPa = 19.2 kN

1,3
Shear in the stainless steel bracket
The dimension of the plate area on the bracket which is affected by shear, is calculated as 112 mm x 180 mm.
The load-bearing capacity of the shear field is evaluated according to EC 3 (ENV 1993-1-1). The calculations
below are in accordance with EC3.
5,34
kτ = 2 = 17.8
(112
180 )
d · 37,4 · √kτ 180 · 37,4 · √17,8
λw = = = 1.11
tw · ε 1,0 · 1,03
As λw is greater than 0.8, the load-bearing capacity of the bracket in the shear field is reduced due to
stability.
0,81 · 220 MPa
τ = (1 - 0.625 · (λ - 0.8)) x t = √3 · 1,3 = 79 MPa
ba w yd
The maximum shear that can be transferred through the two brackets is
Q2 = d · tw · τba · 2 = 180 mm · 1.0 mm · 79 MPa · 2 = 28.5 kN
The load-bearing capacity of the joint which is determined by the load-bearing capacity of the profile is 19.2 kN,
corresponding to shear stress of 9.6 MPa.

Example 8.4
Support brackets for beams I 200 x 100 x 10 on columns of square tube 100 x 100 x 8
The fitting is used where vertical loads from a beam must be

transferred to a column.
Under the beam ( I 200 x 100 x 10 ) the bracket is L-formed,

around the column, U-formed.
To transfer vertical shear from bracket to column, bolts are

positioned in the tongues which connect to the sides of the co-
lumn facing the beam, and facing the opposite direction,
respectively.
Figure 3.4.1 illustrates the forces in the joint. The shear from I 200
x 100 x 10 causes a compressive force which, via the vertical
side of the bracket, is transferred to the bottom side of the bracket.
The bottom part of the bracket presses against the front side of
the column, and the top part presses against the rear side of the
column.
Shear in the stainless steel bracket

The dimension of the plate which is influenced by shear is
calculated as 108 mm x 150 mm. The stress occurs 58 mm from
the column. The narrowness of the field of the profile is calculated
Figure 3.4.1
as approximately
75 mm · √12
λ = = 130
2,0 mm
A strip of 75 mm is calculated to be effective to withstand the absorption of stress.
The relative narrowness is determined as

λ λ 130
λξ = = = = 1.34
λ0° π· 0,5
π· 210000 0,5
( )
E
fy ( 220 )
Using column curve C, the limits for the inclined pressure in the plate are determined as
Dmax = χ · fyd · t · beff
= 0.37 · 220 MPa · 2 mm · 75 mm

1,3
= 9.4 kN
The vertical component of the inclined pressure is 8.8 kN, while the horizontal component is 3.4 kN.
The bottom M16 bolt transfers the vertical load from the fitting to the column.

Plan
Section A-A
Square tube
Brackets in Section B-B

stainless steel
T= 2,0 mm
Figure 3.4.2

Pin-bearing strength of the bracket is
3,2 · 16 mm · 2,0 mm · 220 MPa

M16 : 3.2 · d · t · fyd = = 17.3 kN
1,3
The force which can be transferred from bolt to profile is
M16 : d · t · fc0°d = 16 mm · 8 mm · 240 MPa = 30.7 kN

1,3
The maximum shear which can be transferred from beam to column is thus 8.8 kN.

CHAPTER 4: FIRE TECHNICAL PROPERTIES
Fire Technical Properties ........................................................................................................... 6.1.03
Fiberline Composites A/S - Design Manual - Chapter 4 - Revised 4.1.1

Fire technical properties
Fiberline are currently conducting research in cooperation with universities to ascertain fire-resistance capabilities,
as well as to develop calculation methods for profiles during fire and loading.
Fiberline quality P4506 is a fire-inhibiting product which has been approved in accordance with BS 476 Part 7/
6, and is very flame retardant and flame resistant.
Fiberline quality F4010 is the optimal fire-technical phenol matrix. Data for this quality are not included in the
construction manual, but can be obtained by contacting Fiberline.
As fire requirements vary greatly according to use and national legislation, specific requirements for particular
structures should always be obtained in each specific case.
In many cases, it is possible for Fiberline to adjust the content of the matrix materials to fulfil special fire
technical requirements.
Fiberline Composites A/S - Design Manual - Chapter 4 - Revised 4.1.3

CHAPTER 5: CHEMICAL RESISTANCE
Introduction ........................................................................................................................... 5.1.03

Fiberline qualities compared to metals and wood ................................................................. 5.1.04
Chemical resistance ............................................................................................................. 5.1.05

I
Introduction
The chemical resistance list contains an overview of three Fiberline qualities placed in various chemical
environments. The figures indicate the highest known operational temperatures in C°, under which the profiles
have displayed good service life in the specific chemical environments. The results have been obtained either
through experience from industrial use, or by means of laboratory tests (ASTM C581) carried out by Fiberline
suppliers.
If the chemical influence is not permanent/concentrated, but short-term/weak (as from steam or waste) it is
possible to use gratings, planks and structural supports in chemical environments which are indicated as NR
(Not recommended), or in higher temperatures than indicated.
In contrast to metals, Fiberline structural profiles are not subject to electrolytic corrosion.
The results in this chemical resistance list are guidelines only, and therefore ought not to be considered as
instructions for the chemical resistance of the various qualities of profile. Any combination of chemicals or
combined environmental stress should be discussed with Fiberline or tested prior to commencing use.
All information contained in this list is supplied in good faith as guidelines for our customers, with no liability
whatsoever for Fiberline.
Fiberline reserve the right to make changes without prior notice.
Please note that the chemical resistance values indicated are based on profiles with surface veils and sealing of
all machined surfaces.

Fiberline qualities compared to metals and wood
The chemical resistance of three (3) Fiberline matrix qualities compared to selected metal qualities and wood in
twelve (12) different corrosive environments. The figures in the table indicate the highest known operational tempera-
ture in Cº:
Chemical load
Material 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11
Fiberline P2600 40 NR 40 40 40 30 NR 40 35 NR 40
Fiberline P4506 50 NR 50 50 50 40 NR 50 40-60 NR 50
Fiberline P3510 100 75 90 100 90 100 45 90 95 45 90
Steel NR NR NR NR NR NR R NR NR NR NR
Galvanized steel NR NR NR NR NR NR NR NR NR NR NR
Wood NR NR NR NR R NR NR
SS 304 NR R R R R R NR R# LC
SS 316 („Acid-proof “) NR R R LC# R NR R NR R# LC NR
Titan R R R R# NR R R R R# R
Rapid alloy „B“ R R R R NR R R R R NR R
Rapid alloy „C“ R R R LC R R R NR R R LC

Monel metal 400 LC LC LC LC NR R NR R NR R
Aluminium LC LC NR R NR NR NR NR LC NR NR
Copper/Nickel 70/30 LC NR LC R NR R NR LC
Chemical load:
1) Aluminium chloride 5% 4) Calcium chloride 7) Sodium hydroxide 10% 10) Sodium hypo chlorite 5%
2) Ammonium hydroxide 5% 5) Iron nitrate 5% 8) Mercury chloride 11) Sulphuric acid 15%
3) Barium chloride 5% 6) Hydrochloric acid 10% 9) Sodium chloride
LC : Light corrosion
R : Resistant
NR : Not recommended
#
: Surface pitting can be expected
The values in the tables for metals and wood are valid for surrounding temperatures of approximately 20 Cº.

Chemical resistance – Fiberline Profiles
Fiberline Composites A/ S test the chemical resistance of its pultruded profiles in a representative selection of
chemicals which are listed below. The chemical resistance list of our suppliers of polyesters has been
supplemented with the list below, which shows the resistance capabilities of Fiberline profiles in corrosive
environments. The data comparisons enable us to provide improved service and consulting for our customers,
in selecting the appropriate quality of polyester.
Chemical Concentration Chemical Fiberline Fiberline Fiberline

% formula P2600 P4506 P3510
Alcohol, ethyl 95% C2H5OH 25°C 30°C 35°C
Ammonium hydroxide2 5% NH4OH NR NR 75°C
Iron (III) chloride All FeCI3 35°C 50°C 95°C
Sodium hydroxide2 10 % NaOH NR NR 45°C
Sodium hypochlorite1,2 5% NaOCl NR NR 45°C
Sodium chloride All NaCl 35°C 50°C 95°C
Nitric acid 5% HNO3 NR NR 65°C
Hydrochloric acid 10 % HCl 30°C 40°C 95°C
Toluene 100 % C7H8 NR NR 35°C
Water 100 % H2O 35°C 40-60°C 90°C
NR: Not recommended
1 Contact Fiberline for specific recommendations
2 Fiberline P3510 recommended

CHAPTER 6 MACHINING AND HANDLING PROFILES
Section 1 Machining pultruded profiles ............................................................................................ 6.1.03
Section 2 Handling and transporting profiles .................................................................................... 6.2.03
Fiberline konstruktionshåndbog - Kapitel 6 - Rev. 2002

CHAPTER 6
Section 1 Machining pultruded profiles

I
Machining pultruded profiles
It is often necessary to finish pultruded profiles prior to final use. This is an uncomplicated process. Machining
pultruded profiles can be compared to machining wood, and wood-machining equipment can be used. However,
due to the abrasion resistance of the reinforcement, steel-machining equipment is recommended. Hard-metal
or diamond tools should be used when working with large series.
Examples of hand tools.
Machining fibre-reinforced plastics causes dust. This dust is not considered dangerous to health, due to the
size and form of the individual particles. However, dust levels from machining fibreglass profiles should be
kept as low as possible, as the dust can cause itching and breathing irritations. It can also cause temporary
rashes on sensitive skin. Ordinary ventilation and use of a protective cream can prevent these inconveniences.
Pultruded fibreglass-reinforced profiles are elastic, and twisting and bending can occur when machining long
profiles. Therefore, it is always necessary to ensure fixed, vibration-free support and retention.
The following indications are based on many years' experience which Fiberline Composites A/S have acquired
in machining pultruded profiles. If finished profiles are to be used in chemically aggressive environments, it is
necessary to seal all cuts. Please contact Fiberline Composites A/S for more information.
Cutting
An ordinary hacksaw can be used for a limited number of cuts, and a profile can be shortened the same way
as wood with an ordinary handsaw. A circular saw is ideal for straight cuts. During sawing, the profile should be
securely retained on a vibration-free bed. A diamond saw blade should be used when sawing large series for
smooth cuts without burring. The cutting speed should be 60 mm/second, and to achieve the best results,
feed lightly. Feeding too heavily merely increases wear on the blade.
Shortening with a circular saw

Boring
Boring in the profiles is relatively easy. An ordinary metal drill can be used to bore individual holes or small
series of holes. Use of a specially designed drill is recommended for boring large series of holes. At speeds
of between 3600 and 3900 rpm and using a pillar drill, this type of drill delivers a machine time of approximately
30,000 holes (Ø 10 mm). The drill produces a sharp hole rim without burr – also at the drill exit. The drill is
designed to give as little vibration as possible when boring perpendicular to the surface, which is an added
advantage when using hand drills. For boring large holes, a spoon bit with a centre bit is recommended. Burr
on hole rims can be avoided by boring part-way through from one side of the profile, and then the rest of the
way from the other side.
Boring with an ordinary

drill, spoon bit or specially
designed drill.
Grinding and deflashing
Pultruded profiles can be deflashed with sandpaper. Use of a belt grinder at high speed and slow advancement
is recommended.
Deflashing with sandpaper
Turning
Hard-metal plates should be used in turning. Speeds of up to 400 m/min. can be used, and a rake angle on the
cutting edge between 10 - 15° will give the best result. Feeding depends primarily on the stability of the set-
up, but is typically between 0.05 and 0.5 mm/rev. Depending on the machine and the set-up, the depth of cut
can be up to 10 mm. Using rounded lathe tools and air or liquid cooling results in the best surface finish.
Turning can also be done with a rotating diamond milling machine mounted in the tool holder.

Milling
Milling with a hard-metal edge or diamond mill is recommended. In this type of machining, tools with
a rake angle on the cutting edge of between 5° and 15° are recommended. Feeding can be up to 0.5
mm/rev., and speeds of up to 1000 m/min. will give the best results. Too heavy feeding will cause
unwanted heating of the surface and gives less satisfactory results.
Machining on a stationary
mill or a CNC mill.
Punching
Pultruded profiles of up to 4 mm in plate thickness, can be punched with an ordinary hard-metal
punch. For thicker sheets (up to 6 mm), a specially designed punch should be used which gradually
punches through the profiles. Punched holes are 0.05 - 0.1 mm smaller than the punch. The clearance
between the punch and the matrix ought to be approximately 50% less than when punching steel.
Threading
Threading cannot be recommended for large loads, although self-threading and self-drilling screws are
used to a large extent. If there is a need for threaded attachments in sheets or plates, blind rivet nuts
of various types in stainless steel or aluminium can be used.
Water jet cutting

Water jet cutting is used for cutting in plates and massive profiles of up to approximately 20 mm in
thickness. In non-massive profiles, using water jets can be problematic. The jet becomes diffused on
cutting through the first plate, and is therefore unable to cut the plates to the rear with sufficient
accuracy. Profiles can also be machined by laser cutting, using a protective gas such as argon.

CHAPTER 6
Section 2 Handling and transporting profiles

Handling and transporting structures
Point load
Avoid point load during lifting, transportation and unloading. Always ensure an even distribution of the load.
Lifting with straps

Lifting straps are positioned so the bearing points are situated in extensions of the vertical reinforcements of the
structure. The lifting straps must show a line which is as straight as possible between bearing point and lifting
point.
During lifting, the structure must be transversely reinforced where the lifting straps bend inward towards the
lifting point at the top edge of the structure. All bearing and contact points between straps and structure must be
protected against marks and scratching, using wood or another solid material.
When the direction of pull is other than 90° on the lifting surface, the lifting straps must be ensured against
slipping by clamps or other means of secure retention.
Lifting with a fork-lift

Lifting with a fork-lift must be done in accordance with the same criteria as those for straps: beside reinforced
points and with some form of protection between the forks and the load.
Transportation
During transportation, it must be ensured that the block bottom and other support remain in the correct posi-
tion, either by being fastened to the bed or to the structure. The position of the structure in the mode of trans-
port must be ensured with straps.
The restraining straps must be positioned on the structure at the edge of the supports and according to the
same principles as for lifting straps – in other words, beside the reinforcements (See Figure 6.2). It can be
necessary to calculate the necessary number of supports for use during transportation.
Unloading
Unloading a structure onto a bed must be done on layers of blocks that level the unloading points to one level.
The layers of blocks must be placed beside the vertical reinforcements of the structure.
If several construction elements are placed on top of each other for unloading or transportation, the support
points, intermediate layers and reinforcements in the structure must describe a column (See Figure 6.3)
It is self-evident that the number of elements placed on top of each other should be limited, so the danger of
shifting is avoided.
Mounting
Never use a hammer or impact tools for adjusting structures of fibreglass-reinforced polyester. Handle with care.
The form of pultruded profiles cannot be adjusted by bending in either a cold or heated state.
Adjusting
Inaccuracies should not be compensated for by deformation of the fibreglass profiles. Adjustments should be
made with the aid of support or distance blocks.
Other information
Fibreglass-reinforced polyester is a strong material. However, it is possible for a surface to be spoiled by
scratches or violent impact. In the event of damage, contact Fiberline Composites A/S for advice.

Lifting point
Lifting strap
Lifting strap
Transverse support
of profiles
Transverse
Figure 6.1 support of profiles
Layer of supporting blocks

Bearing point Bearing point
Transverse support of profiles

Transverse support of profiles
Figure 6.2
Safety straps
Transverse support
of profiles
Support 1234567890123456789012345678901212345678901234567890123456789012123456789
123456789012345678901234567Layer of supporting blocks
1234567890123456789012345678901212345678901234567890123456789012123456789
123456789012345678901234567
1234567890123456789012345678901212345678901234567890123456789012123456789
123456789012345678901234567
1234567890123456789012345678901212345678901234567890123456789012123456789
123456789012345678901234567
1234567890123456789012345678901212345678901234567890123456789012123456789
Transport bed 123456789012345678901234567
1234567890123456789012345678901212345678901234567890123456789012123456789
123456789012345678901234567
1234567890123456789012345678901212345678901234567890123456789012123456789
123456789012345678901234567
Figure 6.3
Support Layer of supporting blocks
Support 1234567890123456789012345678901212345678901234567890123456789012123456789 Layer of supporting blocks

123456789012345678901234567
1234567890123456789012345678901212345678901234567890123456789012123456789
123456789012345678901234567
1234567890123456789012345678901212345678901234567890123456789012123456789
123456789012345678901234567
1234567890123456789012345678901212345678901234567890123456789012123456789
123456789012345678901234567
1234567890123456789012345678901212345678901234567890123456789012123456789
Bed 123456789012345678901234567
1234567890123456789012345678901212345678901234567890123456789012123456789
123456789012345678901234567

CHAPTER 7:
ENVIRONMENT AND DISPOSAL / RECYCLING
Section 1 Environment during manufacturing and machining ................................................................ 7.1.03

Environmental impact at the user's site ................................................................................ 7.1.03
Waste handling / recycling .................................................................................................... 7.1.04

Environment and disposal / Recycling
Environment during manufacturing and machining
Since 1 May 1979, Fiberline Composites A/S have manufactured profiles and structures with the approval of the
environmental authorities. Inspections are made on a regular basis.
Fiberline Composites A/S employ the manufacturing method known as pultrusion. This is a process whereby
fibres are pulled through a device, into which liquid thermoset plastics are pumped to impregnate the fibres. The
liquid themoset plastic is cured with the aid of heat and catalysts are added.
The pultrusion process is very friendly to the environment. At Fiberline, manufacturing is done in closed moulds
which minimizes evaporation of volatile substances. This helps ensure the safety of the Fiberline environment.
As the polymerisation is exothermic (develops heat itself), energy consumption per unit produced is extremely
low. The energy consumption used in production of a composite profile is 1/4 of that required for steel, and 1/6
that for aluminium.
As a member of the Danish Plastics Federation (PD), Fiberline Composites A/S complies with Federation
environmental policies. According to an agreement with the Danish Ministry of the Environment, the Danish
Plastics Federation is obliged to participate actively in reduction of volatile organic compounds.
Regular environmental measurements, staff training and focus on waste and emission issues are significant
elements in the environmental control of Fiberline Composites A/S.
Fiberline Composites A/S are a member of Green Network, a regional organization of companies and municipalities.
The objective is to ensure continual improvement in the environments of the member companies. Fiberline
Composites A/S are self-sufficient with green energy from their own wind turbine which meets the needs of the
entire company.
Environmental impact at the user's site
Cured polyester or phenolic resin are stable, virtually non-degradable materials which do not pollute the
environment. In fact, a great deal of environmental impact is avoided (for example, in comparison with steel) due
to the low weight of the material and its need for very little maintenance.
For use in connection with machining of composite profiles, Fiberline Composites A/S have voluntarily compiled
environmental safety data for the polyester and phenolic qualities. The most recent version of the safety data is
available on request.

Waste handling / recycling
Fiberline profiles - or remains of them - are classified as fibreglass-reinforced unsaturated polyesters, and at the
end of their service life can be tipped or recycled.
Tipped • Fibreglass-reinforced polyester or phenolic resins are very stable materials which
can be tipped as ordinary industrial waste. The materials do not give off substances
that can harm the environment.
Recycling • First, it should be investigated if used profiles can be reclassified for use under
lower requirements and specifications in other circumstances.
• Another possibility for recycling begins with crushing and granulation. The
process is already functioning commercially in, for example, Germany, at Ercom
Composites Recycling GmbH. The company accepts fibreglass-reinforced
unsaturated polyesters against payment, and sells the granulate for reuse.
• Granulated remains of Fiberline profiles can be used as a filler and, to a limited

extent, as a reinforcing material.
• In controlled incineration, plastic materials release energy in amounts that make

them significant energy carriers for electricity and heating. The composition of
incineration gasses is largely comparable to that of incineration gasses from wood.
The remains are the glass fibres which can be reused as landfill or for manufactu-
ring glass wool.
• Tests at the German Arbeitsgemeinschaft Verstärkte Kunststoffe (AKV), among other

places, have shown that it is technically possible to break down the molecule
chains in uncured polyester by pyrolysis, and then reuse the resulting product as
new polyester raw materials. However, pyrolysis is not currently financially viable,
due to the prices of raw materials.
Fiberline Composites A/S will be pleased to answer any further questions.

Fiberline standard tolerances
Valid for structural profiles P2600, P3510 and P4506
CHAPTER 8: FIBERLINE STANDARD TOLERANCES
Fiberline standard tolerances comply with EN 13706
Section 1 Standard tolerances for P2600, P3510 and 4506 ................................................................. 8.1.03

CROSS-SECTION OF PROFILE TOLERANCES
Profile height and flange width NOMINAL MEASUREMENT (mm) H W
0 - 50 ± 0,20 ± 0,20
50 - 100 ± 0,30 ± 0,30
100 - 300 ± 0,35 ± 0,35
300 - ± 0,40 ± 0,40
W
Interior and exterior diameter, and ovality NOMINAL MEASUREMENT (mm) D d
0 - 10 ± 0,20 ± 0,20
10 - 20 ± 0,30 ± 0,30
D 20 - 50 ± 0,35 ± 0,35
50 - 100 ± 0,40 ± 0,40
100 - ± 0,45 ± 0,45
d
D
Thickness for open and closed profiles NOMINAL MEASUREMENT (mm) T1 T2
0-2 ± 0,15 ± 0,30

2-5 ± 0,20 ± 0,35
T2
5 - 10 ± 0,35 ± 0,45
10 - ± 0,45 ± 0,50
T1
Flatness in the transverse direction TOLERANCES
F < 0,008 × W mm
Other tolerances available on request. Guidelines also valid for design of special profiles

CROSS-SECTION OF PROFILE TOLERANCES
Size of angle TOLERANCE
Y
Y ±1,2 °
Y
Lateral buckling of flanged ends TOLERANCE
W
K< - 0,1
K 20 x t
W t
PROFILE IN LONGITUDINAL DIRECTION TOLERANCES
Straightness TOLERANCE
L
D D < 0,002 x L mm
L
Maximum 2 mm per metre
Torsion TOLERANCE
L
V < 1,0º x
1000
L
V
Maximum 1,0º per metre

PROFILE IN LONGITUDINAL DIRECTION TOLERANCES
Cutting-off length TOLERANCE ON-LINE
L +20/-0 mm
L
Can be machined to a finer tolerance
Straightness in cuts TOLERANCE ON-LINE

V
V ± 1,5°
Can be machined to a finer tolerance
MACHINING TOLERANCES TOLERANCES
Cutting-off length TOLERANCES
DS / ISO 2768 -1-m
L
Minimum ± 1 mm
Straightness in cuts TOLERANCES

V
DS / ISO 2768 -1-c
Drilling TOLERANCES
DS / ISO 2768 -1-c

b c
a
ø
Slitting of profiles TOLERANCES
DS / ISO 2768 -1-c

B
Minimum ± 1 mm

CHAPTER 9: MISCELLANEOUS
Section 1 Reference to standard and bibliography ........................................................................ 09.01.03
Section 2 Glossary .......................................................................................................................... 09.02.03
Fiberline Composites A/S - Design Manual - Chapter 9 - Rev. 2002

CHAPTER 9
Section 1: Reference to standard and bibliography
Reference to standard and bibliography ............................................................................................... 09.01.03

Standards
Eurocode 1: Actions on structures - General actions - Densities, self-weight, imposed loads for buildings
DS/EN 1991-1-1:2000
First edition 2002-06-11
Standard relation: EN 1991-1-1:2002
Eurocode 3: Steel structures
DS/ENV 1993-1-1:1993
First edition 1993-09-30
Standard relation: ENV 1993-1-1:1992
Reinforced plastics composites - Specifications for pultruded profiles
EN 13706
First edition June 2002
Bibliography
Structural Design of Polymer Composites - EUROCOMP Design Code and Handbook
The European Structural Polymeric Composites Group
Edited by John L. Clarke, Sir William Halcrow and Partners Ltd. London, UK
Published by E & FN Spon, an imprint of Chapman & Hall, 2-6 Boundary Row, London SE1 8HN, UK
First edition 1996
ISBN 0 419 19450 9

CHAPTER 9
Section 2: Glossary

Glossary A - E
A B Coefficient of thermal Curing agent or hardener
expansion (CTE) A catalytic or reactive
A4 Barcol Hardness A material’s fractional agent brings about
Grade classification for A surface hardness value change in length for a polymerization when
stainless steel, acid-proof obtained by measuring given unit change of added to a resin (see
bolts, nuts and discs. the penetration resistance temperature. catalyst).
of a given material to a
sharp steel point under a Cure temperature
Accelerator spring load. The Barcol Cohesion The temperature at which
A chemical additive that Impressor is an instru- Adherence of a single a material attains final
hastens cure or chemical ment that measures substance to itself. Also, cure.
reaction (see also hardness on a 0-100 the property holding a
catalyst). scale. single substance together.
D
Bidirectional laminate Composite
Additive A laminate with fibres A material that combines Damping
An ingredient mixed into oriented in more than one fibre and a binding matrix Diminishing the intensity of
resin to improve direction on the same to maximize specific vibrations.
properties. Examples plane. performance properties.
include plasticizers, Neither element merges Delamination
initiators, light stabililsers Breakout completely with the other. The separation of ply
and flame retardants. Separation or breakage of layers due to adhesive
fibres when the edges of Compressive strength failure or the separation of
Adhesive a composite part are The capacity to resist a layers of fabric from the
A substance applied to drilled or cut. crushing or buckling force; core structure. A
mating surfaces to bond the maximum delamination may be
them by surface Bromine compressive load a associated with bridging,
attachment. An adhesive A fire-retardant (halogen) specimen sustains divided drilling and trimming.
can be in liquid, film or used to reduce or by its original cross-
paste form. eliminate a resin’s sectional area. Die, moulding tool
tendency to burn. An assembly of parts
Continuous mat containing the space from
Adhesive film C A material formed from which the moulding takes
A thin plastic film onto fibres of yarns with its form.
which premixed adhesives Carbon fibre random fibre orientation.
are cast. Reinforcing fibre known E
for its lightweight, high Creep
Anisotropic strength and high The dimensional change in Eccentricity moment
Fibre directionality in which stiffness. Fibres are a material under physical Moment resulting from a
different properties are produced by high load over time beyond force not acting upon the
exhibited when tested temperature treatment of instantaneous elastic line of gravity.
along axes of different an organic precursor fibre deformation.
directions. based on PAN E-glass (electrical glass)
(polyarcrylonitrile), rayon or Cure Borosilicate glass fibres
Aramid pitch in an inert To irreversibly change the possessing conductive
A high-strength, high- atmosphere at molecular structure and properties; most often
stiffness aromatic temperatures above physical properties of a used in conventional
polyamide fibre. 1800°F. thermosetting resin by polymer matrix
chemical reaction via heat composites.
Catalyst and catalysts alone or in
A substance that combination, with or Elasticity
promotes and/or controls without pressure. The property by which
curing of a compound materials tend to recover
without being consumed their original size and
in the reaction. shape after deformation.

Glossary E - I
Elastic limit F appearance and/or lower materials or non-metallic
The greatest stress a density and cost. materials (e.g., resin-
material is capable of Fatigue impregnated paper or
sustaining without perma- The failure of a material’s Finite element Analysis woven fabric) and formed
nent strain remaining after mechanical properties (FEA) into hexagonal nested
complete release of the caused by repeated stress A computer analysis cells.
stress. over time. technique using the finite
element method, often Hybrid
Electrolytic (galvanic) Fatigue strength used to model complex A fibrous product made
corrosion The maximum cyclical structures. with two or more types of
accelerated corrosion of a stress a material can reinforcing fibres, e.g.
metal because of an withstand for a given Flexural strength glass and carbon.
electrical contact with a number of cycles before it The strength of a material
more noble metal or non- fails. in bending expressed Hybrid composite
metallic conductor in a usually in terms of force A composite reinforced by
corrosive electrolyte. Fibre architecture per unit area, as the hybrid.
The design of a fibrous stress of a bent test
Elongation part in which the fibres are sample at the instant of Hybrid weave
The fractional increase in arranged in a particular failure. Woven fibrous product
length of a material way to achieve the based on two or more
stressed in tension. When desired result. This may Folding materials.
expressed as a percent- include braided, stitched Defect due to bending/
age of the original length, or woven fabrics, mats, folding of fibres. I
it is called percentage of rovings or carbon tows.
elongation. G Impact strength
Fibre content/glass A material’s ability to
Epoxy resin content Glass fibre withstand shock loading
A common thermoset The amount of fibre in a Glass fibres are as measured by fracturing
material used as a bon- composite expressed as a manufactured by a specimen.
ding matrix to hold fibres ratio to the matrix. “drawing” melted glass
together. When mixed through nozzles. Due to Impregnate
with a catalyst, epoxy Fibre reinforced plastics its relatively high strength, To saturate the voids and
resins are resistant to A composite material or easy machining and low interstices of a
chemicals and water and part that consists of a price, glass fibre is the reinforcement with a resin.
are unaffected by heat or resin matrix containing most commonly used
cold. reinforcing fibres such as reinforcement for polymer- Interface
glass or carbon having based composites. The surface between two
Exotherm greater strength or materials (in glass fibres,
Heat released during a stiffness than the resin. H for instance, the area at
chemical reaction (e.g., The term GRP is most which the glass and sizing
curing). often used to denote glass Halogenated resin meet; in a laminate, the
fibre-reinforced plastics. A resin combined with area at which the
Extenders chlorine or bromine to reinforcement and lamina-
Low-cost materials used Filament winding increase fire retardancy. ting resin meet.)
to dilute or extend high- An automated process for
cost resins without fabricating composites in Heat-distortion tempera- Interlaminar
extensive loss of which continuous roving, ture (HDT) Existing or occurring
properties. either preimpregnated The temperature at which between two or more
with resin or drawn a test bar deflects a adjacent laminae.
Extrude through a resin bath, is certain amount under
to form products of wound around a rotating specified temperature and Interlaminar shear
constant cross-sectional mandrel. stated load. A shear force that
shape by forcing plastic produces displacement
material through a die. Filler Honeycomb between two laminae
Material added to the A lightweight cellular along the plane or their
mixed resin to increase structure made from interface.
viscosity, improve either metallic sheet

Glossary I - P
Isocyanate Matrix N Polyester
A highly reactive monomer The material in which the Thermosetting resins
used in reaction injection fibre reinforcements of a Non-destructive produced by dissolving
moulding (RIM). composite system are inspection (NDI) unsaturated, generally
embedded. Thermoplastic Determination of material linear, alkyd resins in a
Isotropic and thermoset resin or part characteristics vinyl-type active monomer
Fibre directionality with systems, as well as metal without permanent such as styrene. The
uniform properties in all and ceramic, can be alteration of the test resins are usually furnished
directions, independent of used. subject. (Non-destructive in solution form, but
the direction of applied testing (NDT) and non- powdered solids are also
load. Micro-cracking destructive evaluation available.
Cracking in composites at (NDE) are generally
K points where thermal considered synonymous Polymer
stresses exceed the with NDI). A large molecule formed
Kevlar strength of the matrix. by combining many
A strong, lightweight P smaller molecules or
aramid fibre trademarked Modulus monomers in a regular
by DuPont and used as a The physical Peel ply pattern.
reinforcement fibre. measurement of stiffness Layer of material applied
in a material, equalling the to a lay up surface that is Polymerization
L ratio of applied load removed from the cured A chemical reaction that
(stress) to the resultant laminate prior to bonding links monomers to form
Laminate deformation of the operations, leaving a polymers.
A material composed of material such as elasticity clean, resin-rich surface
more layers of the same or or shear. ready for bonding. Porosity
different types of material. The presence of visible
Modulus of Elasticity Peel strength voids within a solid
Laminate The ratio of normal stress Strength of an adhesive material into which either
To unite layers with a to the corresponding bond obtained by stress air or liquids may pass.
bonding material, usually strain for tensile or that is applied „in a peeling
via pressure and heat. compressive stresses less mode.“ Postcure
than the proportional limit Additional elevated
Lap joint of the material. Phenolic resin temperature cure, usually
A joint made by overlap- Thermosetting resin without pressure, to
ping two parts and bon- Moisture absorption produced by condensation improve final properties
ding them together. A material assimilation of of an aromatic alcohol and / or complete the
water vapour from air, as with an aldehyde, cure. In certain resins,
Low profile distinguished from water particularly phenol with complete cure and
Describes resin absorption by immersion, formaldehyde. ultimate mechanical
compounds formulated for which results in weight properties are attained
low-to-zero shrinkage gain. Pinholes only by exposure of the
during moulding. Small holes caused by the cured resin to higher
Monomer mould used. temperatures than those
M A single molecule that of curing.
can react with like or Poisson´s ratio
Mat unlike molecules to form a When a material is Puller
A fibrous reinforcing polymer. stretched, its cross Device that pulls out the
material composed of sectional area changes as fully cured profile from the
chopped filaments (for Mould release agent well as its length. processing equipment.
chopped-strand mat) or A lubricant used to Poisson´s ratio is the
swirled filaments (for prevent a part from constant relating these
continuous-strand mat) sticking to a mould. changes in dimensions,
with a binder applied to and is defined as the ratio
maintain form; available in of the change in width per
blankets of various widths, unit width to the change
weights, thicknesses and in length per unit length.
lengths.

Glossary P - W
Pultrusion / pultruding S Stress corrosion Thermoset system
An automated, continuous Preferential attack of The matrix, the thermoset
process for manufacturing S-glass areas under stress in a and the additives required
composite rods, tubes Magnesia / alumina / corrosive environment, to manufacture the end
and structural shapes silicate glass that alone would not have product by the chosen
having a constant cross- reinforcement designed to caused corrosion. production method.
section. Roving and other provide very high tensile
reinforcements are strength; commonly used Stress crack Tool
saturated with resin and in high-performance External or internal crack Another term for die or
continuously pulled parts. in a composite caused by mould.
through a heated die, tensile stresses; cracking
where the part is formed may be present internally, U
and cured. The cured part Shear externally or in
is then cut to length. An action or stress combination. Unidirectional (UD)
resulting from applied Orientation of fibres in the
Pyrolysis forces that causes or Surfacing veil same direction, as in
The decomposition or tends to cause two Accompanies other unidirectional fabric, tape
transformation of a contiguous parts of a reinforcing mats and or laminate.
compound caused by body to slide relative to fabrics to enhance the
heat. each other. quality of the surface V
finish. Designed to block
Q Shear strength out the fibre patterns of Voids
The maximum shear the underlying Pockets of entrapped gas
Quasi-isotropic stress that a material is reinforcements, it often that have been cured into
Approximating isotropy by capable of sustaining. adds ultraviolet protection a laminate.
orienting plies in several to the structure.
directions. Sizing Vinyl esters
A solution of chemical Synthetic fibre A class of thermosetting
R additives used to coat Fibre made of materials resins containing ester of
filaments. The additives other than glass or acrylic and / or
Reinforcement protect the filaments from carbon, such as polyester. methacrylic acids.
The key element added to water absorption and
matrix to provide required abrasion; they also T Viscosity
properties (primarily, lubricate the filaments and The tendency of a
strength and stiffness); reduce static electricity. Tensile strength
strength material to resist flow. As
ranges from short fibres The maximum stress temperature increases,
and continuous fibres Span sustained by a composite the viscosity of most
through complex textile Length of span or length specimen before it fails in materials decreases.
forms. of beam. a tension test.
Volatile organic
Resin Thermoplastic compounds (VOCs)
A solid or pseudosolid Stiffness A composite matrix Chemical substances,
material with indefinite and A material’s ability to resist capable of being such as solvents, that
often high molecular bending; relationship of repeatedly softened by an readily evaporate or
weight and a softening or load to deformation for a increase in temperature volatilize into the air.
melting range that exhibits particular material. and hardened by a
a tendency to flow when decrease in temperature. W
subjected to stress. (As Stress
composite matrices, Internal resistance to Thermoset Water absorption
resins bind together change in size or shape, Composite matrix cured The ratio of weight of
reinforcement fibres.) expressed in force per by heat and pressure or water absorbed by a
unit area. with a catalyst into an material to weight of dry
Roving infusible and insoluble material.
A collection of bundles of Stress concentration material. Once cured, a
continuous glass fibre The magnification of thermoset cannot be
filaments, either as applied stress in the returned to the uncured
untwisted strands or as region of a notch, void, state.
twisted yarn. hole or inclusion.

Glossary W - Y
Waterjet
High-pressure water
stream used for cutting
polymer composite parts.
Woven roving
Heavy, coarse fabric
produced by weaving
continuous roving bundles.
Young’s modulus
oung’s
See Modulus of Elasticity.


Fiberline Design Manual PDF

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

Fiberline Design Manual PDF

Uploaded by

Document Information

Original Title

Copyright

Available Formats

Share this document

Share or Embed Document

Sharing Options

Did you find this document useful?

Is this content inappropriate?

Copyright:

Available Formats

Fiberline Design Manual PDF

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

Preface

New Sections in the 2nd edition

Standards and calculations

CHAPTER 1 CONSTRUCTION CALCULATIONS

Section 3 Profiles used as beams and columns

Section 4 Bolted joints

Section 5 Glued joints

Section 6 Profile tables

Fiberline Design Manual - Revised 2002

Section 1 Planks, pultruded gratings and moulded gratings

CHAPTER 3: BRACKETS FOR ASSEMBLY

The products and how to use them ................................................................................................................... 3.1.03

CHAPTER 4: FIRE TECHNICAL PROPERTIES

Fire Technical Properties .................................................................................................................................... 6.1.03

CHAPTER 5: CHEMICAL RESISTANCE

Introduction ....................................................................................................................................................... 5.1.03

CHAPTER 6 HANDLING AND TRANSPORTING PROFILES

Section 1 Machining pultruded profiles ......................................................................................................................... 6.1.03

Section 2 Handling and transporting structures ........................................................................................................... 6.2.03

CHAPTER 7: ENVIRONMENT AND DISPOSAL / RECYCLING

Environment during manufacturing and machining ............................................................................................. 7.1.03

CHAPTER 8: FIBERLINE STANDARD TOLERANCES

Standard tolerances for P2600, P3510 and 4506 ............................................................................................... 8.1.03

Fiberline Design Manual - Revised 2002

Section 1 Reference to standards and bibliography

Fiberline Design Manual - Revised 2002

Fiberline Composites A/S - Design Manual - Revised 2002 0.0.1

Fiberline Composites A/S - Design Manual - Revised 2002 0.0.3

Resin injection Ventilation

Heating and curing Pulling devices Saw

0.0.4 Fiberline Composites A/S - Design Manual - Revised 2002

Fig. 2: Fiberline pultrusion equipment

Fig. 3: Precise control of fibreglass reinforcement

Fiberline Composites A/S - Design Manual - Revised 2002 0.0.5

Unidirectional Spun Mock

Continuous mat Weave Complex mat Bidirectional complex

0.0.6 Fiberline Composites A/S - Design Manual - Revised 2002

Fiberline Composites A/S - Design Manual - Revised 2002 0.0.7

British petroleum platform: there are

0.0.8 Fiberline Composites A/S - Design Manual - Revised 2002

*Are often referred to as fillers.

See also the Fiberline Quality Codex on pages 0.10-0.11

Fiberline Composites A/S - Design Manual - Revised 2002 0.0.9

„Low-profile“ quality provides:

Isophthalic polyester provides

P2600 Isophthalic polyester (standard low profile)

0.0.10 Fiberline Composites A/S - Design Manual - Revised 2002

For more detailed material properties, see Chapter 1: Construction calculation.

Fiberline Composites A/S - Design Manual - Revised 2002 0.0.11

0.0.12 Fiberline Composites A/S - Design Manual - Revised 2002

Therefore, Fiberline recommends the use of a washer diameter of 2.5 · d

Fiberline Composites A/S - Design Manual - Revised 2002 0.0.13

Permanently loaded structures

0.0.14 Fiberline Composites A/S - Design Manual - Revised 2002

Section 3 Profiles as beams and columns

Section 4 Bolted joints

Section 5 Glued joints

Section 6 Profile tables

Fiberline konstruktionshåndbog - Kapitel 1 - Rev. 2002